contract specifications - bidnet

CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS

SOCCER / SOFTBALL RESTROOM AND CONCESSION

BUILDING 2017

Project No. PW160019

California State University, Sacramento Facilities Management

6000 J Street Sacramento, CA 96819-6002

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom and Concession Building

00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 0100 – General Requirements 01 0100 – Appendix A 01 0100 – Appendix B 07 7419 – Construction and Demolition Materials Recycling Requirements 00 1151A – Form: Recycling Plan 00 1151B – Form: Recycling and Disposal Report Contract Schedule Form CSUS Schedule of Values Form

DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4100 - Demolition DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE

03 1000 - Concrete Formwork and Accessories 03 2100 - Reinforcing Steel 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY 04 0500 - Mortar and Grout 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 -- METALS 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry 06 1800 - Glued Laminated Construction

DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation 07 2500 - Weather Barriers 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 9005 - Joint Sealers

DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels 08 3313 - Coiling Counter Doors 08 3323 - Overhead Coiling Doors 08 5659 - Service Window Units 08 7100 - Door Hardware



08 9100 - Louvers DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES

09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 3000 - Tiling 09 7733 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings

DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES 10 1101 - Visual Display Boards 10 1400 - Signage 10 2113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 2813 - Toilet Accessories 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 11 4000 - Foodservice Equipment 11 4001 - Custom Foodservice Equipment 11 6500 – Athletic Equipment DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS (NOT USED) DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 -- DIVISION 21 - RESERVED (NOT USED) DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING

22 0100 - Operation and Maintenance of Plumbing 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 0523 - General Duty Valves for Plumbing 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation General Requirements 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 1100 - Facility Water Distribution 22 1116 - Domestic Water Piping 22 1119 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 1300 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage 22 1316 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 1319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0100 - Operation and Maintenance of HVAC Systems 23 0500 - Common Work Results For HVAC 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0530 - Hangers and Support for HVAC Ductwork 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment



23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 0900 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 3113 - Metal Ducts 23 3313 - Dampers 23 3343 - Flexible Connectors DIVISION 24 -- RESERVED (NOT USED) DIVISION 25 -- INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NOT USED) DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL

26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical 26 0519 - Conductors and Cables 26 0523 - Control Voltage Elect Power Cables 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes 26 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls 26 0553 - Identification 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices 26 2416 - Panelboards 26 2726 - Wiring Devices 26 2813 - Fuses 26 2816 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers 26 5100 - Interior Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT USED)

DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK 31 0000 - Earth Moving 31 2500 - Erosion and Sediment Control DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1313 - Site Concrete 32 3113 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 1000 - Water Utilities 33 3000 - Sanitary Sewer Utilities 33 4000 - Storm Drainage Utilities

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restrooms and Concession Building

00 1010 - 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01010

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

A. A new single story building adjacent to existing soccer and softball venues containing restroom, concession and storage uses. The total floor area is approximately 1,000 sf. a. Construction Type V-B. b. Slab on grade, concrete unit masonry construction, with wood roof framing and

metal roof. c. Site work includes rerouting of an existing water line, grading, paving, and

modifications & additions to existing fencing. B. Soccer Games & construction coordination. The first soccer game starts on August

11th and will continue through November, see appendix A and B at the end of this section for game schedules. Throughout the soccer season the contractor shall make ready the entire site on game days, the contractor shall provide necessary fencing/barricades to maintain a safe work site.

1.02 LOCATION California State University, Sacramento Soccer and Softball Stadiums 6000 J St. Sacramento, CA 95819

1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Prior to commencing work, a Pre-Construction Conference will be held. At this time, the Contractor shall be instructed regarding University rules and regulations, which are pertinent, and also a project foreman will be assigned by the contractor.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES & EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor may use the University's water and utilities to operate his equipment etc., free of charge, contingent upon the ability of the present switching and distribution system to supply the demand without overload. All material for any special or extended connection for such utilities is to be furnished by the Contractor at their own expense.

B. Under no circumstances may CSUS-owned equipment be borrowed and/or used by the

contractor to complete and portions of work under the contract. All equipment necessary to perform required contract work in a safe manner and procurement of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

1.05 SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMEN



The Contractor shall give personal supervision and direction to the work. He shall keep a qualified foreman, who is satisfactory to the University, constantly upon the premises while his work is in progress. The foreman shall represent the Contractor in his absence and have full authority to carry out the instruction of the Asscociate Vice President, Facilities Management or his duly authorized representative regarding materials, storage and workmanship. The Contractor shall also provide competent and skilled journeymen in the respective trades required to perform the work. The University reserves the right to interview and approve Contractor's foreman/ representative prior to commencement of work.

1.07 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES A Job-Site inspection PRIOR to bidding is mandatory. The Contractor should inspect the

site where services are to be performed. Bidders shall satisfy themselves as to all general and specific conditions that may affect the cost of performance of the contract. All additional costs related to oversights or failure on the part of the Contractor to assess existing conditions shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.08 PRE-BID INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. No oral representations or interpretation will be made to any bidder as to the meaning of

the contract documents. Requests for interpretation shall be made in writing and delivered to the University at least ten (10) days before the time announced for bid opening. Interpretation, where necessary, will be made by the University in the form of an addendum to the contract documents and, when issued, will be sent as promptly as is practicable to all parties to whom the bid documents have been issued. All such addenda shall become part of the contract.

B. It shall be the bidder’s responsibility to call to the attention of the University any missing

pages or drawings in the contract documents including the addenda. 1.09 INTERPRETATION OF AND ADHERENCE TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS A. Correlation: Contract documents shall be interpreted as being complementary, requiring

a complete project. Any requirement occurring in any one of the Contract Documents is as binding as though occurring in all Contract Documents. Generally, specifications address quality, types of materials, and contract conditions while the drawings show placement, sizes, and fabrication details of materials.

B. Conflicts: In the event of a conflict in Contract Documents, the priorities stated below

shall govern: 1. Addenda shall govern over all other Contract Documents and subsequent addenda

shall govern over prior addenda only to the extent specified. 2. In case of conflict between plans and specifications, the specifications shall govern. 3. Conflicts within the plans: a. Schedules, when identified as such, shall govern over all other portions of the

plans.



b. Specific notes shall govern over all other notes and all other portions of the plans except the schedules described in (3) (a) above.

c. Larger scale drawings shall govern over smaller scale drawings. d. Figured or numerical dimensions shall govern over dimensions obtained by

scaling. 4. Conflicts within the specifications: "Contract General Conditions" shall govern over all sections of the specifications

except for specific modifications thereto that may be stated in Supplementary General Conditions or addenda.

C. Omissions

1. If Contract Documents are not complete as to any minor detail of a required construction system or with regard to the manner of combining or installing of parts, materials, or equipment, but there exists an accepted trade standard for good and workmanlike construction, such detail shall be deemed to be an implied requirement of Contract Documents in accordance with such standard.

2. “Minor detail" shall include the concept of substantially identical components, where the price of each such component is small even though the aggregate cost or importance is substantial, and shall include a single component which is incidental, even though its cost or importance may be substantial.

3. The quality and quantity of the parts or material so supplied shall conform to trade standards and be compatible with the type, composition, strength, size, and profile of the parts of materials otherwise set forth in Contract Documents.

1.10 WARRANTY A. All workmanship and materials specified and completed under this specification shall be

warranted in writing by the major materials manufacturer covering all labor and material for a period of one (1) year unless noted otherwise in the specific section, with no dollar limit or restriction. Individual items may require specific warranty for a longer period of time. These requirements are contained in detailed specifications. Provisions, conditions and limitations of warranty are to be included in bid proposal.

B. By this guarantee, the Contractor agrees within guarantee period, to repair or replace

any work together with any adjacent work which may be displaced in so doing, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the contact or which is defective in its workmanship or material, all without any expense whatsoever to California State University, Sacramento within 14 days of discovery.

C. Warranty period will begin when the campus gives final acceptance notification to the

contractor. D. At the completion of the project and prior to authorization of final payment, the contractor

will provide a letter to the university certifying that all products and material installed on the project are free of asbestos.

1.11 DAMAGE TO FACILITIES



The Contractor is responsible for restoring all facilities and grounds to their original working condition. In the event of damage to any existing facility, if the Contractor does not repair that damage within a reasonable time (ten (10) working days), the University will arrange for the repair and bill the Contractor performing the work described herein.

1.12 AVAILABILITY OF THE SITE

Project areas will be available for Contract work between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on workdays. If Contractor wishes to perform work during hours or days other than the hours or days stated, he shall submit a written request two (2) days prior to start of work. The request shall include number of work hours, starting times and dates of proposed work. Contractor personnel shall begin work during requested times only the after approval of the request by the Contracting Officer. The decision will be made within two working days.

1.13 JOB START AND COMPLETION DATE

The Contractor is required to complete all the contract work within 90 (ninety) calendar days from the Notice to Proceed. The estimated contract time is June 15, 2017 to September 13, 2017.

1.14 SAFETY AND HEALTH PROTECTION

A. Health and Safety Information Submittals:

1. The Contractor will be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. All installations, equipment and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of CAL/OSHA, the Uniform Building Code, the State Fire Marshal, regulations for the accommodation of physically handicapped persons in buildings and facilities used by the public, safety orders of the California Division of Occupational Safety and Health, National Electrical Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code and other applicable laws, codes or regulations. Nothing in these plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes.

2. In accordance state and federal regulations you are required to maintain copies of your compliance programs, certificates, permits, etc. at the worksite for inspection by regulators. Such documentation must also be made available to representatives of California State University, Sacramento upon request. Documentation programs may include but are not limited to the following:

Codes of Safe Work Practices as required by 8 CCR 1509. Confined Space Entry Program as required by 8 CCR 5157. Electrical Safety Program as required by 8 CCR 3314. Fall Protection Program as required 8 CCR 1670. Hazardous Materials Communications Program (HazCom) as required by 8 CCR

5194.



Hazardous Waste Operation Program/Site Health and Safety Plan (HAZWOPER) as required by 8 CCR 5192.

Injury Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) as required by 8 CCR 1509. Lockout/Tag out Program as required by 8 CCR 3314. Powered Industrial Trucks or Earth Moving Equipment Training Program as

required by 8 CCR 364. Respiratory Protection Program as required by 8 CCR 5144. Safety Instruction Program as required by 8 CCR 1510. Trenching Excavation Program as required by 8 CCR 5144. Storm Water Control Plan per RWQCB requirements. Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan per 40 CFR Any other health and safety program procedures not listed that the contractor

recognizes must be followed during the construction activity. 3. Immediately following the award of the contract and before any work begins, the

Contractor shall certify in writing that he has an Illness and Injury Prevention Program that meets the requirements of Section 3203 of Title 8, Industrial Relations, California Code of Regulations.

4. The Contractor shall provide one (1) copy of each Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each chemical and product used by the Contractor for work to be performed at CSUS to the Office of Facilities Management. The Contractor shall also maintain, on the job site, MSDS sheets for all chemicals and products to be used for work to be performed at CSUS.

B. Safety Equipment:

1. Contractors are required to operate and maintain their own safety equipment. Safety equipment includes, but is not limited to:

Tripods for confined space entries Life lines Harnesses Scaffolding Respiratory protective equipment Personal protective equipment (safety glasses, gloves, hard hats, wet weather

equipment, etc.) Shoring Barricades Gas detection equipment for atmospheric assessment Other equipment necessary to safely complete the project

C. Job Start Safety Meetings:

1. Prior to beginning the awarded project, the contractor will meet with representatives

of CSUS in a Job Start Safety Meeting for the purpose of reviewing safety procedures and other pertinent safety information that will aid in ensuring safe project completion. During the Job Start Safety Meeting the CSUS and the contractor will review and complete the:



“Contractor Safety - Potential Hazard Notification” form, and the “Job Start Safety Meeting Checklist”

D. Site Health and Safety Plans:

1. Health and Safety Plans will be required when construction activities are conducted in hazardous waste areas regulated under Title 8 Section 5192 (HAZWOPER) of the California Code of Regulations. The CSUS will assist the contractor in the determination of applicability of this regulation to any work location in question.

2. When conducting projects regulated under Title 8 Section 5189 (Process Safety Management) of the California Code of Regulations, the contractor shall complete training that will qualify them to work in these regulated areas. The CSUS will assist the contractor in identifying the appropriate training required.

E. Contractor Designated Health and Safety Representative:

1. The contractor is responsible for appointing an individual to act as the Health and Safety Officer for the awarded project. Contractor Health and Safety Officers must have a complete knowledge of the safe work practices (OSHA guidelines/regulations) governing the project. A statement/resume outlining the Health and Safety Officer’s qualifications (consistent with the regulatory program information requested) shall be submitted to the CSUS Contract Administrator.

2. The contractor’s Health and Safety Officer shall participate in the Job Start Safety Meeting and will have the authority during the project to correct safety deficiencies identified at the construction location. The Contractor’s appointed Health and Safety Officer shall address any “Notice of Non-Compliance (Safety)” issued by the CSUS Contract Administrator.

3. The contractor understands that the CSUS Contract Administrator has the responsibility of ensuring that the project is completed in compliance with the contract specifications. Therefore, the CSUS Contract Administrator, in completing his/her responsibilities, has the right to protect CSUS personnel (employees, students, visitors) from non-compliant hazardous work conditions created by the contractor and will request to have hazards abated prior to inspecting and accepting any aspect of the project.

F. Hazard Disclosures Relevant to Contractor Work Site:

1. Known Laboratory results (The preparer of the contract specification must address any known laboratory results as part of this section, i.e., lab results revealing the presence of ACBM or hazardous materials in adjacent labs, etc.)

2. Special considerations and hazard information (Make sure that all information pertaining to unique hazards of the CSUS, that the contractor will be exposed to, have been disclosed in the specifications.)

1.15 CODES AND STANDARDS

All references to codes, specifications and standards in the technical sections and on the drawings shall mean and are intended to be the latest addition, or revision of such standards in effect as of the date of these documents.



1.16 DEBRIS, REMOVAL AND STANDARDS

A. The Contractor shall not allow the accumulation of rubbish in or around the area in which work is to be performed; he shall remove the debris at least daily and more often if necessary. Upon the completion of the specified work, the Contractor shall remove all temporary structures, waste materials and rubbish around the equipment or upon the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting a completed California State University, Sacramento Solid Waste Reporting Form to Facilities Services. This form shall show the weight in pounds of the waste generated over the course of the entire project. All areas affected by the project shall be left clean and in the condition found prior to construction.

B. CSU Sacramento requires that all construction, renovation and demolition wastes are

monitored (by weight) and that all recyclable or reusable construction, renovation and demolition wastes are diverted from landfills and combustion/ transformation facilities. Contractors are required to submit tonnage receipts for all materials disposed of or diverted from disposal at any project site on the CSU campus. These receipts will be submitted with the summary form provided in this contract. See specification section 01151 for more information.

C. Contractors are also required to divert at least 50% of all potentially divertible materials

from a project site. Materials to be diverted include but are not limited to: corrugated cardboard; pallets; scrap metal; asphalt; brick and concrete; scrap wood; and sheetrock.

D. A complete list of scrap metal recyclers is available in the scrap metal heading of the

local yellow pages. Other construction and demolition recyclers are listed by the California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB) on their website at www.ciwmb.ca.gov/ConDemo

1.17 CONTRACT WORK SCHEDULE

Following the award of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for submitting a complete California State University, Sacramento Standard Contract Schedule to the Asscociate Vice President, Facilities Management prior to the start of any work. This schedule shall show the times of anticipated periods of starting and completion of each individual unit and/or phase of construction. The Contractor shall furnish revised contract schedules as may be necessary during the progress of work. NO WORK SHALL BE DONE UNTIL SCHEDULE IS APPROVED. The Contractor is to use the Schedule of Values provided in this contract when invoicing.

1.18 DAYS DEFINED

All references to time periods in days shall be construed to be CALENDAR DAYS, unless specifically noted as workdays. Workdays are defined as State 8-hour duty days, Monday through Friday and excludes Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays.

1.19 STANDARDS OF TESTING LABORATORY



Fire Ratings: Contractor shall submit a written certification when specifications require proof of materials to conform to the different requirements of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM) Furnish materials with labels attached. Onsite installation of labels is not permitted; no exceptions will be allowed.

1.20 UTILITY SHUTDOWNS A. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE IN THE

CONTRACT, ALL WORK REQUIRING ELECTRICAL OUTAGES SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED ON WEEKENDS.

REQUESTS FOR OUTAGES SHALL BE MADE AT LEAST 7 DAYS IN ADVANCE OF THE DATE DESIRED AND INCLUDE AT LEAST ONE ALTERNATE DATE.

CONTRACTOR IS CAUTIONED THAT ELECTRICAL OUTAGES MAY NOT BE GRANTED ON THE DATE (S) REQUESTED; THEREFORE, CONTRACTOR SHOULD SCHEDULE HIS WORK SO AS TO MAINTAIN SOME FLEXIBILITY.

B. No utility service is to be interrupted for any purpose without prior approval of Facilities

Management. Where fire protection, detection or evacuation alarms are affected, written approval from Facilities Management must be obtained.

C. Requests for permission to interrupt services shall be submitted in writing to Facilities

Management 7 working days prior to date of proposed interruption, notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph "AVAILABILITY OF SITE" of this section. Request shall give the following information:

1. Locations of Interruptions 2. Hours and Dates of Interruptions 3. Services Affected D. Services shall not be interrupted until receipt of approval of proposed hours and dates

from Facilities Management. E. Utility interruptions shall only be performed by CSUS Personnel. 1.21 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

A. Provisions of this paragraph and its sub-paragraphs shall apply to those items specified

in the technical sections under paragraph entitled SUBMITTALS. B. Materials and Equipment:

1. Submittals called for under this paragraph shall be provided to Facilities

Management within 10 calendar days after notice to proceed. If Contractor is providing exact product or material specified, the Contractor shall, in lieu of the submittal, provide a letter in which he certifies that the specific product or material will be provided.

2. Pursuant to the contract clause entitled MATERIAL



AND WORKMANSHIP, the Contractor shall furnish in quadruplicate to Facilities Management for approval full information including lists, affidavits, certificates and manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Furnish two additional copies for those additional items that require fire protection compliance in accordance with a specified standard.

4. Facilities Management will return submittals within 5 calendar days. 5. The 5-calendar day period for Facilities Services approval referred to above shall

exclude mailing time. 6. Approvals may be based on manufacturer’s published ratings. 7. If Contractor is unable or considers it impractical to make a material submittal within

10 calendar days after award of contract, he may request additional time from Facilities Management. Such requests shall include justification for additional time and specify date by which submittal will be made. Approval of any additional time shall be at the discretion of Facilities Management.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Pursuant to the Contract Clause entitled SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR

CONSTRUCTION, Contractor shall furnish shop drawings for approval to Facilities Services within 21 calendar days after award of contract, where shop drawings are required in the provisions of the technical section or sections.

2. Where work under any section is interrelated or interdependent with work under other sections, shop drawings shall be submitted concurrently for those sections.

3. One copy of drawings dated and stamped as approved or disapproved will be returned to Contractor not later than 5 calendar days after receipt by the University.

D. Product Selections: Comply with the following for selection of products, materials and

equipment: 1. Single Product Named: Provide only that product, unless determined to be

unavailable, non-compatible with the work, or non-complying with requirements or governing regulations.

2. Two or More Products Named: Selection from named products is Contractor's option, provided selection complies with requirements and regulations.

3. "Or Equal" Clause: Provide named product, which complies with requirements, or comply with requirements for gaining approval on "substitution" to select and use an unnamed product.

E. Substitutions 1. Specific brand names mentioned shall establish standards of quality and

performance and the phrase "or equal by Facilities Services" shall be implied unless otherwise noted as a sole source.

2. Substitute materials and equipment shall be equal in quality and utility to those specified. Any substituted materials and equipment installed without the approval of Facilities Management shall be removed and replaced with approved materials and equipment without cost to the University.

F. Types of Submittals



1. MANUFACTURER'S DATA (MD): MD consists of specifications, engineering data,

and complete descriptive information of the item specified. MD shall be provided by and printed by the manufacturer.

2. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS: To be submitted for each chemical and product used by the Contractor as required by OSHA'S Hazard Communications Standard 29CFR 1910.1200 as

Supplemented by Cal OSHA T8CCR5194. 3. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (MII): shall consist of data

describing complete installation of the item specified. MII shall be provided by and printed by the manufacturer.

4. SAMPLES: Samples shall consist of actual manufacturer's product and are further defined in the SCHEDULE and/or technical section.

5. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS (ABD): ABD shall consist of complete and accurately dimensioned plans, sections, and details of the finished facility.

6. OTHER: Other submittal types will include, but are not limited to, commercial warranties, notification letters, and product specification sheets. See SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS and technical sections for special submittal requirements.

G. Mandatory Submittal Format: 1. Submittal data shall be complete in all respects and indicate full compliance with the

applicable technical sections. 2. Facilities Management reserves the right to disapprove submittals not meeting the

above requirements. H. Waiver of Submittal Items: 1. If the Contractor chooses to furnish the item specified in the technical section as a

standard of quality, i.e., manufacturer and model or catalog number as applicable, no material submittal is required.

2. The Contractor shall supply a completed construction activity schedule, broken down by trades, that is provided by Facilities Management, in these specifications. The performance schedule shall be submitted at the Start Work Meeting for approval by Facilities Management.

1.22 SITE SECURITY The Contractor has sole responsibility for providing and maintaining site security in the

work area during and after work hours for the duration of the project. Contractor will use cones, signs, barricades, construction tape, or temporary fencing to prohibit pedestrian traffic in project areas if required.

1.23 DRAWINGS A. The drawings form a part of this specification and contract. Any work and materials

shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications or vice versa, shall be executed the same as if specifically mentioned in both. The work shall be installed as indicated; however, in certain instances, arrangements are schematic including only



general requirements. Should it be necessary to deviate from the arrangement shown in order to meet structural conditions, proper clearances, etc., the deviations shall be made without additional costs.

B. The drawings and specifications are for the assistance of the Contractor; distances and

elevations must be established by the Contractor who shall accept the contract with this understanding.

1.24 PROTECTION All equipment and materials shall be protected from damage. Work and materials of

other trades shall be protected from damage during the course of mechanical work. Equipment stored and installed at the job site shall be protected from dust, water and other damage. Any debris not contained within the identified work limits shall be cleaned up immediately at contractor expense and restored to previous condition.

1.25 RECORD DRAWINGS Upon completion of the work and as a precedent to payment, the Contractor shall deliver

to Facilities Services, one (1) complete set of as built drawings showing the work exactly as constructed.

1. All symbols and designations used in preparing record Drawings shall match those

used in Contract Drawings.

2. Funds shall be withheld for incomplete or inaccurate as-builts. 1.26 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Painting/Coating Requirements 1. Organic Solvents: The Contractor shall limit emissions of organic solvents into the

atmosphere in accordance with rule 441 of the Sacramento Metropolitan Air Quality Management District SMAQMD) Rules and Regulations. The rule applies to use, cleanup and disposal of organic, photo chemically reactive and non-photo chemically reactive materials containing these solvents.

2. Lead Containing Materials: The Contractor shall not use paints or coatings containing lead in excess of 0.06-percent by weight of total non-volatile content in accordance with Title 16 of the Code of Federal Regulations, part 1303. Paints or coatings on surfaces within reach of children in housing, recreation and public areas shall have zero lead content.

B. Unexpected Asbestos Encountered During Construction: No Asbestos Containing

Material (ACM) is expected to be encountered during the course of this project. If, in the execution of this project, the Contractor or any subcontractor may encounter any material which appears to be or is suspected to be asbestos or asbestos containing material, the Contractor shall immediately cease work and notify Facilities Services at 278-6242 or Campus Police at 278-6900 during on campus hours.



END OF SECTION

6000 J Street • Sacramento, CA 95819-6099 • Ph: (916) 278-6896 • Fax: (916) 278-5429Brian Berger – [email protected] • Ryan Bjork – [email protected] • MSOC Contact Andrew Tomsky – [email protected]

DATE DAY OPPONENT TIME (PT)Aug. 16 Wed. SANTA CLARA (EXHIBITION) 5:00 PMAug. 20 Sun. SAN FRANCISCO (EXHIBITION) 5:00 PMAug. 25 Fri. PACIFIC 5:00 PMSept. 1 Fri. CSU BAKERSFIELD 5:00 PMSept. 3 Sun. at San Jose State 3:00 PMSept. 8 Fri. SAN DIEGO 4:30 PMSept. 10 Sun. LOYOLA MARYMOUNT 4:30 PMSept. 15 Fri. at Utah Valley 7:00 PMSept. 17 Sun. vs. Northern Illinois (Orem, Utah) 1:00 PMSept. 24 Sun. at Saint Mary's 1:00 PMSept. 28 Thurs. CSUN* 4:00 PMSept. 30 Sat. UC IRVINE* 4:00 PMOct. 5 Thurs. at UC Riverside* 7:00 PMOct. 7 Sat. at Cal State Fullerton* 7:00 PMOct. 11 Wed. UC SANTA BARBARA* 3:30 PMOct. 14 Sat. at UC Davis* 3:00 PMOct. 18 Wed. at Cal Poly* 7:00 PMOct. 21 Sat. UC DAVIS* 3:00 PMOct. 25 Wed. at UC Santa Barbara* 7:00 PMOct. 28 Sat. CAl POLY* 3:00 PMNov. 1 Wed. Big West Tournament First Round (Campus Sites) TBANov. 4 Sat. Big West Tournament Semifinals (Campus Sites) TBANov. 11 Sat. Big West Tournament Final (Campus Site) TBANov. 16 Thurs. NCAA Tournament First Round (Campus Sites) TBANov. 19 Sun. NCAA Tournament Second Round (Campus Sites) TBA

ALL CAPS and bold indicate home matches (played at Hornet Field)* Big West Conference match

2017 MEN'S SOCCER SCHEDULE

as of March 6, 2017

tmoon

Typewritten Text

tmoon

Typewritten Text

APPENDIX A

tmoon

Typewritten Text

tmoon

Typewritten Text

tmoon

Typewritten Text

APPENDIX B

tmoon

Typewritten Text


01 74 19 - 1 C&D RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIALS RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements and procedures for ensuring optimal diversion of construction and demolition (C&D) waste materials generated by the Work from landfill disposal within the limits of the Construction Schedule and Contract Sum.

1. California State law (Assembly Bill 75), requires the California State University to develop source reduction, re-use, recycling, and composting programs, to reduce the tonnage of solid waste disposed in landfills 50% by the year 2004. Construction waste materials generated by the Work are targeted to achieve these diversion rates.

2. The Work of this Contract requires that a minimum of 50% by weight of the construction and demolition materials generated in the Work is diverted from landfill disposal through a combination of re-use and recycling activities.

3. For LEED® projects, requirements for submittal of LEED documentation in compliance with Materials and Resources Credit 2.1 and Materials or Resources Credit 2.2, Construction Waste Management.

4. Requirements for submittal of Contractor’s Construction Waste and Recycling Plan prior to the commencement of the Work.

5. Contractor’s quantitative reports for construction waste materials as a condition of approval of the third progress payment.

1.2. DEFINITIONS

A. Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as household, commercial, and industrial waste, resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations. A Class III landfill must have a solid waste facilities permit from the California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB) and is regulated by the Enforcement Agency (EA).

B. Construction and Demolition Debris: Building materials and solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, cleanup, or demolition operations that are not hazardous as defined in California Code of Regulations, Title 22, Section 66261.3 et seq. This term includes, but is not limited to, asphalt concrete, Portland cement concrete, brick, lumber, gypsum wallboard, cardboard and other associated packaging, roofing material, ceramic tile, carpeting, plastic pipe, and steel. The debris may be commingled with rock, soil, tree stumps, and other vegetative matter resulting from land clearing and landscaping for construction or land development projects.

C. C&D Recycling Center. A facility that receives only C&D material that has been separated for reuse prior to receipt, in which the residual (disposed) amount of waste in the material is less than 10% of the amount separated for reuse by weight.

D. Disposal. Final deposition of construction and demolition or inert debris into land, including stockpiling onto land of construction and demolition debris that has not been sorted for further processing or resale, if such stockpiling is for a period of time greater than 30 days; and construction and demolition debris that has been sorted for further processing or resale, if such stockpiling is for a period of time greater than one year, or stockpiling onto land of inert debris that is for a period of time greater than one year.

E. Enforcement Agency. Enforcement agency as defined [i.e. in Public Resources Code 40130].

F. Inert Disposal Facility or Inert Waste Landfill: A disposal facility that accepts only inert waste such as soil and rock, fully cured asphalt paving, uncontaminated concrete (including fiberglass or steel reinforcing rods embedded in the concrete), brick, glass, and ceramics, for land disposal.



G. Mixed Debris: Loads that include commingled recyclable and non-recyclable materials generated at the construction site.

H. Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A processing facility that accepts loads of commingled construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering re-usable and recyclable materials and disposing the non-recyclable residual materials.

I. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting materials for the purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.

J. Reuse. The use, in the same or similar form as it was produced, of a material which might otherwise be discarded.

K. Separated for Reuse. Materials, including commingled recyclables, that have been separated or kept separate from the solid waste stream for the purpose of additional sorting or processing those materials for reuse or recycling in order to return them to the economic mainstream in the form of raw material for new, reused, or reconstituted products which meet the quality standards necessary to be used in the marketplace, and includes materials that have been “source separated.”

L. Solid Waste: All putrescible and non-putrescible solid, semisolid, and liquid wastes, including garbage, trash, refuse, paper, rubbish, ashes, industrial wastes, demolition and construction wastes, abandoned vehicles and parts thereof, discarded home and industrial appliances, dewatered, treated, or chemically fixed sewage sludge which is not hazardous waste, manure, vegetable or animal solid and semisolid wastes, and other discarded solid and semisolid wastes. "Solid waste" does not include hazardous waste, radioactive waste, or medical waste as defined or regulated by State law.

M. Source-Separated: Materials, including commingled recyclables, that have been separated or kept separate from the solid waste stream at the point of generation for the purpose of additional sorting or processing of those materials for reuse or recycling in order to return them to the economic mainstream in the form of raw materials for new, reused, or reconstituted products which meet the quality standards necessary to be used in the marketplace.

N. Waste Hauler: A company that possesses a valid permit from the local waste management authority to collect and transport solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal in the locality.

1.3. SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor’s Construction Waste and Recycling Plan

1. Review Contract Documents and estimate the types and quantities of materials under the Work that are anticipated to be feasible for on-site processing, source separation for re-use or recycling. Indicate the procedures that will be implemented in this program to effect jobsite source separation, such as, identifying a convenient location where dumpsters would be located, putting signage to identify materials to be placed in dumpsters, etc.

2. Prior to commencing the Work, submit Contractor’s Construction Waste and Recycling Plan. Submit in format provided (Section 01 74 29A). The Plan must include, but is not limited to the following:

a. Contractor’s name and project identification information;

b. Procedures to be used;

c. Materials to be re-used and recycled;

d. Estimated quantities of materials;

e. Names and locations of re-use and recycling facilities/sites;

f. Tonnage calculations that demonstrate that Contractor will re-use and recycle a minimum 50% by weight of the construction waste materials generated in the Work.

3. Contractor’s Construction Waste and Recycling Plan must be approved by the Construction Administrator prior to the start of Work.

4. Contractor’s Construction Waste and Recycling Plan will not otherwise relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures.



B. Contractor’s Reuse, Recycling, and Disposal Report: Submit Contractor’s Reuse, Recycling, and Disposal Report on the form provided (Section 01 74 29B) with each application for progress payment. Failure to submit the form and its supporting documentation will render the application for progress payment incomplete and delay progress payments. If applicable, include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the Project for re-used and recycled materials:

1. Reuse of building materials or salvage items on site (i.e. crushed base or red clay brick).

2. Salvaging building materials or salvage items at an off-site salvage or reuse center (i.e. lighting, fixtures).

3. Recycling source separated materials on site (i.e. crushing asphalt/ concrete for base course, or grinding for mulch).

4. Recycling source separated material at an off site recycling center (i.e. scrap metal or green materials).

5. Use of material as Alternative Daily Cover (ADC) at landfills.

6. Delivery of soils or mixed inerts to an inerta landfill for disposal (inert fill).

7. Disposal at a landfill or transfer station (where no recycling takes place).

8. Other (describe).

C. Contractor’s Reuse, Recycling, and Disposal Report must quantify all materials generated in the Work, disposed in [Class III] landfills, or diverted from disposal through recycling. Indicate zero (0) if there is no quantity to report for a type of material. As indicated on the form:

1. Report disposal or recycling either in tons or in cubic yards: if scales are available at disposal or recycling facility, report in tons; otherwise, report in cubic yards. Report in units for salvage items when no tonnage or cubic yard measurement is feasible.

2. Indicate locations to which materials are delivered for reuse, salvage, recycling, accepted as daily cover, inert backfill, or disposal in landfills or transfer stations.

3. Provide legible copies of weigh tickets, receipts, or invoices that specifically identify the project generating the material. Said documents must be from recyclers and/or disposal site operators that can legally accept the materials for the purpose of re-use, recycling, or disposal.

4. Indicate project title, project number, progress payment number, name of the company completing the Contractor’s Report and compiling backup documentation, the printed name, signature, and daytime phone number of the person completing the form, the beginning and ending dates of the period covered on the Contractor’s Report, and the date that the Contractor’s Report is completed.

5. For LEED Projects, LEED Letter Template: Materials and Resources Credit [2.1 or 2.2] Construction Waste Management Complete and sign LEED Letter Template in format provided under the U.S. Green Building Council’s Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) program. Prepare Letter Template on company letterhead.

1. Certify that the project has completed a waste management plan and diverted construction, demolition, and land clearing waste to uses other than landfill.

2. Provide quantities of diverted materials and means of diversion in the table provided in the LEED Letter Template.

3. Indicate how and where waste was diverted.

4. Indicate quantities of waste diverted in tons [or cubic yards].

5. Letter Template will calculate: Total quantity of diverted waste, total quantity of waste, and the percentage of waste diverted.

6. For projects where 50% of waste is diverted, one LEED credit will be achieved; where 75% is diverted, two LEED credits will be achieved.

7. Include name, organization, role in project, provide signature and date completed.



PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not used.)

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGE, RE-USE, RECYCLING AND PROCEDURES

A. Identify re-use, salvage, and recycling facilities.

B. Develop and implement procedures to re-use, salvage, and recycle new construction and excavation materials, based on the Contract Documents, the Contractor’s Construction Waste and Recycling Plan, estimated quantities of available materials, and availability of recycling facilities. Procedures may include on-site recycling, source separated recycling, and/or mixed debris recycling efforts.

1. Identify materials that are feasible for salvage, determine requirements for site storage, and transportation of materials to a salvage facility.

2. Source separate new construction, excavation and demolition materials including, but not limited to the following types:

a. Asphalt.

b. Concrete, concrete block, slump stone (decorative concrete block), and rocks.

c. Drywall.

d. Green materials (i.e. tree trimmings and land clearing debris).

e. Metal (ferrous and non-ferrous).

f. Miscellaneous Construction Debris.

g. Paper or cardboard.

h. Red Clay Brick.

i. Reuse or Salvage Materials

j. Soils.

k. Wire and Cable.

l. Wood.

m. Other (describe)

3. Miscellaneous Construction Debris: Develop and implement a program to transport loads of mixed (commingled) new construction materials that cannot be feasibly source separated to a mixed materials recycling facility.

3.2 DISPOSAL OPERATIONS AND WASTE HAULING A. Legally transport and dispose of materials that cannot be delivered to a source separated or mixed recycling facility to a transfer station or disposal facility that can legally accept the materials for the purpose of disposal.

B. Use a permitted waste hauler or Contractor’s trucking services and personnel. To confirm valid permitted status of waste haulers, contact the local solid waste authority.

C. Become familiar with the conditions for acceptance of new construction, excavation and demolition materials at recycling facilities, prior to delivering materials.

D. Deliver to facilities that can legally accept new construction, excavation and demolition materials for purpose of re-use, recycling, composting, or disposal.

E. Do not burn, bury or otherwise dispose of solid waste on the project job-site.

3.3 RE-USE AND DONATION OPTIONS A. Implement a re-use program to the greatest extent feasible. Options may include:



1. California Materials Exchange (CAL-MAX) Program is sponsored by the California Integrated Waste Management Board. CAL-MAX is a free service provided by the California Integrated Waste Management Board, designed to help businesses find markets for materials that traditionally would be discarded. The premise of the CAL-MAX Program is that material discarded by one business may be a resource for another business. To obtain a current Materials Listings Catalog, call CAL-MAX/California Integrated Waste Management Board at (916) 255-2369 or send a FAX to (916) 255-2200. The CALMAX Catalog is available through the Internet Site at http://www.ciwmb/ca.gov/calmax.

3.4 REVENUE A. Revenues or other savings obtained from recycled, re-used, or salvaged materials shall accrue to Contractor unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Resroom and Concession Building 00 1151A - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND RECYCLING

Date Submitted: Project Period:

02 - Salvaging building materials or salvage items at an off site salvage or re-use center (i.e. lighting, fixtures)

04 - Recycling source separated materials at an off site recycling center (i.e. scrap metal or green matls)05 - Recycling commingled loads of C&D materials at an off site mixed debris recycling center or transfer station06 - Recycling material as Alternative Daily Cover at landfills07 - Delivery of soils or mixed inerts to an inert landfill for disposal (inert fill).08 - Disposal at a landfill or transfer station.09 - Other (please describe) _______________________________________________________________

A = Asphalt C = Concrete M = Metals I = Mixed Inert G = Green Materials

W = Wood

Type of Type Total TruckMaterial of Activity Loads Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.(ex.) M 04 24 355

- - - -

SECTION I - RE-USED/RECYCLED MATERIALS

Total QuantitiesInclude all recycling activities for source separated or mixed material recycling centers where recycling will occur.

Facility to be Used,Location

Reuse, Recycling or Disposal Processes to be Used

ABC Metals, Los Angeles

a. Total Diversion

Prepared by: (Print Name)

From: To:

Total Quantities: If scales are available at sites, report in tons. If not, quantify by cubic yards. For salvage/reuse items, quantify by estimated weight (or units).

R = Reuse/Salvage

Use these codes to indicate the types of material that will be generated on the project

O = Other (describe)

01 - Reuse of building materials or salvage items on site (i.e. crushed base or red clay brick)

Street Address:City: Zip: State:Phone: ( ) Fax: ( )E-Mail Address:

SECTION 01151A

(Submit After Award of Contract and Prior to Start of Work)

Project Name and Number:

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND RECYCLING PLAN

Contract or Work Order No.:Contractor's Name:

Facilities Used: Provide name of facility and location (City)Total Truck Loads: Provide number of trucks hauled from site during reporting period

Describe the types of recycling processes or disposal activities that will be used for material generated in the project. Indicate the type of process or activity by number, types of materials, and estimated quantities that will be recycled or disposed in the sections below:

03 - Recycling source separated materials on site (i.e. crushing asphalt/concrete for reuse or grinding for mulch)

M/C = Miscellaneous Construction DebrisW/C = Wire/Cable S= Soils (Non Hazardous)D = Drywall

Types of Material to be Generated

P/C=Paper/Cardboard

CSUS Soccer/Softball Resroom and Concession Building 00 1151A - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND RECYCLING

Type of Type Total TruckMaterial of Activity Loads Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.(ex.) D 08 2 35

- - -

Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.a. Total Reused/Recycled - - -

- - - - - -

Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.- - - - -

#DIV/0!

Notes: 1. Section 01151A is a Division 01 General Requirement under CSI MasterFormat 1998 Edition. For CSI MasterFormat 2004 Edition, this Section may be renumbered as follows: Under Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Project Forms 00 60 00 Use: Section 00 62 22 Construction Waste Diversion Plan2. Suggested Conversion Factors: From Cubic Yards to Tons (Use when scales are not available)

Concrete: .93 (ex. 1000 CY Concrete = 930 tons. Applies to broken chunks of concrete) Ferrous Metals: .22 (ex. 1000 CY Ferrous Metal = 220 tons) Drywall Scrap: .20 Non-Ferrous Metals: .10 (ex. 1000 CY Non-Ferrous Metals = 100 tons) Wood Scrap: .16

b. Total Disposal

SECTION III - TOTAL MATERIALS GENERATEDThis section calculates the total materials to be generated during the project period (Reuse/Recycle + Disposal = Generation)

Facility to be Used,

Contract or Work Order No.:

Total QuantitiesLocation

DEF Landfill, Los Angeles

* Use tons only to calculate recycling percentages: Tons Reused/Recycled/Tons Generated = % Recycled

Contractor's Comments (Provide any additional information pertinent to planned reuse, recycling, or disposal activities) :

Asphalt: .61 (ex. 1000 CY Asphalt = 610 tons. Applies to broken chunks of asphalt)

Add totals from Section I + Section II

SECTION II - DISPOSED MATERIALSInclude all disposal activities for landfills, transfer stations, or inert landfills where no recycling will occur.

SECTION 01151A

Project Name and Number:CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND RECYCLING PLAN (continued)

SECTION IV - CONTRACTOR'S LANDFILL DIVERSION RATE CALCULATION

b. Total Disposedc. Total Generated

a. Materials Re-Used and Recycledb. Materials Disposedc. Total Materials Generated (a. + b. = c.)d. Landfill Diversion Rate (Tons Only)*

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom and Concession Building 00 1151B - 1 REUSE, RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL REPORT

Date Submitted: Period Covered:

02 - Salvaging building materials or salvage items at an off site salvage or re-use center (i.e. lighting, fixtures)

04 - Recycling source separated materials at an off site recycling center (i.e. scrap metal or green matls)05 - Recycling commingled loads of C&D materials at an off site mixed debris recycling center or transfer station06 - Recycling material as Alternative Daily Cover at landfills07 - Delivery of soils or mixed inerts to an inert landfill for disposal (inert fill).08 - Disposal at a landfill or transfer station.09 - Other (please describe) _______________________________________________________________

A = Asphalt C = Concrete M = Metals I = Mixed Inert G = Green Materials

W = Wood

Type of Type Total TruckMaterial of Activity Loads Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.(ex.) M 04 24 355

- - - -

D = Drywall

Types of Material Generated

SECTION 01151B

(Submit With Each Progress Payment)

Project Name and Number:

CONTRACTOR'S REUSE, RECYCLING, AND DISPOSAL REPORT

Facilities Used: Provide name of facility and location (City)Total Truck Loads: Provide number of trucks hauled from site during reporting period

03 - Recycling source separated materials on site (i.e. crushing asphalt/concrete for reuse or grinding for mulch)

M/C = Miscellaneous Construction DebrisW/C = Wire/Cable S= Soils (Non Hazardous)

E-Mail Address: Prepared by: (Print Name)

Contract or Work Order No.:Contractor's Name: Street Address:City:

P/C=Paper/Cardboard

Reuse, Recycling or Disposal Processes Used

Zip: State:Phone: ( ) Fax: ( )

From: To:

Total Quantities: If scales are available at sites, report in tons. If not, quantify by cubic yards. For salvage/reuse items, quantify by estimated weight (or units).

R = Reuse/Salvage

Use these codes to indicate the types of material that were generated on the project

O = Other (describe)

01 - Reuse of building materials or salvage items on site (i.e. crushed base or red clay brick)

ABC Metals, Los Angeles

a. Total Diversion

SECTION I - RE-USED/RECYCLED MATERIALS

Total QuantitiesInclude all recycling activities for source separated or mixed material recycling centers where recycling occurred.

Facilities Used,Location

Describe the types of recycling processes or disposal activities used for material generated in the project. Indicate the type of process or activity by number, types of materials, and quantities that were recycled or disposed in the sections below:

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom and Concession Building 00 1151B - 2 REUSE, RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL REPORT

Type of Type Total TruckMaterial of Activity Loads Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.(ex.) D 08 2 35

- - -

Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.a. Total Reused/Recycled - - -

- - - - - -

Tons Cubic Yds Other Wt.- - - - -

#DIV/0!

Notes: 1. Section 01151A is a Division 01 General Requirement under CSI MasterFormat 1998 Edition. For CSI MasterFormat 2004 Edition, this Section may be renumbered as follows: Under Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Project Forms 00 60 00 Use: Section 00 62 22 Construction Waste Diversion Plan2. Suggested Conversion Factors: From Cubic Yards to Tons (Use when scales are not available)

Concrete: .93 (ex. 1000 CY Concrete = 930 tons. Applies to broken chunks of concrete) Ferrous Metals: .22 (ex. 1000 CY Ferrous Metal = 220 tons) Drywall Scrap: .20 Non-Ferrous Metals: .10 (ex. 1000 CY Non-Ferrous Metals = 100 tons) Wood Scrap: .16

a. Materials Re-Used and Recycledb. Materials Disposedc. Total Materials Generated (a. + b. = c.)d. Landfill Diversion Rate (Tons Only)*

SECTION IV - CONTRACTOR'S LANDFILL DIVERSION RATE CALCULATION

b. Total Disposedc. Total Generated

b. Total Disposal

SECTION III - TOTAL MATERIALS GENERATEDThis section calculates the total materials generated during the project period (Reuse/Recycle + Disposal = Generation)

Add totals from Section I + Section II

SECTION II - DISPOSED MATERIALSInclude all disposal activities for landfills, transfer stations, or inert landfills where no recycling occurred.

SECTION 01151B

Project Name and Number:CONTRACTOR'S REUSE, RECYCLING, AND DISPOSAL REPORT (continued)

Asphalt: .61 (ex. 1000 CY Asphalt = 610 tons. Applies to broken chunks of asphalt)

* Use tons only to calculate recycling percentages: Tons Reused/Recycled/Tons Generated = % Recycled

Contractor's Comments (Provide any additional information pertinent to planned reuse, recycling, or disposal activities) :

LocationDEF Landfill, Los Angeles

Facilities Used,

Contract or Work Order No.:

Total Quantities

California State University, SacramentoFacililties Management

Contract SchedulePROJECT: LOCATION: JOB NUMBER: DATE:

BY:CONSTRUCTION PHASE M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S M T W R F S

STARTING DATE: COMPLETION DATE:CONTRACTOR: NUMBER OF CONTRACT DAYS:ADDRESS: LICENSE NUMBER:TELEPHONE NUMBER: SIGNATURE:

CSUS SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PROJECT NAME: INVOICE #CONTRACTOR: INVOICE DATE:

CONTRACT DATE: PERIOD FROM:CONTRACT NUMBER: PERIOD TO:

ITEM # DESCRIPTION OF WORK CONTRACT AMOUNT % COMPLETE TOTAL

COMPLETEPRIOR

APPLICATIONTHIS

APPLICATION RETENTION BALANCE TO FINISH

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

TOTALS

LESS RETENTION THIS APPLICATION

AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION


02 4100 - 1 DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 4100DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Selective demolition of built site elements.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 1 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. Protection of benchmarks, survey control points, and existing construction and site features to remain; reinstallationof removed products; temporary bracing and shoring.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;

2013.PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacentstructures and the public.1. Obtain required permits.2. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.3. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants.4. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.5. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits fromremoval operations.

B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from University.C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

3.02 EXISTING UTILITIESA. Coordinate work with utility companies and the University; notify before starting work and

comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7

days prior written notification to University.E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at

least 3 days prior written notification to University.F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of

utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades ifnecessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnectedand abandoned utilities.

3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.


02 4100 - 2 DEMOLITION

3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would beapparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.

B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

C. Protect existing work to remain.1. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.2. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.3. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVALA. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.B. Leave site in clean condition.C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom 03 11 00 - 1 CONCRETE FORMWORK And Concession Building

SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all work of this section. 1.02 SCOPE

A. Design, furnish and install forms for concrete as indicated on drawings and specified here. Remove forms and shores at specified time. Clean up.

1.03 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents) A. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. C. Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00. D. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00. E. Items relating solely to mechanical or electrical work are included under those Divisions,

except as specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: 1. Conform to all requirements of ACI 347 and ACI 318 Section 26.11. 2. Concrete formwork shall be designed and constructed to safely support fluid concrete and

superimposed construction loads without excessive deflection or concrete leakage. Provide bracing to maintain accurate alignment and to resist all anticipated lateral loads. Forms shall conform with drawings as to shape, line, and dimension. Design, engineering and construction of forms shall be Contractor's responsibility. Formwork for exposed concrete shall be constructed to tolerances indicated in ACI 303R.

3. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades who furnish and/or install piping, conduit, reglets, anchors, inserts, sleeves, hangers, etc., as their work requires; including provisions for recesses and chases.

B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00) 1. Product Data. Provide manufacturers data and installation instructions for the following:

a. Tie rods and spreaders. b. Formwork for exposed concrete. c. Form coatings and release agents.

C. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted) 1. 2016 California Building Code (CBC). 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI). a. ACI 303R - “Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice” b. ACI 318 – “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete” c. ACI 347 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork” 3. Standard Grading and Dressing Rules #17, West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (For

Douglas Fir Form Lumber). 4. U.S. Product Standard PS 1-83 (For Plywood Form Lumber).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Form Material: 1. Smooth Concrete exposed to view: 5/8 inch minimum APA Plyform or steel. 2. Concrete concealed from view: 5/8 inch minimum APA Plyform, steel or clean and sound

1 x 8 Standard Grade Douglas Fir.


B. Fiber Forms: Tubular column forms spirally constructed of laminated plies of fiber. Plies shall be laminated using a non-water sensitive adhesive and surface wax impregnated for moisture protection. Forms shall give a smooth and seamless appearance to the cast concrete. Provide reveals, as shown on the drawings, as supplied by the form manufacturer. Forms shall be as manufactured by Sonoco Products, plastic lined; Burke Smoothtube by Burke Co.; or approved equal.

C. Form Clamps: Assembly to have cone washers, (1 inch break back) 3/8” inch center rod. D. Form Ties:

1. Concrete exposed to view: Snap ties allowing full 1 inch break back.2. Concrete concealed from view: Snap ties or wire.3. Verify special spacing requirements with architectural drawings at exposed concrete.

E. Spreaders: Metal (no wood). F. Form Coating: Non-grain and non-staining types of form coating that will not leave a residual

matter on the face of the concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of any subsequent paint or other surface applications. 1. Form coating containing mineral oils or other non-drying materials will not be permitted for

any concrete work.G. Joint Tape: No. 471 plastic film tape 3 inches wide, as manufactured by the Industrial Tape

Division of 3M Company. H. Expansion Joint Filler (Preformed): ½ inch thick; Flexcell by Celotex Corporation, Elastic Fiber

Expansion Joint by Phillip Carey Mfg. Co., or Sealtight Fiber Expansion Joint by W.R. Meadows, Inc.

I. Extruded Polystyrene Foam: ASTM C578 type IV. Dow Chemical Corp. "Styrofoam", UC Industries "Foamular", or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. Construct substantial forms to the shapes, lines, grades and elevations shown, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, and tied, clamped and braced to prevent spreading, shifting or settling. Plywood joints shall be square and tight; plywood shall be arranged in such manner as to minimize number of joints and to provide a smooth, attractive finished concrete surface.

B. Apply form coating to forms before reinforcing steel is in place. C. Sleeves, anchors and bolts, including those for angle frames, supports, ties and other

materials in connection with concrete construction, shall be secured in position before the concrete is placed.

D. Proper provisions shall be made for openings, blockouts, sleeves, offsets, sinkages, recesses and depressions required by other trades and suppliers prior to placing concrete. 1. The Contractor shall also see that sleeves have been installed and other provisions have

been made for the installation of mechanical, electrical and other equipment.2. Coordinate with all trades to insure proper placement of all items in forms and to provide

proper blockouts wherever required.E. Concrete work out of alignment, level or plumb will be cause for rejection of the whole work

affected and, if so rejected, such work shall be removed and replaced, as directed by Architect, with no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Form Not Required: Concrete footings may be poured directly against cut earth where feasible and when the Architect’s approval has been obtained. 1. See structural drawings for requirements for placing concrete footings directly against

earth without forms.G. Use ¾ inch minimum wood chamfer strips typical at all exposed corners unless noted

otherwise on drawings.


3.02 CLEANING OF FORMS

A. All dirt, chips, sawdust, rubbish, water, etc. shall be completely removed from form by water hosing and air pressure before any concrete is deposited therein. No wooden ties or blocking shall be left in concrete except where indicated for attachment of other work.

B. Thoroughly clean and patch all holes in formwork and re-coat as required before reusing. Forms not suited to obtain concrete surfaces and tolerances in conformity with Contract requirements will be rejected by Architect. 1. Reuse of forming materials shall be limited only as required to produce the finishes as

specified, free from blemishes and other defects unless covered by other buildingmaterials in which case blemish free concrete is not required.

3.03 INSPECTION OF FORMS A. Notify the Architect at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of pouring operations and at

the completion of formwork and location of all construction joints. An inspection of forms and joints will be made for approval of finished work and general layout only. The foregoing inspection shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility of design and safety or formwork, bulkheads and shorings.

3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORING A. Do not remove forms until concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its weight and

any construction loading. Concrete must be allowed to cure long enough to avoid damage during form removal. Contractor or his representative in charge of concrete construction shall be present during removal of forms and shores, and shall be personally responsible for safety of this operation at all times and under all conditions.

B. As a minimum, formwork and shoring shall remain in place for the following periods: 1. Concrete on grade: 24 hours2. Walls and Columns: 3 days3. Formwork may be removed and reshores installed before the times indicated above,

provided the concrete has cured sufficiently to avoid damage when formwork is removed.Shores must be immediately replaced with reshores in a sequence designed to avoidinducing stress in the concrete member.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of this Work, clean up and remove from Site all equipment and debris

resulting from this work. B. Surfaces to be painted shall be smooth and free of substances such as dirt, wax, excessive

latence, grease or materials that would prevent proper bonding of finishes. 1. Removal of foregoing contaminants, and complete removal of parting and curing

compounds affecting proper paint bond, shall be responsibility of this Section of Work.Sandblast cleaning shall not be employed without specific approval of Structural Engineer.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom and Concession Building 03 21 00 - 1 REINFORCING STEEL

SECTION 03 21 00 REINFORCING STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE

A. Unless noted otherwise, furnish and install reinforcing for all concrete, including dowels, chairs, spacers, bolsters, etc., necessary for supporting and fastening reinforcement in place as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.03 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents) A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. C. Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04 22 00.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Regularly engaged in the manufacture of steel bar and weldedwire fabric reinforcing.

2. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be done only by an installation firm normallyengaged in this business. All work shall be performed by qualified mechanics workingunder an experienced supervisor.

3. Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures, welding operators and welders shall bequalified in accordance with AWS D1.4 - "Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel".a. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be re-qualified before performing

further welding.4. Reinforcement Work shall conform to ACI 301 and ACI 318 Chapter 25, as minimum

standards.5. Allowable Tolerances:

a. Fabrication:1) Sheared length: 1 inch.2) Depth of truss bars: Plus or minus ½-inch.3) Ties: Plus or minus ½-inch.4) All other bends: Plus or minus 1 inch.

b. Placement:1) Concrete cover to form surfaces: Plus or minus ¼-inch.2) Minimum spacing between bars: Plus or minus ¼-inch.3) Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within 2 inches of stated separation.4) Lengthwise of members: Plus or minus 2 inches.

c. Maximum bar movement to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits,or embedded items: 2 bar diameters.

B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted): 1. 2016 California Building Code (CBC).2. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

a. ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".b. ACI 315 - "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing".


c. ACI 318 – “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete”

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).a. ASTM A82 - "Cold Drawn Wire for Concrete Reinforcement".b. ASTM A185 - "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement".c. ASTM A615 - "Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".d. ASTM A706 – “Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement”.

4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - "Manual of Standard Practice".5. American Welding Standard (AWS).

a. AWS D1.4 - "Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel".C. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00)

1. Shop Drawings: Prepare in accordance ACI 315. Indicate bending diagrams, assemblydiagrams, splicing and laps of bars and shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcingand assemblies. Correctness of all reinforcing requirements and work is the responsibilityof Contractor. Identify such shop drawings with reference thereon to sheet and detailnumbers from Contract Drawings.a. Do not use scaled dimensions from Contract Drawings in determining the lengths of

reinforcing bars.b. No reinforcing steel shall be fabricated without approved shop drawings.c. Any deviations from the contract documents must be clearly indicated as a deviation

on the shop drawings.d. Areas of high congestion, including member joints and embed locations shall be fully

detailed to verify clearances and assembly parameters and coordination with othertrades.

2. Certified mill test reports of supplied reinforcing indicating chemical and physical analysis.Tensile and bend tests shall be performed by the mill in accordance with ASTM A615.

3. Product Data:a. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for splice devices.b. Bar Supports.

4. Certificates of Compliance with specified standards:a. Reinforcing bars.b. Welded wire fabric.c. Welding electrodes.

5. Samples: Only as requested by Architect.D. Tests and Inspections:

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done incompliance with the CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory,Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge ofbuilding enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additionalrequirements may be required in final testing program.

2. All reinforcing steel whose properties are not identifiable by mill test reports shall betested in accordance with ASTM A615. One Series of tests for each missing report to beborne by the Contractor.

3. When inspections are indicated for reinforcement placement on the Structural drawings, aspecial inspector shall be employed to inspect reinforcing placement per CBC Section1704.

4. When tests are indicated for reinforcing steel on the structural drawings, the reinforcingsteel used shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A615. One tensile and one bend test


for each 2-1/2 tons of steel or fraction thereof, shall be made. 5. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with AWS D1.4, including checking

materials, equipment, procedure and welder qualification as well as the welds. Inspectorwill use non-destructive testing or any other aid to visual inspection that he deemsnecessary to assure himself of the adequacy of the weld.

6. Tests and inspection shall be performed by Owners testing agency except when neededto justify rejected work, in which case the cost of retests and reinspection shall be borneby the Contractor.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size and

length. B. Handle and store materials to prevent contamination.

1. Store reinforcement in a manner that will prevent excessive rusting or coating withgrease, oil, dirt, and other objectionable materials. Storage shall be in separate piles orracks so as to avoid confusion or loss of identification after bundles are broken.

C. Deliver and store welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D1.4. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all bars. 1. Bar reinforcement to be welded shall meet chemical requirements of ASTM A706.2. Longitudinal reinforcement in column and beams of special moment-resisting frames

shall meet the chemical requirements of ASTM A706.B. Stirrups and Ties: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all bars. C. Steel Dowels: Same grade as bars to which dowels are connected. D. Welded wire Fabric: ASTM A185. E. Tie Wires: FS-QQ-W-461, annealed steel, black, 16 gauge minimum. F. Welding Electrodes: AWS D1.4, low hydrogen, E70XX series. G. Bar Supports:

1. Typical, unless noted otherwise; CRSI Class 2 wire supports.a. Do not use wood, brick or other objectionable materials.b. Do not use galvanized supports.

2. Supports placed against ground: Pre-cast concrete blocks not less than 4 inches squarewith embedded wire.

H. Mechanical Couplers: Comply with ACI 318 section 25.5.7.1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate reinforcement to meet requirements of Drawings. B. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with the requirements of ACI 315 where specific

details are not shown or where Drawings and Specifications are not more demanding.

C. Steel reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Heating of bars for bending will not be permitted.

D. Reinforcing shall not be field bent or straightened without structural engineer’s review.


E. Provide offsets in rebar (1:6 maximum) where required to maintain clearances. 3.02 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until unsuitable conditions have been corrected.

3.03 GENERAL A. Concrete shown without reinforcing shall be reinforced as similar parts shown with reinforcing

except where concrete is specifically noted to be unreinforced. 3.04 PLACEMENT

A. All reinforcement shall be accurately set in place, lapped, spliced, spaced rigidly and securely held in place and tied with specified wire at all splices and crossing points. All wire tie ends shall point away from the form. Carefully locate all dowel steel to align with wall and column steel. 1. Bars shall be in long lengths with laps and splices as shown. Offset laps in adjacent bars.

Place steel with clearances and cover as shown. Bar laps shall be as indicated on theDrawings. Tie all laps and intersections with the specified wire.

2. Maintain clear space between parallel bars not less than 1-1/2 times nominal diameter,but in no case shall clear space be less than 1-1/2 times maximum size concreteaggregate.

3. Reinforcing dowels for slabs shall be placed as detailed. Sleeves may be used if reviewedby the Structural Engineer before installation. Install dowel through all construction andexpansion joints for all slabs on grade.

B. Bar Supports: Support and securely fasten bars with chairs, spacers and ties to prevent displacement by construction loads or placement of concrete beyond the tolerances specified. Conform to CRSI as a minimum standard.

C. Steel Adjustment: 1. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,

conduits, or embedded items.2. Do not move bars beyond allowable without concurrence of Structural Engineer.3. Do not heat, bend, or cut bars without concurrence of Structural Engineer.4. Reinforcement shall not be bent after being embedded in hardened concrete.

D. Splices: 1. Splice reinforcing as shown.2. Lap Splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement of splices during placement of

concrete.3. Splice Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Obtain

Structural Engineer’s review before using.4. Do not splice bars except at locations shown without concurrence of Structural Engineer.

a. Where splices in addition to those indicated are required, indicate location on shopdrawings clearly and highlight "for Engineer’s approval".

E. Welding: 1. Welding is not permitted unless specifically detailed on Drawings or approved by

Engineer.2. Employ shielding metal-arc method and meet requirements of AWS D1.4.3. Welding is not permitted on bars where the carbon equivalent is unknown or is

determined to exceed 0.55.4. Welding shall not be done within two bar diameters of any bent portion of a bar which has

been bent cold.


5. Welding of crossing bars is not permitted.F. Welded Wire Fabric: Install in long lengths, lapping 24 inches at end splices and one mesh at

side splices. Offset laps in adjacent widths. Place fabric in approximately the middle of the slab thickness unless shown otherwise on the Drawings by dimension. Wire tie lap joints at 12-inch centers. Use concrete blocks to support mesh in proper position.

G. Reinforcement shall be free of mud, oil or other materials that may reduce bond at the time concrete is placed. Reinforcement with tightly adhered rust or mill scale will be accepted without cleaning provided that rusting has not reduced dimensions and weights below applicable standards. Remove loose rust.

H. Protection against rust: 1. Where there is danger of rust staining adjacent surfaces, wrap reinforcement with

impervious tape or otherwise prevent rust staining.2. Remove protective materials and clean reinforcement as required before proceeding with

concrete placement.I. Drawing Notes: Refer to notes on Drawings for additional reinforcement requirements. J. Mechanical and Electrical Drawings: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for formed

concrete requiring reinforcing steel. All such steel shall be included under the work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom 03 30 00 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE and Concession Building

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Furnish, place and finish cast in place concrete and related work as indicated on the Drawings and specified here.

1. Install miscellaneous metal and other items furnished by other trades to be installed inconcrete work.

2. Provide facilities for job curing of test cylinders and transporting to Testing Laboratory.

B. Provide grouting of steel base plates as indicated on the Drawings and specified here.

1.03 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents)

A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.

C. Mortar and Grout: 04 05 00.

D. Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted)

1. 2016 California Building Code (CBC).

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

a. ACI 117 – “Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials”

b. ACI 211.1 – “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,and Mass Concrete”

c. ACI 211.2 – “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural LightweightConcrete”

d. ACI 301 – “Structural Concrete for Buildings”

e. ACI 302 – “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction”

f. ACI 305R – “Hot Weather Concreting”

g. ACI 306R – “Cold Weather Concreting”

h. ACI 318 – “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete”

i. ACI 360 – “Design of Slabs-On-Ground”

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a. ASTM C31 – “Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field”

b. ASTM C33 – “Concrete Aggregates”

c. ASTM C39 – “Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens”

d. ASTM C42 – “Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete”

e. ASTM C94 – “Ready-Mixed Concrete”

f. ASTM C109 – “Test of Hydraulic Cement Concrete”

g. ASTM C143 – “Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete”

h. ASTM C150 – “Portland Cement”

i. ASTM C172 – “Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method”


j. ASTM C192 – “Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory”

k. ASTM C260 – “Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete”

l. ASTM C330 – “Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete”

m. ASTM C494 – “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete”

n. ASTM C618 – “Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a MineralAdmixture in Portland Cement Concrete”

o. ASTM C685 – “Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing”

p. ASTM C1157 – “Hydraulic-Cement”

B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00)

1. Concrete mix designs. See “Mix Design” below. Include results of test data used toestablish proportions.

2. Certificates of Compliance from Manufacturer

a. Cement certificates

b. Aggregates

c. Admixtures.

3. Data regarding hardeners and sealers.

4. Grout samples for sacked surface textures and colors upon Architects request only.

5. Layout drawings for construction, control and expansion joints.

6. Transit-mix delivery slips:

a. Keep record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, togetherwith transit-mix delivery slips certifying contents of the pour.

b. Make the record available to the Architect for his inspection upon request.

c. Upon completion of this portion of the work, deliver the record and the delivery slips tothe Architect.

7. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel submittals.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done inCompliance with the CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory,Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge ofbuilding enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additionalrequirements may be required in final testing program.

2. The following tests shall be made by a recognized testing laboratory selected by theOwner and approved by the governing agency. All tests shall be in accordance with thepreviously mentioned standards and ACI 318 Section 26.12. A complete record of all testsand inspections shall be kept per CBC Section 1903.1.

a. Compressive Strength: Make and cure in accordance with ASTM C-31. Test inaccordance with ASTM C-39 and ACI 318 Section 26.12.

1) A record shall be made of time and of locations of concrete from which sampleswere taken.

2) Four identical cylinders shall be taken from each pour of 150 cubic yards or 5000square feet or part thereof, being placed each day per ACI 318 Section 26.12.2.One cylinder shall be tested at age 7 days, and two at age 28 days unlessotherwise specified. Preserve remaining cylinder for future use.

b. Drying Shrinkage: (applies to lightweight concrete only unless noted otherwise)

1) A record shall be made of time cylinders and of locations of concrete from whichsamples were taken.


2) Three identical 4" x 4" x 11" specimens shall be made from same concrete as used in structure. Percent of shrinkage shall be reported at 21 days after 7 day moist curing period. Average results of 3 specimens shall be used as the accepted value. The value for laboratory cast specimens shall not exceed .075%. If field test specimens are used in lieu of laboratory specimens, a tolerance of +33% may be used.

3) Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C157.

c. Concrete consistency (slump) shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C143.

3. Provide full time inspection per CBC Section 1704.3 during the taking of test specimens and during the placing of all concrete and embedded steel.

4. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel tests and inspections.

5. Provide concrete batch plant inspections per ASTM C685.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or Type V. One brand of cement shall be used throughout to maintain uniform color for all exposed concrete.

B. Concrete Aggregate: Fine and coarse aggregates shall be regarded as separate ingredients. Each size of coarse aggregate, as well as combination of sizes when two or more are used, shall conform to grading requirements of appropriate ASTM Standards and ACI 318.

1. Concrete Aggregates for Standard Weight Concrete: ASTM C 33. Aggregate shall be crushed granite or Perkins type.

2. Concrete Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete: ASTM C330 to produce concrete weighing no more than 115 pcf at 28 days. Aggregate shall be vacuum saturated expanded shale as produced through the rotary kiln method.

C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkali, organic matter and other deleterious substances; suitable for domestic consumption.

D. Admixtures shall be subject to prior approval by the Architect, in accordance with ACI 318 Section 26.4.1.4. Calcium Chloride is not permitted.

1. Water Reducing

a. ASTM C494 Type A - for use in cool weather.

b. ASTM C494 Type D - for use in hot weather.

2. Air Entraining

a. Conform to ASTM C 260

3. Fly Ash

a. Conform to ASTM C 618

4. Mid-Range Water-Reducers

a. Master Builders “Polyheed” or approved equal.

5. Fly Ash Pozzolan

a. Conforming to ASTM A-618 Class F

E. Slab on Grade Vapor Retarder

1. Vapor Retarder must have the following qualities:

a. 15 mil thickness minimum

b. WVTR less than 0.008 as tested by ASTM E 96

c. ASTM E 1745 Class A (Plastics)

2. Vapor Retarder Products


a. Stego Wrap Vapor Retarder by STEGO Industries LLC.

b. W.R. Meadows Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core.

c. Zero-Perm by Alumiseal.

3. Vapor Retarder Tape

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E 96, 0.3 perms or lower

b. Minimum 8-mils thick

c. Minimum 3 3/4 inches wide

d. Manufactured from High Density Polyethylene

e. Pressure Sensitive Adhesive

F. Sand: Clean, dry, well graded.

G. Abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish: Fused aluminum oxide grits, graded 12/30. Use factory-graded rustproof and non-glazing material that is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials.

1. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with the above requirements include: A-HAlox; Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co., Toxgrip; Toch Div. - Carboline, or approved equal.

H. Expansion Joint Filler:

1. Joint fill shall be a preformed non-extruded resilient filler, saturated with bituminousmaterials and conforming to ASTM D 1751. Products shall be equivalent to Burke "FiberExpansion Joint", W.R. Meadows "Fibrated Expansion Joint Filler", or approved equal.

I. Bonding Agent: Sonneborn "Sonobond"; the Euclid Chemical Company "Euco-Weld"; Larsen Products Corp., "Weld-Crete" or approved equivalent.

J. Concrete Sealer: Cure and Seal, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company "Aqua-Cure VOX", Sonneborn "Kure-N-Seal WB", Burke "Spartan-Cote",W.R. Meadows "Intex" or approved equal conforming to ASTM C-309, Type I, Class B requirements, and conforming to State of California Air Resources Board VOC Regulations. Use plastic aggregate where specified on Architectural drawings.

1. Plastic Aggregate: Finely ground polymer for addition to coatings for slip resistance.

a. Dayton Superior Corporation; Grip Aid

b. SpecChem, LLC; Surface Grip

c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Sure-Step

K. Concrete Hardener/Sealer: Clear, water soluble, sprayable in-organic silicate based hardener/sealer or acrylic co-polymer resin. Products shall be equal to Euclid Chemical Company "Eucosil", Burke "Spartan-Cote", Sonneborn "Sonosil", W.R. Meadows "Pena-Lith", or approved equal and must conform to State of California Air Resources Board VOC Regulations.

L. Concrete Cure: Water based curing compound conforming to ASTM C-309, Type 1, Class A and B, and AASHTO Specification M-148; Type 1, Class A and B requirements, and State of California Air Resources Board VOC Regulations. Product shall be equivalent to Euclid Chemical Company "Kurez VOX", Burke "No. 1127" or "Aqua-Resin Cure", W.R. Meadows "1100 Clear", or approved equal.

M. Non-Shrink Grout: See Section 2.2.A.6.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Concrete Mixes:

1. Type A Concrete:

Strength: 3000 lbs. per square inch at 28 days.

Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch.

Cement Content: As required by mix design (ACI 318 Section 26.4.3).


5.0 sacks per yard minimum.

Maximum Water to Cement Ratio: 0.58

Admixture: Water Reducing.

Weight: 145 lbs. per cubic foot

Use for unexposed foundation concrete except as otherwise specified. At Contractor's option, Type B concrete may be substituted for this.

2. Type B Concrete:

Strength: 3500 lbs. per square inch at 28 days.

Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch.

Minimum Cement Content: As required by mix design. (ACI 318 Section 26.4.3).

5.5 sacks per yard minimum.

Maximum Water to Cement Ratio: 0.45

Admixture: Water reducing.

Weight: 145 lbs. per cubic foot

Use for building slab on grade

Maximum Fly Ash content as a percentage of total cementitious material: 15%

3. Grout shall be non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable Type "713" or "928" by BASF.

a. Metallic grout equivalent to Master Builders "Embeco" may be used only wherecovered by earth, concrete, or masonry.

b. Acceptance by Architect required before using.

B. Consistency of Concrete: Concrete slump, measured in accordance with ASTM C 143, shall fall within following limits.

1. For General concrete placement: 3 inch plus or minus 1 inch.

2. Mixes employing the specified mid-range water reducer shall provide a measured slumpnot to exceed 7 inch +1 inch after dosing, 2 inch +1 inch before dosing.

3. Concrete slump shall be taken at point of placement. Use water reducing admixtures asrequired to provide a workable consistency for pump mixers. Water shall not be added atthe jobsite without written review by the structural engineer.

C. Mix Design:

1. Initial mix design shall be prepared for all concrete in accordance with ACI 318 Section26.4.3. Mix proportions shall be determined in accordance with ACI 318 Section 26.4.3 or26.4.4. In the event that additional mix designs are required due to depletion of aggregatesources, aggregate not conforming to Specifications or at request of Contractor, thesemixes shall be prepared as above.

2. Contractor shall notify the Testing Laboratory and Architect of intent to use concretepumps to place concrete so that mix designs can be modified accordingly.

3. Fly ash shall not exceed fifteen percent of the total cementitious material.

4. Provide 6% air entrainment typical for exterior concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles.

5. Owner’s testing laboratory shall review all mix design before submittal.

D. Mixing:

1. Equipment: All concrete shall be machine mixed. Provide adequate equipment andfacilities for accurate measurement and control of materials.

2. Method of Mixing:

a. Transit Mixing: Comply with ASTM C 94. Ready mixed concrete shall be usedthroughout, except as specified below.


b. On-Site Mixing: Use only if method of storing material, mixing of material and type ofmixing equipment is approved by Architect. Approval of site mixing does not relieveContractor of any other requirements of Specifications.

c. Mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685.

3. Mixing Time: After mix water has been added, concrete shall be mixed not less than 1-1/2minutes nor more than 1-1/2 hours. Concrete shall be rejected if not deposited within thetime specified.

4. Admixtures:

a. Air entraining and chemical admixtures shall be charged into mixer as a solution andshall be dispensed by an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Powderedadmixtures shall be weighed or measured by volume as recommended bymanufacturer. Accuracy of measurement of any admixture shall be within plus orminus 3%.

b. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided such admixturesare added separately during batching sequence, and provided further that admixturesused in that combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect onconcrete or on properties of each other.

c. All admixtures are to be approved by Structural Engineer prior to commencing thiswork.

5. Retempering:

a. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which has setshall be discarded, not retempered.

b. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited.

c. When concrete arrives at project with slump below that suitable for placing, watermay be added only if neither maximum permissible water-cement ratio nor maximumslump is exceeded. Water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at leasthalf of total mixing time required. Any addition of water above that permitted bylimitation of water-cement ratio shall be accompanied by a quantity of cementsufficient to maintain proper water-cement ratio. Such additions shall only be used ifapproved by Architect. In any event, with or without addition of cement, not more than2 gallons of water per cubic yard of concrete, over that specified in design mix, shallbe added.

6. Cold Weather Batching: When average of the highest and lowest air temperature fallsbelow 40 degrees F for more than three consecutive days, provide adequate equipmentfor heating concrete materials. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall beused. When placed in forms, concrete placed in these temperatures shall have aminimum temperature based on dimensions of concrete sections placed per ACI 301.

7. Hot Weather Batching: Concrete deposited in hot weather shall have a placingtemperature below 90 degrees F per ACI 301. If necessary, ingredients shall be cooled toaccomplish this.

2.03 FLOOR LEVELING AND FILL MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Concrete Mortar: Floor leveling, non-shrink trowel applied epoxy concrete mortar; TPM 115 General Polymers Corp., A-H Emery Epoxy Topping #170 Anti-Hydro Corp., or approved equal, where areas to fill are less than 1/4 inch thick.

B. Concrete Mortar: Floor leveling, patching and repair, non-shrink trowel applied concrete mortar; Master Builders EMBECO 411-A, Euclid EUCO, or approved equal, where areas of fill are greater than 1/4 inch thick.

C. Cementitious Floor Leveling Material: Shall be self-leveling or trowelable with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi in accordance with ASTM C-109. Material shall be equal to Quickrete No. 1249, Ardex V-800/K-55, Mapei "Ultra/Flex" or approved equal.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Before any concrete is placed, the following items of work shall have been completed in the area of placing.

1. Forms shall have been erected, adequately braced, cleaned, sealed, lubricated ifrequired, and bulkheaded where placing is to stop.

2. Any wood forms other than plywood shall be thoroughly water soaked before placing anyconcrete. The wetting of forms shall be started at least 12 hours before concreting.

3. Reinforcing steel shall have been placed, tied and supported.

4. Embedded work of all trades shall be in place in the forms and adequately tied andbraced.

5. The entire place of deposit shall have been cleaned of wood chips, sawdust, dirt, debris,hardened concrete and other foreign matter. No wooden ties or blocking shall be left inthe concrete except where indicated for attachment of other work.

6. Reinforcing steel, at the time the concrete is placed around it, shall be cleaned of scale,mill scale or other contaminants that will destroy or reduce bond.

7. Concrete surfaces to which fresh concrete is to be bonded shall be brush cleaned toremove all dust and foreign matter and to expose the aggregate, and then coated with thebonding adhesive herein specified.

8. Prior to placing concrete for any slabs on grade, the moisture content of the subgradebelow the slabs shall be adjusted to at least optimum moisture.

9. No concrete shall be placed until formwork and reinforcement has been approved byArchitect. Clean forms of all debris and remove standing water. Thoroughly cleanreinforcement and all handling equipment for mixing and transporting concrete. Concreteshall not be placed against reinforcing steel that is hot to the touch. Notify StructuralEngineer 48 hours in advance of concrete pour.

B. Conveying: Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Deposit concrete in forms as nearly as practicable at its final position in a manner which will insure that required quality is obtained. Chutes shall slope not less than 4 inches and not more than 6 inches per foot of horizontal run.

C. Depositing: Deposit concrete into forms in horizontal layers not exceeding 24 inches in thickness around building, proceeding along forms at a uniform rate and consolidating into previous pour. In no case shall concrete be poured into an accumulation of water ahead of pour, nor shall concrete be flowed along forms to its final place of deposit. Fresh concrete shall not be permitted to fall from a height greater than 6 feet without use of adjustable length pipes or, in narrow walls, of adjustable flexible hose sleeves. Concrete shall be scheduled so that placing is a continuous operation for the completion of each section between predetermined construction joints. If any concreting operation, once planned, cannot be carried on in a continuous operation, concreting shall stop at temporary bulkheads, located where resulting construction joints will least impair the strength of the structure. Location of construction joints shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by Structural Engineer. The rate of rise in walls shall not be less than 2 feet per hour.

1. Consolidation: Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and worked to all points with solidcontinuous contact to forms and reinforcement to eliminate air pockets andhoneycombing. Power vibrators of approved type shall be used immediately followingpour. Spading by hand, hammering of forms or other combination of methods will beallowed only where permitted by Structural Engineer. In no case shall vibrators be placedagainst reinforcing steel or used for extensive shifting of deposited fresh concrete.Provide and maintain standby vibrators, ready for immediate use.


2. Hot Weather Concreting: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, perform all work inaccordance with ACI 305 when air temperature rises above 75 degrees F and thefollowing:

a. Mixing Water: Keep water temperature as low as necessary to provide for therequired concrete temperature at time of placing. Ice may be required to provide forthe design temperature.

Aggregate: Keep aggregate piles continuously moist by sprinkling with water.

Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of the concrete mix at the time it is beingplaced in the forms shall not exceed 90 degrees F per ACI 301. The methodemployed to provide this temperature shall in no way alter or endanger the design mixor the design strength required.

Dampen subgrade and formwork before placing concrete. Remove all excess waterbefore placing concrete. Keep concrete continuously wet when air temperatureexceeds 85 degrees F for a minimum of 48 hours after placing concrete. For slab ongrade construction, see Section 3.1.E.

Protection: Minimize evaporation from concrete in place by providing shade andwindbreaks. Maintain such protection in place for 14 days minimum.

3. Cold Weather Concreting: Follow recommended ACI 306 procedures when average ofthe highest and lowest air temperature falls below 40 degrees F for more than threeconsecutive days, as approved by Architect. Concrete placed in these temperatures shallhave a minimum temperature based on dimensions of concrete sections placed as shownin ACI 301. No chemicals or salts shall be used to prevent freezing and no acceleratingagents shall be used without prior approval from Architect.

D. Construction Joints: Install only as indicated and noted on Drawings. Joints not indicated on Drawings shall be so located, when approved, as to least impair strength of structure, and shall conform to typical details. Construction joints shall have level tops, vertical sides. Horizontal construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by removing entire surface film and exposing clean aggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix. Joints between concrete and masonry shall be considered construction joints. Vertical construction joints need not be roughened. See Drawings for doweling and required keys.

1. Roughen construction joints by any of following methods:

a. By sandblasting joint.

b. By thoroughly washing joint, using a high pressure hose, after concrete has takeninitial set. Washing shall be done not less than 2 hours nor more than 4 hours afterconcrete has been poured, depending upon setting time.

c. By chipping and wire brushing.

2. All decisions pertaining to adequacy of construction joint surfaces and to compliance withrequirements pertaining to construction joints shall be reviewed with the StructuralEngineer.

3. Just before starting new pour, horizontal and vertical joint surfaces shall be dampened(but not saturated).

4. Before placing regular concrete mix, horizontal construction joint surfaces shall becovered with a layer of mortar composed of cement and fine aggregate of sameproportions as that used in prescribed mix, but omitting coarse aggregate.

5. For slabs, construction joints shall be in locations shown on plan. If not shown, locate atintervals not exceeding 150 feet in each direction. Refer to drawings for proper details forreinforcing at construction joints.

E. Concrete Slabs on Grade:

1. Exterior and interior concrete slabs on grade shall be poured as required under thisSection. Base shall be accurately leveled and compacted prior to placing of concrete.


2. Typically, interior slabs on grade shall be poured over a minimum of four (4 inch) inches of compacted crushed rock, unless otherwise indicated, over a vapor retarder.

3. Protect slab on grade subbase from moisture prior to placing concrete. Avoid wetting rock layer to allow adequate concrete curing and avoid future vapor transmission. If the subbase has been wet excessively, verify that water has been eliminated prior to placement of concrete.

4. Vapor Retarder installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643-98.

a. Unroll Vapor Retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.

b. Lap Vapor Retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls.

c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with specified tape.

d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.

e. No penetration of the Vapor Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.

F. Control Jointing - Slabs on Grade:

1. Joints shall be in locations indicated on Drawings, or as directed by Architect.

2. Joints in interior slabs shall be made by one of following methods:

a. By use of construction joints laid out in checkerboard pattern; pour and allow alternate slabs to set; fill out balance of checkerboard pattern with second pour.

b. By use of dummy groove joints at least 1/4 depth of slab, and at least 1/8 inch wide. These joints may be sawcut as soon as wet concrete can support the weight of the equipment and operator. Delaying sawcutting past this point will make jointing ineffective.

3. Control jointing in exterior paving slabs shall be laid out in a checkerboard pattern; pour as described above, but with joint edges tooled to provide a uniform joint at least 3/8 inch in depth.

4. Slab reinforcing need not be terminated at control joints.

5. Construction and expansion joints shall be counted as control joints.

G. Expansion Joints :

1. Unless otherwise indicated, use 3/8 inch thick expansion joint filler. See Section 2.1.H

2. Joints in interior slabs on grade shall be only in locations indicated.

3. Joints in exterior slabs on grade shall be installed at each side of structures, at curb transitions opposite apron joints, at ends of curb returns, at back of curb when adjacent to sidewalk, and at uniformly spaced intervals not exceeding 20 feet.

4. Edges of concrete at joints shall be edger finished to approximately 3/8 inch radius.

5. Interrupt reinforcing at all expansion joints.

H. Score markings on exterior slabs on grade shall be located as indicated. Where not indicated, mark slabs into rectangles of not less than 12 square feet nor more than 20 square feet using a scoring tool which will leave edges of score markings rounded.

3.02 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Curing: Exposed surfaces of all concrete used in structure shall be maintained in a moist condition for at least 7 days after placing. The following final curing processes shall normally be considered to accomplish this. Concrete shall be maintained at not less than 50 degrees F nor more than 100 degrees F for a period of 72 hours after being deposited.


1. Flatwork to be exposed, stained, or painted shall have curing process submitted andapproved by the architect prior to construction.

2. Initial Curing Process - Flat Work:

a. Mist Spraying: As soon as troweling of concrete surfaces is completed, exposedconcrete shall be sprayed continuously with a special atomizer spray nozzle, capableof producing a fine mist. Spraying shall be done without any dripping of water fromnozzle. Amount of spraying shall be such as to maintain surface of concrete moistwithout any water accumulating on surface. Maintain spraying for a minimum of 12hours, or until such time as hereinafter described curing process is applied. Mistspraying will not normally be required when the ambient air temperature is below 90degrees F.

3. Final Curing Process - Flatwork: Except as noted, use any of following:

a. Water Curing: Concrete shall be kept wet by mechanical sprinklers or by any otherapproved method which will keep surfaces continuously wet.

b. Saturated Burlap Curing: Finished surfaces shall be covered with a minimum of twolayers of heavy burlap which shall be kept saturated during the curing period.

c. Curing Compounds: Membrane curing compounds of chlorinated rubber or resin typeconforming to ASTM C309 may be used only if specifically approved by Architect.Use of membrane curing compound will not be permitted on surfaces to be painted,or to receive ceramic tile, membrane water-proofing or hardeners and sealers.Membrane curing compound may be used in areas to receive resilient floor tile,provided it is wax-free, compatible with adhesive used and approved by adhesivemanufacturer. Agitate curing compounds thoroughly by mechanical meanscontinuously during use and spray or brush uniformly in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations. Apply immediately following final finishingoperation. All curing compounds shall conform to State of California Air ResourcesBoard VOC Regulations.

d. Waterproof paper conforming to ASTM C 171, or opaque polyethylene film, may beused. Concrete shall be covered immediately following final finishing operation.Anchor paper or film securely and seal all edges in such a manner as to preventmoisture escaping from concrete.

4. Curing Process - Formed Surfaces: Forms heated by sun shall be kept moist duringcuring period. If forms are to be removed during curing period, curing as described forflatwork shall be commenced immediately.

B. Refer to Drawings for areas of concrete slab not to receive curing compounds or hardening compounds. Where concrete floors are to receive heavy duty coatings, waterproof coatings and the like, verify with coating installer the type of finish required for specified coating.

C. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for protection of finished concrete against injury by rain, cold, vibration, animal tracks, marking by visitors, vandalism, etc.

D. Provide additional curing agents or compounds, not necessarily listed herein, but as recommended and or required for use with shake type hardeners or other special coatings and coverings by their manufacturers for a complete and proper installation.

3.03 FINISHES

A. Formed Surfaces:

1. Rough Form Finish: Surfaces shall be reasonably true to line and plane with no specifiedrequirements for selected facing materials. Tie holes and defects shall be patched andfins exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall be rubbed down with wooden blocks. Fins andother rough spots at surfaces to receive membrane waterproofing shall be completelyremoved and the surfaces rubbed smooth. Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with thetexture imparted by forms.

a. Rough finish shall be used for the following areas:


1) Below grade and unexposed surfaces.

2.. Smooth Plywood Form Finish: Finish shall be true to line and plane. Tie holes and defects shall have been patched and ground with surface fins removed. Arrangement of plywood sheets shall be orderly, symmetrical, as large as practical and free of torn grain or worn edges. Surface concrete shall be treated with 1 part muriatic acid, in three parts water solution, followed immediately by a thorough rinsing with clear water. Surfaces which are glazed, have efflorescence, or traces of form oil, curing compounds or parting compounds shall be cleaned or treated to match other formed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated or specified.

a. Smooth Plywood Form Finish shall be used for the following areas:

1) All surfaces above grade unless otherwise specified.

2) At Contractor's option, may also be used in lieu of rough form finish.

3. Smooth Plastic Liner Finish: Surface shall be smooth, concrete free of honeycombing, airpockets larger than 1/8 inch in diameter, and fins.

a. This finish shall be used only where indicated on the Drawings.

B. Flatwork:

1. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, flatwork shall have an integral monolithic finish.

2. Integral Monolithic Finish: Apply as soon as freshly poured concrete slabs will bear weightof workers. Pour slabs full thickness to finish floor elevations indicated. At proper time,tamp surface repeatedly with a wire mesh or grid tamper in a manner to force aggregatedown below surface and to bring sufficient mortar to surface to provide for a smoothcoating of cement mortar over entire surface. Allow surface mortar to partially set, thenfloat with wooden floats and finish with one of following, as required.

a. Broom Finish: Steel trowel surface to a smooth dense surface free of lines, toolmarks, cat faces and other imperfections. After troweling, and before final set, givesurface a broom finish, brushing in direction noted on Drawings, or as directed.Broom finish shall be used typically on exterior flatwork except as otherwise indicatedor specified and shall be "medium" texture as approved by Architect.

b. Smooth Steel Trowel Finish: Apply 2 steel trowelings to obtain hard, smooth surface.All lips, irregularities, uneven levels, etc. shall be worked out before last troweling. Allinterior flatwork shall have a smooth steel trowel finish unless specified otherwise.

3. Tolerances:

a. For tolerances not indicated, refer to ACI 117.

b. Slabs on grade – Comply with FF & FL as specified by Architect, or at a minimum shallbe sufficiently even to contact a 10' long straightedge with a tolerance of 1/8 inch.

c. Concrete over metal deck – Refer to Section 05 30 00 for minimum requirements.

d. Elevated slabs – Comply with Architectural requirements.

e. Finished surfaces of exterior integral finished flatwork shall not vary more than 1/4inch from a 10' long straightedge, except at grade changes.

C. Sacked Surfaces: Exposed surfaces that are unacceptable in appearance to the Architect shall be sacked.

1. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with the referenced standards. Remove anyform release materials by stoning by hand, power grinding or other method approved bythe Architect.

2. Prepare concrete surfaces to receive sack finishing with a light sand blasting.

3. For best results, grout application and rubbing should be performed when areas to betreated are shaded and during cool, damp weather. When work is to be performed in hotand dry weather, a fog spray should be available for continuous use.


4. Prepare grout samples for matching of concrete surfaces for approval by the Architect. These shall be made in the following proportions of gray cement to white cement to sand: 1:1:2, 1:2:3, and 2:1:3, etc. until the correct matching color is obtained on the test areas. Sand should be fine enough to pass the Number 30 sieve. Mixes should be made to a good workable consistency in a clean container and the mix with the best color chosen, or modified if needed.

5. Provide sufficient qualities of sand and cement from the same source for the complete work at the job site.

6. Mixing and Application:

a. Mixing of grout on the job should be timed for it to be used up within 1 to 1-1/2 hours.

b. Let the grout stand 20 to 30 minutes after mixing, and then remixed before applying.

c. Soak the concrete surface thoroughly with water at least 15 minutes before applying grout and again just before application so that the surface is adequately wet during the operation.

d. Apply grout with plasterer's trowel or sponge rubber float in sweeping strokes from the bottom up. Brush or spray gun applications may be used when approved by the Architect.

e. Work in freshly applied grout vigorously with a sponge rubber float, then let sit until some of its plasticity is gone but not until it loses its damp appearance. At this point it shall be rubbed with clean, dry burlap to remove the excess grout, leaving no visible film on the surface but filling all air holes.

f. Keep the surface wet for a day after grouting and sack rubbing are completed.

7. Alternate methods of application and materials shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

3.04 PATCHING

A. Formed Surfaces:

1. Promptly upon removal of contact forms and after concrete surfaces have been inspected, form ties shall be removed and all necessary patching and pointing shall be expertly done.

2. Honeycombed areas shall be removed down to sound concrete, coated with a bonding grout or approved compound and patched using a low shrinkage high bond mortar. Patched areas shall be cured by being kept damp for at least 5 days.

3. Tie holes shall be cleaned, dampened and filled solid with patching mortar or cement plugs of an approved variety.

B. Slabs on Grade: After entire slab is finished, shrinkage cracks that may appear shall be patched as follows:

1. Where slab is not exposed or where appearance is not important, cracks larger than 1/32 inch wide shall be filled with cement grout and struck off level with surface.

2. Where slab is exposed and appearance is important, unsightly cracks shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory in appearance to Architect. If this cannot be accomplished, concrete shall be considered defective.

3.05 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective concrete shall mean any of the following:

1. Concrete not meeting 100 percent of the specified 28 day compressive strength.

2. Concrete exhibiting rock pockets, voids, spalls, streaks, cracks, exposed reinforcing to extent that strength, durability, or appearance is adversely affected.

3. Concrete significantly out of place, line, or level.

4. Concrete not containing the required embedded items.


B. Upon determination that concrete strength is defective:

1. Should cylinder tests fall below minimum strength specified, concrete mix for remainder ofwork shall be adjusted to produce required strength. Core samples shall be taken andtested from cast-in-place concrete where cylinders and samples indicate inferior concretewith less than minimum specified strength.

a. Cores of hardened concrete shall be taken and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42and C 39. Number and location of such cores shall be subject to the approval ofArchitect.

b. Cost of core sampling and testing will be paid for by the Contractor.

c. “85 percent” reduction in ACI 318 Section 26.12.4 will not justify low cylinder tests.

C. Upon determining that concrete surface is defective, Contractor may restore concrete to acceptable condition by cutting, chipping, pointing, patching, grinding, if this can be done without significantly altering strength of structure. Permission to patch defective areas will not be considered a waiver of the right to require removal if patching does not, in the opinion of the Architect, satisfactorily restore quality and appearance.

D. If core tests indicate that concrete is below the strength specified, or if patching does not restore concrete to specified quality and appearance, the concrete shall be deemed defective, and shall be removed and replaced without additional cost to the Owner.

E. No repair work shall begin until procedure has been reviewed by the Architect and Structural Engineer.

3.06 SURFACE HARDENER AND SEALER

A. Seal all interior exposed flatwork with clear sealer, except surfaces receiving ceramic tile, quarry tile, poured flooring or other special finishes specified, or as scheduled on the Drawings.

1. Apply sealer in 2 or 3 coats, in accordance with manufacturer's directions, using themaximum quantity recommended.

a. Concrete floors must be thoroughly cured for a minimum of 30 days and completelydry before treatment.

b. Surfaces to be treated must be clean, free of membrane curing compounds, dust, oil,grease and other foreign matter.

c. Upon completion, concrete surfaces shall be clean and without discoloration or tracesof excess hardener left on the surface.

B. Apply sprayable hardener/sealer at locations as scheduled or as indicated on the Drawings. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's favorably reviewed application instructions and recommendations.

3.07 GROUTING

A. Prepare and place grout materials at locations as indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Pack grout materials solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates as indicated and to ensure no voids.

3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove all debris, excess materials, tools and equipment resulting from or used in this operation at completion of this work.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom 04 05 00 - 1 MORTAR AND GROUT and Concession Building

SECTION 04 05 00 MORTAR AND GROUT


A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE

A. Provide all materials, labor and accessories as required and specified for complete mortar and grout installation in masonry walls.

1.03 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents): A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04 22 00. C. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted)

1. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.3. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes4. ASTM C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry5. ASTM C404, Aggregates for Grout6. ASTM C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry7. ASTM C1019, Method of Sampling and Testing Grout8. CBC Section 21039. 2016 California Building (CBC)10. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC)

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done in

Compliance with the 2016 CBC requirements and in collaboration with TestingLaboratory, Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency incharge of building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements;additional requirements may be required in final testing program.

2. All tests and inspections herein are to be performed by an independent testing laboratoryapproved by the building official.

3. Mortar and Grout Tests: If mortar and grout tests are indicated as required on theStructural drawings, at the beginning of Masonry Work, at least 1 test sample each ofmortar and grout shall be taken on 3 successive working days, then once per week with atleast one sample taken for each 5000 square feet of wall area, or fraction thereof.a. Test specimens shall be made in accordance with ASTM C1019 for grout and ASTM

C780 for mortar.b. Test specimens shall be continuously stored in moist air until tested.c. Mortar shall show a compressive strength of not less than 1800 psi at 28 days. Grout

shall show a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi at 28 days.4. If masonry placement and grouting inspection is indicated as required on the Structural

Drawings, a special inspector shall be employed per CBC Section 1704 during theplacement of all units, placement of all reinforcing steel, during all grouting operations andduring taking of all test specimens.


C. Submittals: 1. Mix design for mortar and grout shall be submitted for review.2. Supplier’s certificates indicating materials comply with the specifications below. They shall

include but are not necessarily limited to:a. Aggregatesb. Cementc. Admixtures


A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali; natural gray. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5. D. Lime Putty: Made from hydrated lime or quicklime.

1. If made from quicklime, other than processed pulverized quicklime, slake lime and thenscreen through a No. 16 mesh sieve. Before using, store and protect slaked andscreened lime putty for not less than 10 days.

2. Processed pulverized quicklime shall be slaked for not less than 48 hours, and shall becool when used.

3. Lime putty prepared from hydrated lime may be used immediately after mixing.4. Lime putty prepared from quicklime or pulverized quicklime shall have a plasticity figure,

after slaking and screening, of not less than 200, and shall weigh not less than 83 lbs. percubic foot. Lime putty prepared from hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Aggregate: 1. For Mortar: ASTM C144.2. For Grout: ASTM C404.

F. Admixture: “Sika Grout Aid”

G. Water: Suitable for domestic consumption. 2.02 MORTAR

A. Mortar shall be Type S having a 28 day compressive strength of not less than 1800 psi, and shall conform to CBC Section 2106.

B. Mortar shall be made with admixtures that are proportioned, added and mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions.

C. Mortar mix shall be proportioned by volume; one part portland cement, not less than 1/4 part nor more than ½ part lime putty, and sand totaling not less than 2-1/4 nor more than 3 times sum of volumes of cement and lime used. 1. Total clay content shall not exceed 2% of sand content or 6% of cement content.

2.03 GROUT A. Grout shall have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi. Proportion by

volume, and with sufficient water to produce consistency for pouring without segregation so that grout will flow into masonry joints. Grout shall conform to CBC Section 2103.

B. Fine Grout: 1 part portland cement, to which may be added not more than 1/10 part lime putty, and 3 parts sand. 1. Fine grout shall be used for all grout spaces less than 3" wide.

C. Coarse Grout: 1 part portland cement, to which may be added not more than 1/10 part lime putty, 3 parts sand and not less than 1 part nor more than 2 parts pea gravel (3/8” maximum aggregate size).


1. Coarse grout shall be used in grout spaces 3" wide or more.D. Add “Sika Grout Aid” admixture to grout at the rate of 1 pound per 100 pounds cementititous

material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Accurately measure materials in suitably calibrated devices; shovel measurements are not acceptable. Each 94lb. sack of portland cement will be considered as 1 cubic foot.

B. Place sand, cement and water in mixer in that order and mix for at least 2 minutes; then add lime putty and continue mixing as long as necessary to secure a uniform mass, but in no case less than 10 minutes.

C. Use mixers of at least 1 sack capacity; batches requiring fractional sacks will not be permitted unless cement is weighed for each batch.

3.02 GROUTING PROCEDURES A. Specified under Sections 04 22 00 and 04 21 00.

3.03 RETEMPERING A. When necessary to retemper mortar, add water and remix; retempering by dashing water

over mortar will not be permitted. B. Any mortar which is unused within 30 minutes after initial mixing and any mortar that has

begun to set shall not be used. 3.04 DEFECTIVE MORTAR OR GROUT

A. Should the strength of mortar or grout fall below that specified, remainder of Work shall be adjusted to reach required strength. Work in place representing inferior grout and mortar and indicating a strength less than the minimum specified shall be tested by taking and testing core samples. Number and location of cores shall be determined by Structural Engineer.

B. Should compression tests of cores fail to meet required strength, masonry shall be deemed to be defective and shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.

C. Costs relative to taking and testing of core samples shall be paid by Owner and will be deducted from Contract Amount. Cost of patching core holes shall be borne by Contractor.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom 04 22 00 - 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY and Concession Building

SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install all concrete unit masonry, reinforcement, and all required accessories and materials as shown on the Drawings and specified here.

1. Cooperate with other trades for embedded items, furnished under those sections andinstalled here.

2. Supervise setting of dowels for masonry furnished and installed under Section 03 21 00,Reinforcing Steel.

1.03 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents):

A. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.

C. Mortar and Grout: Section 04 05 00.

D. Raceway and Boxes: Section 26 05 33


A. Allowable Tolerances: Maximum deviation from indicated line or plane of installed concrete masonry units shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted):

1. 2013 California Building Code (CBC)

2. ASTM C90 - Hollow and Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units

3. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing of Concrete Masonry Units

4. ASTM C426 - Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage Concrete Block.

5. CBC Section 2103.1.

6. Concrete Masonry Design Manual published for the Concrete Masonry Association ofCalifornia and Nevada, current Edition.

7. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC)

C. Submittals: Refer to Section 01 33 00 for submitting the following items:

1. Suppliers certificate indicating units comply with material standards indicated below:

2. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel submittals.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be donein Compliance with the 2013 CBC requirements and in collaboration with TestingLaboratory, Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency incharge of building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements;additional requirements may be required in final testing program.

2. All tests and inspections herein are to be performed by an independent testing laboratoryapproved by the Building Official.

3. If masonry tests are indicated as required on the structural drawings, three sample unitswill be tested during construction for each 5,000 square feet of wall area. Test also threesample units prior to construction.

a. Units will be tested for compressive strength on both the net and gross area perASTM C140.


b. Units will be tested for linear drying shrinkage per ASTM C426.

4. If masonry placement and grouting inspection is indicated as required on the structural drawings, a special inspector shall be employed per CBC Section 1704 to inspect the placement of all units, placement of all reinforcing steel, during all grouting operations and during taking of all test specimens.

5. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel tests and inspections.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Scaffolding, runways and ladders required for work under this Section shall be provided by masonry contractor, and shall be heavy trades type substantially built and in compliance with State labor laws, safety codes and other regulatory agencies as applicable to this project.

B. Environmental Requirements: Install concrete unit masonry when temperature in area surrounding work is 40° F or above. Maintain temperature of work above 40° F for at least 48 hours after installation. Grout shall not be placed when air temperatures fall below 20° F.

C. Store masonry units off the ground in a dry location, covered and protected from absorbing moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MASONRY UNITS

A. Masonry units shall be hollow load bearing masonry units conforming to ASTM C90 and CBC Section 2103.1.

1. Weight: Light weight.

2. Maximum lineal shrinkage from saturated to oven dry condition of not more than 0.065 percent.

3. Twenty-eight day compressive strength of 1000 psi on gross area and 1900 psi on net area.

4. Moisture controlled units.

B. Unit Type

1. 8" wide by 8" high x 16" long unless specified otherwise.

a. Precision-Smooth Units.

b. Split Face (Basalite 346) where indicated on architectural drawings.

c. Ground Face (Basalite 225) where indicated on architectural drawings.

C. Provide bond beam units, open end units and other special units as indicated. Use open end units at cells containing vertical reinforcement wherever possible.

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Specified under Section 04 05 00.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 40 or 60, as indicated in Section 03 21 00, deformed bars.

1. Tie Wire: Black annealed steel wire not lighter than 16 gage.

B. Provide spacers to firmly hold reinforcement in place.

C. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts cast in masonry shall be headed bolts with cut threads conforming to ASTM A307 or ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 gr.50 as indicated on drawings.

D. Expansion Anchors: All expansion bolts installed in masonry shall be Hilti Kwik Bolt 3 as manufactured by Hilti Inc. See Structural Drawings for installation requirements and tension testing requirements as applicable. See Drawings for special head requirements as needed. Substitution of other brands or anchors shall proceed only after written approval from the Structural Engineer and the Building Official as been obtained.


2.04 JOINTS

A. All joints shall be 3/8” thick joints for concrete block, Tool exposed interior and exterior joints and concealed exterior joints to produce a dense slightly concave surface that is well bonded to unit at edges. Tool joints behind room base, switches, and outlet plates to produce a smooth dense joint flush with the face of adjacent masonry units, where occurring on the job. Cut joints flush on concealed interior surfaces and surfaces to be plastered.

2.05 SEALER

A. Contractor shall provide and install minimum two coats, Thoroseal masonry sealer at all CMU walls. Thoroseal product shall meet all state vapor requirements. Sealer shall be clear and non-gloss product.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive masonry and verify following:

1. That foundation surface is level to permit bed joint with range of 1/4 to 3/4 inch.

2. That edge is true to line to permit projection of masonry to less than 1/4-inch.

3. That projecting dowels are free from loose scale, dirt, concrete, or other bond-inhibitingsubstances and properly located.

B. Do not begin work before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean concrete surfaces to receive masonry. Remove latence or other foreign material lodged in surfaces by sandblasting or other means as required. Joints between concrete and masonry shall be considered construction joints. See Concrete specifications.

B. Ensure masonry units are clean and free from dust, dirt, or other foreign materials before laying.

C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbances.

D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until masonry has set to provide permanent bracing.

3.03 COURSING

A. Erect masonry in accordance with CBC Section 2104.1.2.

B. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated to the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32-inch max.

2. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet.

3. Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch.

4. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet; 1/4-inch in 10 feet; ½-inch maximum.

5. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet.

C. Bond: Unless noted otherwise in Drawings, lay concrete masonry units in running bond with vertical joints located over score of unit in course below (and vice versa).

D. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness.

E. Preserve the vertical continuity of cells in concrete unit masonry. The minimum clear horizontal dimensions of vertical cores shall be 3 x 3 inches for 8-inch wide block.

3.04 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units.

B. Lay only dry concrete masonry units.

C. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.


1. Block Cap: Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints.

2. Install grout cap where and as indicated.

D. Fully bond intersections and external and internal corners.

E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

F. Remove excess mortar.

G. Perform job-site cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges.

H. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Do not use toothing.

3.05 JOINTS

A. Horizontal and vertical joints at masonry units shall be 3/8-inch wide and as follows:

1. Point joint tight in unpurged masonry below ground.

2. All end joints shall be fully filled with mortar and joints squeezed in bed joints shall be held back approximately ½-inch from cell to provide positive bond with grout.

3. Joints shall be struck flush in restrooms, all wall surfaces.

3.06 CONDUIT IN MASONRY

A. Conduit allowed in vertical cells only and only where specifically indicated on structural drawings. Conduit shall be set a minimum of 1 inch clear of reinforcing.

3.07 MASONRY REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315, to a tolerance of +/- ½-inch from specified location.

B. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the plans shall not be used. Heating of bars for bending will not be permitted.

1. Bars shall conform accurately to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown on drawings and with hooks and beds made as detailed. Bars shall be placed as indicated on the drawings and centered on grout space.

2. At the time grout is place around it, reinforcing steel shall be clean of mill scale or other coatings that will destroy or reduce bond.

3. All vertical reinforcing steel shall be installed in one piece, full height of wall, and braced throughout its height in a manner that will retain the steel in proper position and provide the proper clearance.

C. Reinforcing steel shall be secured to all foundation dowels and held in place at spacings not to exceed 192 bar diameters.

D. Conduit allowed in vertical cells only and only where specifically indicated on structural drawings. Conduit shall be set a minimum of 1 inch clear of reinforcing.

3.08 GROUTING

A. General Requirements:

1. All cells shall be grouted solid.

2. Use low lift or high lift grouting at Contractor's option.

3. Use grout pump, hopper or bucket to place grout.

4. Place grout in final position within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of mixing water.

5. Place grout and rod with a 3/4-inch flexible cable vibrator sufficiently to case it to flow into all voids between the cells and around the reinforcing steel. Slushing with mortar will not be permitted.


6. Stop grout approximately 1½ inches below top of last course; except at top course bringgrout to top of wall.

B. Low Lift Grouting:

1. Do not lay units higher than 48 inches before grouting.

2. If mortar has been allowed to set prior to grouting, remove all fins protruding more than½-inch into grout space.

3. Consolidate each lift twice. Once while placing grout and once more after initial absorptionof water but before set.

C. High Lift Grouting:

1. Lay up walls, subject to maximum height limitations of Masonry Standards JointCommittee, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures Table 1.16.1.

2. Provide clean out holes at the bottom of every pour in cells containing verticalreinforcement. Construct clean out courses with open-bottom bond beam units inverted topermit cleaning of all cells by flushing. Cleanouts shall be not less than 3x4inch openingscut from one face shell. Do not plug clean out holes until masonry work, reinforcement,and final cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected.

3. Clean mortar droppings from the bottom of the grout space and from reinforcing steel.Remove mortar fins protruding more than ½-inch into the grout space by dislodging theprojections with a rod or stick as the work progresses or by washing the grout space atleast twice a day during erection using a high pressure stream of water.

4. Do not place grout in hollow unit masonry until mortar joints have set for at least 72 hoursand clean out plugs have cured 48 hours.

5. Place grout in lifts not to exceed 4 feet in height, with a waiting period between lifts,dependent on weather and absorption rate of the masonry, in order to place thesucceeding lift after the preceding lift becomes plastic but prior to initial set. The first liftshall be consolidated using mechanical vibrators. After the required waiting period, placethe second lift and consolidate with the vibrator, reconsolidating the lift below to a depth of12 to 18 inches. Repeat the waiting, placing and consolidating process until the top of thegrout pour is reached. Reconsolidate the top lift after the required waiting period. Thehigh-lift grouting of any section of wall between lateral flow barriers shall be completed tothe top of a pour in one working day unless a new series of clean out holes is establishedand the resulting horizontal construction joint cleaned.

3.09 WEATHER PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Cold Weather Construction to be in accordance with CBC section 2104.3.

B. Hot Weather Construction to be in accordance with CBC section 2104.4

3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. See drawings for type and location of expansion joints.

3.11 BOND BEAMS

A. Bond beams shall be located where shown and detailed on the drawings, and shall be reinforced as indicated and as herein after specified.

3.12 BUILT-IN WORK

A. Miscellaneous Embedded Items: All items indicated to be embedded in masonry shall be carefully located and anchored to prevent movement during grouting operations. Avoid cutting and patching.

1. Install all anchor bolts and anchors furnished under other sections for wood nailers,ledgers, etc.

3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING


A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.14 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damage, or if units do not match adjoining units.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar.

C. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at each day's work and after final pointing.

D. Leave work and surrounding surface clean and free of mortar spots and droppings.

E. Cleaning: Upon completion of masonry installation, repair all holes. Defective joints shall be cut out and rejointed. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned free of mortar, green stain and effloresence.

3.15 SEALER

A. Contractor shall install sealer as directed by the manufacturer. Coverage and installation rates shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install sealer in minimum two coats at the rates required.

3.16 DEFECTIVE MASONRY

A. Materials or workmanship not conforming to appearance or strength specified, will be deemed defective and shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.

B. Defective mortar and grout, as defined under Section 04 05 00; “Mortar and Grout” shall constitute defective masonry.

END OF SECTION


05 5000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 5000METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.B. Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings: Paint finish, interior and exterior

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.E. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.F. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates; 2013.G. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.H. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.I. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

J. ASTM B26/B26M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings; 2014.K. ASTM B85/85M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings; 2014.L. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.M. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.N. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless

Tubes; 2012.O. ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless

Tubes (Metric); 2012.P. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished

Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012.Q. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.R. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.S. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.T. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; 2008.U. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2011.



V. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.2004).

W. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and detailswhere applicable.1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by IAS AC172.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M.C. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.D. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211 (ASTM B211M), 6061 alloy, T6 temper.E. Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings: ASTM B26/B26M.F. Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings: ASTM B85/B85M.G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMSA. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For

support of metal decking; prime paint finish.2.05 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prime paint steel items.



1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be embedded inmasonry.

2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding isrequired, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.

B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.D. Prime Painting: One coat.E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M

requirements. F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M

requirements.2.06 FINISHES - ALUMINUM

A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I color anodized.B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.C. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than

0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom 06 10 00 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY and Concession Building

SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. The requirements of Division I apply to all Work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE

A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, facilities and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of rough carpentry and associated items (except that which is specified elsewhere) indicated on Drawings and necessary to complete the Work. Items include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Blocking, backing, stripping, furring, and nailers.2. Rough hardware.3. Wood framing.4. Wood sheathing.5. Preservative treatment.6. Drilling, saw cuts, knock-outs and framing for ventilation.7. Wood sheathing backing at tile walls.

1.03 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents) A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00. B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. C. Glued Laminated Construction: Section 06 18 00.


1. Coordinate the work of all trades to ensure proper placement of all materials, anchors,etc., as well as providing for openings and anchors for the installation of surface mountedmaterials and equipment.

2. Qualifications for Workmen: Provide sufficient skilled workmen and supervisors who shallbe present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall bethoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniquesspecified.

3. Rejection: In the acceptance or rejection of rough carpentry, no allowance will be madefor lack of skill on the part of the workmen.

B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted) 1. 2016 California Building Code (CBC).2. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB); Standard Grading Rules for

West Coast Lumber No. 17.3. Lumber: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA); Western Lumber Grading Rules

05.4. Redwood: Redwood Inspection Service (RIS); Standard Specifications for Grades of

California Redwood Lumber.5. Wood Sheathing: The Engineered Wood Association; Specifications and Grades.

a. Structural Plywood: United States Product Standard PS1, Group 1 Douglas Fir.b. APA rated sheathing: United States Product Standard PS2.

6. Wood Preservative: American Wood-Preservers’ Association (AWPA):


a. U1, Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. b. M4, Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.

7. 2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS). C. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00)

1. Certification: a. Preservative Treated Wood: Certification for waterborne preservative and that

moisture content was reduced to 19 percent maximum, after treatment. D. Tests and Inspections:

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done in Compliance with the 2012 CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory, Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge of building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additional requirements may be required in final testing program.

2. If indicated on the Structural Drawings, load test expansion and epoxy anchors as indicated on the drawings.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection:

1. After delivery, store all materials off the ground, covered, and in such a manner as to ensure proper ventilation and drainage and to protect against damage and the weather. Maintain wood at the maximum moisture levels indicated in Materials Section.

2. Keep all material clearly identified with all grade marks legible; keep all damaged material clearly identified as damaged, and separately store to prevent its inadvertent use. Do not allow installation of damaged or otherwise non-complying material.

3. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 4. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements

necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sawn Lumber: 1. Lumber (Wood Framing): Meet requirements of following minimum grades. All grades to

WCLIB Grading Rules No. 17. Species shall be Douglas Fir - Larch Maximum Moisture

Item Sizes Grade Content at Initial Use Notes All Material 2x No. 2 19% Unless Noted Otherwise All Material 3x,4x No. 2 30% Unless Noted Otherwise All Material 6x No. 1 30% Unless Noted Otherwise Decking 2x Select Dex 19%

2. “At initial use” shall be that point at which nails, screws, bolts, split rings, shear plates or other fasteners or the holes for said fasteners are placed in the wood.

3. All sawn lumber is assumed to be enclosed in the dry building envelope in the final service condition, unless noted otherwise, and free to dry to moisture content less than 19%.

4. The Contractor shall use whatever means necessary, including site drying to ensure that the moisture contents above are not exceeded.

5. All studs, plates, joists, rafters and beams 3x and thicker shall be free of heart center in accordance with the specified grading standards.


B. Wood Sheathing: 1. Roof and Wall Structural Sheathing: PS1 and PS2 APA rated sheathing with exterior glue.

Thickness type and grade shall be as indicated on Drawings.2. Where indicated on the Architectural Drawings as interior wall backing behind tile and in

all toilet rooms behind sheet rock, to be C-C APA rated sheathing with exterior glue.Thickness shall be 5/8-inch at all locations.

3. Flooring: C-C APA Performance rated tongue and groove with exterior glue. Thicknesstype and grade shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Building Paper: Fed. Spec. UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade B (15 lb. min. unless noted elsewhere.).

D. Rough Hardware Fastenings and Connections: All types including bolts, lag screws, nails, spikes, screws, washers and other rough hardware, of kinds that may be purchased and that require no further fabrication, shall be furnished and installed for all finish and rough carpentry and shall conform to 2012 NDS Standards and dimensions. All hardware exposed to weather shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A153 Standards. All nails used into pressure treated lumber shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A153 or stainless steel. 1. Common wire nails or spikes unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Box nails and

sinker nails are not permitted. Vinyl coating is permitted on nails when not exposed toweather.

2. Bolts: Bolt material shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A. Bolt dimensions shallconform to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 with hex head of sizes indicated.

3. Lag Screws: Lag screws shall conform to ASTM 307, Grade A. All lag screws shall havehex heads where exposed.

4. Washers: Standard flat washers shall conform to ANSI B18.22.1, Type A, Wide Pattern.Steel plate washers shall be Simpson BP or BPS or equivalent. Malleable iron washersshall be standard malleable iron washers.

5. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosive resistant plating orcoating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration. Fastening shallbe accomplished by low-velocity piston-driven power activated tool. Pins and tool shall beas manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems or equivalent. See Drawings for size, typeand embedment.

6. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 30 00 for anchors to concrete and Section 04 20 00for anchors to masonry.

7. Adhesive Anchors: See Section 03 30 00 for anchors to concrete and Section 04 20 00for anchors to masonry.

8. Fabricated Metal Timber Framing Connectors: Connectors shall be punched for nailingand bolting. Nails and nailing shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions with a nailprovided for each punched hole. All connectors must have specific ICC approval. Typesas noted on Drawings are Simpson Strong-Tie. Hardware suppliers other than Simpsonshall submit a comparative material list itemizing product designation, load rating andsupported member size for review by the enforcement agency and the StructuralEngineer.

2.02 FABRICATION A. Lumber:

1. All lumber shall be air or kiln-dried to the maximum moisture content indicated inMaterials Section.

2. Furnish S4S unless otherwise noted.3. Size to conform to rules of governing standard. Sizes shown are nominal unless

otherwise noted.


B. Wood Treatment: 1. Preservative Treatment: The treating process and results thereof shall conform to the

appropriate AWPA Standards for exterior, above ground use (3B) and as indicated in CBC Section 2303.1.8.

2. After treatment and prior to shipping, air or kiln-dry lumber to maximum 19 percent moisture content.

3. All treated wood shall be identified with a label meeting the requirements of CBC Section 2303.1.8.1.

4. The amount of preservative to be injected into the wood shall be as required by the AWPA standard for each type of installation.

5. All wood in contact with concrete or masonry shall be preservative treated. 6. Cut surfaces and bored holes in pressure treated wood shall be protected in accordance

with AWPA Standard M4. C. Fire Treatment: All fire-retardant-treated wood shall be identified with a label meeting the

requirements of CBC Section 2303.2.4. The treating process and results thereof shall meet the requirements of CBC Section 2303.2. Moisture content of fire-retardant-treated wood shall meet CBC Section 2303.2.8. Treater shall submit design and fastener valves for treated wood to Structural Engineer for review. See Drawings for location of fire-retardant-treated wood.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Grade Mark each piece of lumber. Marking must be done by recognized agency.

1. Douglas Fir shall bear WCLIB or WWPA grade stamp. 2. Pressure treated Douglas Fir shall bear AWPA Quality mark.

B. Wood Sheathing: Each panel shall be legibly identified as to type, grade and specie by APA grade. If plies are spliced, the slope of the scarf shall not be steeper than 1:8. White pockets will not be permitted in face plies.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Inspection: 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and

verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly proceed.

2. Verify that rough carpentry may be performed in strict accordance with the original design and all pertinent codes and regulations.

B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. General: All rough carpentry shall produce joints true, tight, and well nailed with all members

assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with all pertinent codes and regulations. B. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Carefully select all members. Select individual pieces so that

knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing or making proper connections. Cut out and discard all defects which will render a piece unable to serve its intended function.

C. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.

D. Shimming: do not shim any framing component. E. Care shall be taken that notching and boring of members is in strict conformance with the

Drawings and that there are no over-cuts.


3.03 FASTENING A. Nailing: Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified, all nailing shall be as

required by CBC Table 2304.9.1 - Fastening Schedule. 1. Nails or Spikes shall be common wire unless noted otherwise. Penetration of nails or

spikes shall be one-half the length of the nail or spike into the piece receiving the point.However, to connect pieces 2" in thickness, 16d nails shall be used unless notedotherwise.a. Bore holes for nails wherever necessary to prevent splitting.b. Use finish or casing for finish work.c. Use of machine nailing is subject to a satisfactory installation of nails. Minimum edge

distances shall be maintained. Nails installed through sheathing with nail guns shallnot penetrate into the outer plies deeper than hand nailing. Submittal of guns andnails is required.

d. All nailing into Pressure-Treated lumber shall utilize hot-dipped zinc coatedgalvanized nails or stainless steel nails per CBC Section 2304.9.5.

B. Bolts and Lag Screws: Bolts shall be sizes indicated on Drawings. Holes for bolts shall be 1/16-inch larger than the bolt diameter. Malleable, Steel plate or standard flat washers shall be used where heads or nuts would otherwise bear directly on wood surfaces. Malleable or plate washers shall be used on all anchor bolts. Cut washers are not permitted. Lag screws shall be screwed (not driven) into place. For the shank, holes shall be bored the same depth and diameter as shank. For threaded portion, holes shall be pre-drilled as follows:

Lag Screw Size Thread Portion Pre-Drill 1/2” diameter 1/4” diameter 5/8” diameter 5/16” diameter 3/4 diameter 3/8” diameter 7/8” diameter 1/2” diameter 1” diameter 5/8” diameter

Soap Lag screws prior to installation. Tighten all bolts and screws before closing in. C. Framing Devices: Install according to the manufacturer’s instructions unless otherwise noted.

3.04 FRAMING AND ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Sills: Shall be in long lengths of sizes shown, fastened with anchor bolts as indicated, a

minimum of two anchor bolts per piece. Place steel plate washers (but not standard flat or malleable iron washers) under nuts bearing on wood. Set sills level and true.

B. Studs, Posts and Columns: Shall be full length. Corners shall be as detailed. Partitions or walls containing plumbing, heating or other piping shall be so formed as to give proper clearance for materials. Cut members as required to provide full bearing at ends. Connect to structure as indicated.

C. Plates: Shall be full length of wall segment or 12-foot minimum and spliced as shown. D. Blocking: Blocking shall be same thickness and width of studs or joists unless shown

otherwise. Blocking shall not be spaced over 8'-0" c.c. Install fire blocking in accordance with CBC. Horizontal fire blocking in walls shall be placed at floor lines and ceiling lines unless noted otherwise. Install blocking at all plywood joints where noted on the Drawings. Install wall width full height solid blocking at floor joists beneath all posts in walls. Blocking shall be installed around all wall, floor and roof penetrations.

E. Joists and Beams: Shall be full span length and spliced over bearings unless shown otherwise. Install with crown side up. Beams or headers indicated to be built up of two or more joists shall be fabricated on the job using full length members. For two piece 2x members, stitch nail pieces together with 16d common nails spaced not over 12 inches c.c. and


staggered. Clinch nails protruding through members. For three or more piece members, stitch bolt pieces together with ½" bolts spaced not over 12 inches c.c. and staggered. 1. Provide double joists and headers at all openings through roof unless otherwise shown on

Drawings.2. Provide typical headers at all openings through walls where one or more studs are

required to be cut. For penetration through walls narrower than stud spacing, provide solidblocking on all sides for fastening finish materials.

F. Wood Sheathing: Install to pattern indicated and provide blocking at joints where noted on the Drawings. Center all joints over bearing supports. Nail to framing as indicated. Install wood sheathing with face plies perpendicular to joists or studs unless indicated otherwise. Wall wood sheathing shall continue uninterrupted by ceilings or soffit from floor to floor or floor to roof unless specifically detailed on the Structural Drawings.

G. Wood Furring, Stripping: Install as shown or required to provide nailing materials or passage of pipes, conduits, etc., not otherwise accommodated including ceiling stripping for gypsum drywall construction.

H. Bridging: Space not over 8'-0" c.c. for spans over 16'-0". Joists 8 inches or less in depth shall not require bridging unless specifically indicated.

I. Solid Wood Backing: Solid wood backing shall be provided for all wall and ceiling finishes and for supporting of mounted items for all trades, including but not limited to metal toilet partitions, toilet room accessories, frames, cabinets, casework, mirrors, trim, applied wall finishes, athletic equipment, food service equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, etc. Contractor shall coordinate placement of backing and supports with Subcontractor supplying mounted items.

J. Building Paper: Install in all locations indicated except where included in other sections of the specifications.

K. Cant Strips and Crickets: Shape to sizes shown. Rigidly fasten to construction. Form neat mitered corners.

L. Wood Sheathing Backing: All toilet rooms, restrooms, single or joint occupancy shall have all walls backed with 5/8-inch thick wood sheathing with no surface voids. Install sheathing between the framing members and wallboard. The same wood sheathing shall also be provided and installed at all tile locations. At tile locations wood sheathing shall be installed between the framing members and the resin-cement backing board.

3.05 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY WORK A. Install all items under other sections specified to be furnished and installed in other sections

which relate to the rough carpentry work. B. Miscellaneous Carpentry Work not included under other sections but, indicated or required yet

not specified elsewhere shall be furnished and installed hereunder, including appropriate fastening devices. Contractor shall provide miscellaneous carpentry work for all sections and divisions of work identified.

C. Wood Curbs for Equipment: Construct all wood curbs for roof mounted equipment as detailed. Provide all miscellaneous blocking, bracing, supports, and other wood items as shown or required to complete the work.

D. Plywood Backing for Electrical, telephone, and similar types of wall mounted equipment shall be provided hereunder where required. Plywood shall be 3/4-inch thick exterior A-C plywood with 'A' face exposed.

E. Fire/Draft Stops: Construct fire and drafts stops in furred attic spaces where indicated or required by CBC code. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings construct of not less than 5/8-inch Type 'X' gypsum wallboard or ½" wood sheathing, adequately supported by 2x4’s at 24 inches c.c., braced diagonally to the roof structure. Draft stop and installation work shall conform to code requirements.


F. Shoring and Bracing: Shore or brace for temporary support of all work as required during the construction period except any shoring and bracing specified and included under other sections of these specifications.

G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide and maintain all barricades and enclosures required to protect the work in progress.

H. Protect all work in progress and all work installed, as well as the work of all other trades. Any work damaged as a result of the work under this section shall be corrected to its original condition or replaced if directed by the Architect at no increase in cost to the Owner.

J. Ventilation: Contractor shall include all labor and materials necessary to provide ventilation requirements of roof overhangs, eaves, attics, and all other components of the building required by codes to be ventilated. Work shall include removing knock-outs in wood I-joists for cross ventilation, drilling of blocking, wood sheathing, and other wooden components of the structure necessary to comply with requirements of the CBC for ventilation of buildings.

END OF SECTION

CSUS Soccer/Softball Restroom 06 18 00 - 1 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION and Concession Building

SECTION 06 18 00 GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION


A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE

A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances, facilities and equipment required for the fabrication and delivery to job site of all glued laminated wood members.

1.03 RELATED WORK INCLUDED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00.


1. Qualifications of Manufacturer: The fabricator shall have been engaged in the continuousmanufacturing of glued laminated timbers for a minimum of at least two years and shallhave the authority to use the AITC "Quality Inspected Stamp". Each timber member shallbe stamped and placed in such a position not to be visible on finished erected members.

B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00): 1. Shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire structural

system.2. Show large scale details of connections, connectors and other accessories.3. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in

required work.C. Tests and Inspections:

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done inCompliance with the 2016 CBC requirements and in collaboration with TestingLaboratory, Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency incharge of building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements;additional requirements may be required in final testing program.

2. Each structural glued-laminated member shall be stamped with an identifying mark. Markshall include all pertinent data, such as grade and species of lumber, type of glue,extremes of moisture content and other such information as may be required.

3. Certificate of compliance with the above data.D. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless specified otherwise)

1. 2016 California Building Code (CBC).2. 2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS).3. American Institute of Timber Construction, "Standard Specifications for Structural Glued

Laminated Timber of Softwood Species, AITC 117.4. ANSI/AITC Standard A190.15. ASTM D3737 “Design and Manufacture of Structural Glued Laminated Timber”.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver undamaged products to site in manufacturer's protective wrappings with legends

intact. Store on site secure from weather, soil and physical damage. B. Transport, handle and store in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Use padded, non-marring slings.


C. Architectural Appearance Grade members shall be shipped, handled and stored with complete weather and damage protection wrapping. Maintain wrappings in place until immediately prior to deck installation.

D. Industrial Appearance Grade glued laminated timber members shall be wrapped in a water resistant covering during transit. Contractor shall be responsible for protection during hauling and unloading at job site.


A. Lumber: 1. Lumber used for laminating structural members shall be well manufactured and shall

conform to requirements of Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 17, West CoastLumber Inspection Bureau. Such lumber shall be inspected, identified by individual piece,and certified as meeting requirements of said standard specifications by an approvedlumber grading agency. It is assumed that each lamination is graded on basis ofrequirement for nominal size of individual lamination. When lumber is resawn, it shall beregraded on basis of new size.

B. Type: Glued Laminated Timber Protected from Weather 1. Species: Douglas Fir or Western Larch2. Stress Grade: AITC Combination 24F-V4 for simple beams, 24F-V8 for cantilever or

continuous beams.3. Extreme fiber bending - Fb = 2400 psi4. Adhesives: Wet use5. Appearance Grade: AITC Industrial for concealed uses, Architectural appearance at

exposed uses.6. Preservative Treatment: Portions of beams exposed to weather shall be preservative

treated.7.. Laminations: Provide outer tension laminations or proof load testing as required by

ANSI/AITC A190.1. 8. Sealing: Shop seal all surfaces with 2 coats of clear penetrating sealer.

2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication shall be in compliance with the above standards and references.

1. Fabrication shall be in accordance with best practices with adequate plant and equipmentand under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

2. Laminations shall be machine finished to a smooth surface, but not sanded, and to auniform thickness with a maximum allowable variation of 1/64 inch. Warp, twist, or othercharacteristics which will prevent intimate contact of adjacent glued faces or interfere withuniform bending to a required curvature when under clamping pressure shall not bepermitted. Surfaces to be glued shall be clean and free from oil, dust and other foreignmaterial which would be detrimental to satisfactory gluing.

3. Moisture content of lumber at time of gluing shall be not less than 7 percent nor morethan 12 percent.

4. Slips, misses, and wane are not permitted.5. Boring of holes in members shall be in strict conformance with the Drawings. Notching is

prohibited except where specifically detailed.6. Field cuts and holes in preservative treated members shall be preservative treated and

sealed.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION


A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect and verify that the installed work of all other trades is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Verify that specified items may be installed in accordance with the approved design. C. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed in discrepant areas

until discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

B. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.03 HANDLING A. Use equipment and methods that avoid scarring corners and faces or otherwise injuring

members. Sharp instruments and unprotected wire rope, chain slings and the like shall not be permitted.

3.04 INSTALLATION A. Glued Laminated members are to be erected and installed in accordance with the Drawings

and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.05 CLEANUP A. Keep premises free from accumulated waste materials, rubbish and debris resulting from this

Work. Upon completion, remove tools, appliances, surplus materials, waste materials, rubbish, debris and accessory items used in or resulting from said Work, and legally dispose of off the site.

END OF SECTION


07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 2100THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Batt insulation in exterior wall and roof assemblies.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.

1.02 REFERENCESA. In the following paragraphs, retain only those reference standards that are used elsewhere in

this section.B. ASTM International (ASTM) :

1. C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for WoodFrame and Light Construction Buildings.

2. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.3. E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750

Degrees C.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing laboratory that

insulation meets fire hazard classification requirements.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Hazard Classification:1. Noncombustible, tested to ASTM E136.2. Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less, tested to ASTM E84.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Store insulation in clean, dry, sheltered area, off ground or floor, until used. Protect against

wetting and moisture absorption.1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install until insulation until building is substantially water and weather tight.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Johns Manville. (www.jm.com <http://www.jm.com>)2. Knauf Insulation. (www.knaufusa.com <http://www.knaufusa.com>)3. Owens Corning. (www.owenscorning.com <http://www.owenscorning.com>)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.2.02 MATERIALS

A. Thermal Batt Insulation:1. Type: ASTM C665, glass fiber composition. Facing: Reinforced Kraft paper vapor barrier

on one side with stapling flanges.2.03 THERMAL RES

A. Thermal resistance as indicated on drawings.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Minimum 2 inches wide, pressure sensitive, [foil faced,] waterproof.


07 2100 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION

B. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel type best suited to application, minimum 5/8 penetrationinto framing.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Friction fit between framing members.B. Staple or nail in place at maximum 12 inches on center.C. Butt insulation to adjacent construction. Butt ends and edges.D. Carry insulation around pipes, wiring, boxes, and other components.E. Ensure complete enclosure of spaces without voids.F. Apply with vapor barrier facing towards interior of structure.G. Tape seal lapped flanges, butt ends, and tears and holes in facings.

END OF SECTION


07 2500 - 1 WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 2500WEATHER BARRIERS


A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not airtight or vapor retardant.

B. Flexible Flashings at openings.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.B. Section 09 2400 - Portland Cement Plastering: Water-resistive barrier over gypsum sheathing

substrate.1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture resistant, tothe degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009.B. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc;

2013.C. ICC-ES AC148 - Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials; ICC Evaluation Service,

Inc; 2011.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation, installation methods, and storage

and handling criteria.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior sheathing under siding.1. Use building paper unless otherwise indicated.2. Under siding, use two separate layers of building paper.

2.02 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER)A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated Kraft building paper complying with requirements of ICC-ES

AC38 Grade D.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M, exceptslip resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere withproper installation.

http://www.icc-es.org/Criteria/index.cfm











07 2500 - 2 WEATHER BARRIERS

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped

to shed water but with seams not sealed.C. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:

1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12

inches (305 mm).4. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings.5. Install head flashings under weather barrier.6. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into

opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.D. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches(125 mm) onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches (150 mm) up jambs; mechanicallyfasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flangesusing a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4inches (100 mm) wide; do not seal sill flange.

3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides ofopening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches (230 mm) wide, covering entire depth offraming.

4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches (50mm) beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,using joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal toweather barrier surface.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.B. Do not leave paper- or felt-based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week.

END OF SECTION






































07 4113 - 1 METAL ROOF PANELS

SECTION 07 4113METAL ROOF PANELS


A. Architectural roofing, of preformed steel panels.B. Fastening system.C. Factory finishing.D. Accessories and miscellaneous components.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013

Supplements and Errata.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated

by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010 (Reapproved 2015).D. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.E. ASTM E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and

Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2005 (Reapproved 2012).F. ASTM E1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel

Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2011).G. ASTM E1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof

Panel Systems; 2011.H. ICC-ES AC188 - Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012.I. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Summary of test results, indicating compliance with specified requirements.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

D. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representingmanufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Manufacturer Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing metal roof panelfabricator is accredited under IAS AC472.

F. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of metal roofing system to specified requirements.G. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in University's name and are registered with manufacturer.



1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems

similar to those required for this project.1. Not less than 5 years of documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to

panels prior to installation.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Design is based on Span-Lok hp, manufactured by AEP Span.1. Roofing panels: Span-Lok hp, 2" standing seam.

B. Metal Roof Panels:1. AEP Span: www.aepspan.com2. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com.3. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com.4. Firestone Building Products LLC; _____: www.firestonebpco.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specifiedrequirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movementof substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.

B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.1. Steel Panels:

a. Steel Thickness: Minimum 24 gage (0.024 inch) (0.61 mm).2. Texture: Smooth.3. Width: Maximum roof panel coverage of 16 inches (406 mm);

a. Soffit panel coverage of 12 inches (300mm).b. Wall panel coverage as detailed. Refer to drawings.

2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEMA. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum

concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meetperformance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement.

2.04 PANEL FINISHA. Panel Finish: Provide primer and top finish coat on exposed faces; provide primer and backer

coat on concealed faces of panels.DuraTech® 5000: Polyvinylidine Fluoride, full 70 percentKynar 500®or Hylar 5000®, consisting of a baked-on 0.15-0.20 mil corrosion resistant primerand a baked-on 0.70-0.80 mil finish coat with a specular gloss of 8 to 15 when tested inaccordance with ASTM D523 at 60 degrees.

2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMSA. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings,

closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness,and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation mayoptionally be made of stainless steel.

B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosionresistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam.

C. Sealants:



1. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminatedpolyether/polyurethane.

2. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant.D. Underlayment: Grace Ice & Water Shield, self-adhered roofing underlayment, or approved

equal.1. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.06 FABRICATIONA. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard

processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properlyprepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other

adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt

sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal

joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Overall: Install roofing, wall and soffit panels in accordance with approved shop drawings andpanel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific projectconditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermaland structural movement.1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise

recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances.2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods

that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including

flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, caps, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roofaccessory items.

C. Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, minimizingtransverse joints except at junction with penetrations.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,

excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean andunmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary

walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing untilcompletion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before Date of SubstantialCompletion.

END OF SECTION


07 4646 - 1 FIBER CEMENT SIDING

SECTION 07 4646FIBER CEMENT SIDING


A. Wood-fiber cement siding, soffit panels, vented soffit panels, fascia boards & trim.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding.B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between siding and adjacent construction and

fixtures.C. Section 09 9000 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.C. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.D. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.

C. Maintenance Instructions: Periodic inspection recommendations and maintenance procedures.D. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in University’s name, showing

that it has been registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in thissection with minimum 3 years of experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIDING

A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under highpressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; withmachined edges, for nail attachment.1. Style: Standard lap style.2. Texture: Smooth.3. Length: 12 ft (3.7 m), nominal.4. Width (Height): 9-1/4 inches (235 mm), with 8" exposure.5. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm), nominal.6. Finish: Factory applied primer.7. Color: As indicated on drawings.8. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.


07 4646 - 2 FIBER CEMENT SIDING

B. Soffit Panels: Panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure withintegral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges,for nail attachment.1. Texture: Smooth; smooth with perforations where indicated.2. Length: 96 inches (2400 mm), nominal.3. Width: 12 inches (___ mm).4. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm), nominal.5. Finish: Factory applied primer, for field paint.6. Color: As indicated on drawings.7. Manufacturer: Same as siding.

C. Factory Finish: prime coat.2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim: Same material and texture as siding.1. 3/4" thick, typical; 1" at fascias.

B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4inch (32 mm).

C. Sealant: Elastomeric, polyurethane or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane, and capable ofbeing painted.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would bedetrimental to proper installation.

B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.2. Use trim details indicated on drawings.3. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.4. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.

B. Over Wood Studs without Sheathing: Install siding over weather-resistive barrier, fastened intostuds.

C. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding; where joints are inevitable stagger jointsbetween successive courses.

D. Do not install siding less than 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch(25 mm) to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.

E. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges.

F. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 9000.3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


07 6200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING ANDTRIM

SECTION 07 6200SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts.B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 4113 - Metal Roofing Panels: Roofing system.B. Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: Metal flashings at terminations & openings.C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.D. Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings: painting of metal flashings.


Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007

(Reapproved 2012).D. CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook; current edition.E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,

flashings, terminations, and installation details.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements andstandard details, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with five (5) years ofdocumented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope

metal sheets to ensure drainage.B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage (0.0239inch) (0.61 mm) thick base metal.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.D. Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non-curing butyl sealant.E. Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, 100 percent

silicone with minimum movement capability of plus/minus 25 percent and recommended bymanufacturer for substrates to be sealed; clear.


07 6200 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING ANDTRIM

F. Sealant: Type ____ specified in Section 07 9005.G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity,

seal with sealant.F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing gravel. Return and

brake edges.2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION

A. Gutters: ____ Rectangular profile.B. Downspouts: Round profile.C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.

D. Seal metal joints.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, regletsin place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only wherepermitted.

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with

specified requirements.END OF SECTION


07 9005 - 1 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07 9005JOINT SEALERS


A. Sealants and joint backing.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Sealants required in conjunction with metal fabricateditems.

B. Section 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels: Sealants required in conjuction with metal roofing panels.C. Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: Sealants required in conjuction withD. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Sealants at door frames and thresholds.E. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.F. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.G. Section 11 4001 - Custom Foodservice Equipment: Sealants at custom stainless steel counters.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.D. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants; 2014.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and afterinstallation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01730 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:1. Adhesives Technology Corporation: www.atc.ws.2. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.



3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.4. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com.5. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.6. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.7. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.8. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers:1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com.2. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.sandellmfg.com.3. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com.4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SEALANTSA. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC)

content as specified in Section 01 6116.B. Type A - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25

minimum; Uses M, G, and A; single component.1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.3. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.b. Joints between concrete and other materials.c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

4. Polyurethane Products:a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant:

www.pecora.com.b. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant:

www.pecora.com.c. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II General Purpose Two Part Polyurethane Sealant:

www.pecora.com.d. The QUIKRETE Companies; QUIKRETE® Polyurethane Non-Sag Sealant:

www.quikrete.com.e. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

5. Polysulfide Products:a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.c. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Seal Gun Grade: www.wrmeadows.com.d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Seal One Step: www.wrmeadows.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Type B - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning,noncuring.

D. Type C - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP,Grade NF single component, paintable.

E. Type D - Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311; single component, solvent release, non-skinning,non-sagging.

F. Type E - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 minimum; Uses NT, A, G, M, O;single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.



3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C).4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.5. Products:

a. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (GE Silicones products):www.momentive.com.

b. Pecora Corporation; 890FTS Field Tintable Ultra Low Modulus Architectural SiliconeSealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com.

c. Pecora Corporation; 890FTS-TXTR Field Tintable Textured Ultra Low ModulusArchitectural Silicone Sealant - Class 100: www.pecora.com.

d. Pecora Corporation; 864NST Low Modulus Architectural Silicone Sealant - Class 50:www.pecora.com.

e. Pecora Corporation; 895NST Medium Modulus Structural Glazing & WeatherproofingSilicone Sealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com.

f. Pecora Corporation; PCS Pecora Contractor Silicone: www.pecora.com.g. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;

oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.F. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect sealants until cured.



3.06 SCHEDULEA. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type A .B. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work:

Type A.C. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type B.D. Butt Joints in Exterior Metal Work and Siding: Type A.E. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type A.F. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type E.G. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type ____; .H. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls:

Type C.END OF SECTION


08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS ANDFRAMES

SECTION 08 1113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.B. Accessories, including louvers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.B. Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings: Field painting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel

Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.B. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.C. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.E. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014.F. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; 2007.G. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;

2006.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and onecopy of referenced standards/guidelines.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and anyindicated finish requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced

document that prescribes installation requirements.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specifiedrequirements.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion andadverse effects on factory applied painted finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Republic Doors; ____: www.republicdoor.com.2. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand; ____: www.allegion.com/sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.



2.02 DESIGN CRITERIAA. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Exterior Doors:

1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).a. Level 1 - Standard-duty.b. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.c. Model 1 - Full Flush.d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm), minimum.

2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm), nominal.3. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges.4. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance

with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.5. Door Face Sheets: Flush.6. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 7100.7. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMESA. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in

accordance with applicable door frame requirements.B. General:

1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.a. ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100), Level 1 Door Frames: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm),

minimum thickness.2. Finish: Same as for door.

C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.1. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components;

factory-installed.1. Style: Sightproof.

B. Mechanical Fasteners for Concealed Metal-to-Metal Connections: Self-drilling, self-tapping,steel with electroplated zinc finish.

C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on centermullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.2.06 FINISHES

A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.



3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior

to installation.B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related

requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.C. Coordinate installation of hardware.D. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

3.06 SCHEDULEA. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.

END OF SECTION


08 3100 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

SECTION 08 3100ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


A. Ceiling access door and frame units.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: framing of openings.B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: finish to frame.C. Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings: Field painting of access door unit.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.B. ASTM A513/A513M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy

Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2015.C. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

D. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for requirements.B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of

adjoining work.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES

A. Ceiling-Mounted Units:1. Location: As indicated on drawings.2. Material: Steel.3. Size: 22 inch by 36 inch (___ mm by ___ mm).4. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle.

2.02 CEILING-MOUNTED UNITSA. Manufacturers:

1. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/sle.2. Karp Associates, Inc; ____: www.karpinc.com.3. Milcor, Inc; ____: www.milcorinc.com.4. Approved equal.5. Substitutions: In accordance with provisions of Division 1.


08 3100 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

B. Ceiling-Mounted Units: Factory fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units with cornerjoints welded, filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirementswith type of installation assembly being used for each unit.1. Material: Steel.2. Style: Exposed frame with door surface flush with frame surface.3. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.4. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm), minimum thickness.5. Single Steel Sheet Door Panels: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), minimum thickness.6. Steel Finish: Primed.7. Hardware:

a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.b. Latch/Lock: Tamperproof tool-operated cam latch.


A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.B. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of

another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary.

END OF SECTION


08 3313 - 1 COILING COUNTER DOORS

SECTION 08 3313COILING COUNTER DOORS


A. Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Rough opening; mounting of track and housing.B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys.C. Section 11 4001 - Custom Foodservice Equipment: Rough opening.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.E. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of

construction and finish. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware

locations, and installation details.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and installation, adjustment, and

alignment procedures.E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and

frequency, and periodic adjustments required.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Coiling Counter Doors:1. Cookson: www.cooksondoor.com2. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc: www.alpinedoors.com.3. C.H.I. Overhead Doors: www.chiohd.com/sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORSA. Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: Galvanized steel slat curtain, 22 gauge.

1. Mounting: Between jambs, within prepared opening.2. Nominal Slat Size: 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) wide.3. Slat Profile: Flat.4. Finish: Factory powder coated.5. Color: As shown on drawings.6. Guides: Formed track; aluminum, factory powder coated to match slats.7. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.8. Bottom Bar: 12 gauge bent steel reinforcing, full width of shutter; polyester powder coating;

color to match slats.


08 3313 - 2 COILING COUNTER DOORS

9. Manual push up operation, with accessory pull down pole.10. Locking Devices: Thumb turn cylinder lock.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats.

1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and toprevent lateral movement.

2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closedposition.

3. Steel Slats: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, with minimum G90/Z275 coating;minimum thickness 22 gage, 0.03 inch (0.76 mm).

B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets ofsame metal. 1. Aluminum Guides: Extruded aluminum channel, with polypropylene pile lining along

inside.C. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.D. Lock Hardware:

1. Latching Mechanism: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch barfeature to keep in locked or retracted position.

2. Latch Handle: Manufacturer's standard.E. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing

torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holdingposition at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force tooperate.


A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only.D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

END OF SECTION


08 3323 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

SECTION 08 3323OVERHEAD COILING DOORS


A. Overhead coiling doors, operating hardware, non-fire-rated and exterior, manual operation.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Supporting structure.B. Section 08 3326 - Overhead Coiling Grilles.C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide general construction and component connections and details.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and

installation details.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Overhead Coiling Doors:1. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.2. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: In conformance with Division 1 requirements.

2.02 COILING DOORSA. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain.

1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), withoutundue deflection or damage to components.

2. Single thickness slats.3. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches (50 mm) wide x required length.4. Finish: Factory painted, color as selected.5. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.6. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.7. Mounting: Surface mounted.8. Locking Devices: Chain lock keeper on inside.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.

1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and toprevent lateral movement.

2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closedposition.

3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom ofcurtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.


08 3323 - 2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

B. Steel Slats: Minimum thickness, 22 gage, 2 inch (___ mm); ASTM A653/A653M galvanizedsteel sheet.

C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, mounting brackets of samemetal.

D. Steel Guides: ASTM A36/A36M steel angles, size as required for wind loading, hot-dipgalvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.

E. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.1. Minimum thickness; 24 gage, ___ inch (___ mm).2. Prime paint.

F. Lock Hardware:1. Latching Mechanism: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar

feature to keep in locked or retracted position.2. Latch Handle: Manufacturer's standard.3. Manual Chain Lift: Provide padlockable chain keeper on guide.

G. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producingtorque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holdingposition at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force tooperate.


A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only.D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3.2 mm per 3 m) straight edge.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean installed components.B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION


08 5659 - 1 SERVICE WINDOW UNITS

SECTION 08 5659SERVICE WINDOW UNITS


A. Self-closing service window units at concession.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Anchorage at jambs.B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.C. Section 08 3313 - Coiling Counter Doors: Anchorage at head.D. Section 11 4001 - Custom Foodservice Equipment: Support and anchorage at sill.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.D. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate work with adjacent materials specified in other sections and as indicated ondrawings and approved shop drawings.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for specified products indicating materials,

operation, glazing, finishes, and installation instructions.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, sizes, rough-in, mounting, anchors and fasteners, and

installation clearances.D. Manufacturer Qualification Statement.E. Installer Qualification Statement.F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

University's name and registered with manufacturer.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection with at least ten years documented experience, and with ability to provide test reportsshowing that their standard manufactured products meet the specified requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withat least three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver units in manufacturer's original packaging and unopened containers with identification

labels intact.B. Store units in area protected from exposure to weather and vandalism.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01700 - Project Closeout, for requirements.B. Provide manufacturer's warranty agreeing to repair or replace units and their components that

fail in materials or workmanship within two years from Date of Substantial Completion.


08 5659 - 2 SERVICE WINDOW UNITS

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SERVICE WINDOW UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Nissen Company; E Window: www.nissenco.com.2. Approved equal.3. Substitutions: In accordance with provisions of Division 1.

B. Location: Built within exterior wall, as indicated on drawings.C. Operation: Sliding screened pass openings; no track at sill in pass through location; manual

open, and self-closing operation; configuration as indicated.D. Finish, clear anodized aluminum.E. Screening material, 16x16, fiberglass, gray.


A. Verify that window openings are ready for installation of windows.B. Notify Architect if conditions are not suitable for installation of units; do not proceed until

conditions are satisfactory.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install units in correct orientation (inside/outside or secure/non-secure).C. Anchor units securely in manner so as to achieve performance specified.D. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant.E. Remove and replace defective work.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating components for smooth operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.B. Clean exposed surfaces promptly after installation without damaging finishes.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Provide temporary protection to ensure that service and teller windows are without damage

upon Date of Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION


08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 7100DOOR HARDWARE


A. Hardware for steel doors.B. Thresholds.C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURESA. See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for allowances affecting this section.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.D. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).E. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).F. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers

Association; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).G. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).H. BHMA A156.5 - Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers

Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.5).I. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).J. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders

Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.7).K. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).L. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).M. BHMA A156.12 - American National Standard for Interconnected Locks; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.12).N. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000;

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13).O. BHMA A156.14 - American National Standard for Sliding & Folding Door Hardware; Builders

Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.14).P. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder,

Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011(ANSI/BHMA A156.15).



Q. BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; Builders HardwareManufacturers Association; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.16).

R. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; BuildersHardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI/BHMA A156.17).

S. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders HardwareManufacturers Association, Inc.; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).

T. BHMA A156.20 - American National Standard for Strap and Tee Hinges, and Hasps; BuildersHardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.20).

U. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware ManufacturersAssociation; 2009 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).

V. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).

W. BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; Builders HardwareManufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.23).

X. BHMA A156.24 - American National Standard for Delayed Egress Locking Systems; BuildersHardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.24).

Y. BHMA A156.31 - Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.31).Z. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.AA. BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006.AB. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.AC. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;

Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.AD. IT’S (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.AE. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.AF. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.AG. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware

will be installed.B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products

requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.D. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work

of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.E. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly

show products to be furnished for this project.C. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use

door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operateditems and include power requirements. Provide in vertical format; horizontal format is notacceptable.

D. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner.



E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditionsrequiring special attention, and proper sequence.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, andconduit.

G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, andinspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.1. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation and removal instructions.2. Bitting List: List of key and cylinder combinations as furnished.

H. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND TOOLS: FURNISH THE FOLLOWING FOR OWNER'S USE

IN MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT.A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for use

by Architect and Contractor.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum five years of documented experience.C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware

with minimum five years of documented experience.D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: employ a certified AHC, or DAHC regular member, in good

standing with the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) to assist in the work of this section.1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code tomatch hardware schedule.

1.10 WARRANTYA. See Section 01700 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide the following manufacturer’s published warrantees:C. For butt hinges: Life of buildingD. For lock and latch sets: Ten (10) yearsE. For door closers: Twenty-five (25) yearsF. For exit devices: Ten (10) yearsG. For balance of hardware: Two (2) years

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED IN HARDWARE GROUPS

A. Butt Hinges: PBB, Inc.B. Locksets: SchlageC. Lock Trim SchlageD. Exit Devices: Dorma Architectural HardwareE. Door Closers: Dorma Architectural HardwareF. Floor Closers and Pivots: Dorma Architectural HardwareG. Door Trim: TrimcoH. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: Not Applicable



I. Thresholds and Seals: PemkoJ. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. NOTE: Substitution by submittal is

forbidden and submittals showing substitutions without following provisions of Section 01 6000will be rejected without review.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGNA. Products and manufacturers as specified in Hardware Groups below.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERALA. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with

applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design.3. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities.4. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.5. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.6. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.7. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Provide hardware that enables door

assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code.8. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.D. Function: Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in

hardware schedule.E. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer

hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardwareand control components and to building power connection.

F. Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated.1. Primary Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze on bronze, 613 (approx US10B). .2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx

US26D), or satin stainless steel 630 (approx US32D) as specified in Hardware Groups.3. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or

stainless steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on oneside of door and secondary finish on other side if necessary.

4. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18.5. Exceptions:

a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearanceequivalent according to BHMA A156.18.

b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal.c. Door Closer Covers and Arms: Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's

standard colors.d. Aluminum Surface Trim and Gasket Housings: Anodized to match door, not to match

other hardware.e. Hardware for Aluminum Storefront Doors: Finished to match door.

G. Fasteners:1. Mineral Core Wood Doors: Sex bolts.2. Concrete and Masonry Substrates: Stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion

shields.



2.04 HINGESA. Hinges:B. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.

1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.5. Provide non-removable pins on outswinging interior doors with locksets.6. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

C. Butt Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1 and A156.7; standard weight, unless otherwiseindicated.1. Provide hinge width required to clear surrounding trim.

D. Quantity of Hinges Per Door:1. Doors up to 60 inches (1.5 m) High: Two hinges.2. Doors From 60 inches (1.5 m) High up to 90 inches (2.3 m) High: Three hinges.3. Doors 90 inches (2.3 m) High up to 120 inches (3 m) High: Four hinges.4. Doors over 120 inches (3 m) High: One additional hinge per each additional 30 inches

(762 mm) in height.5. Dutch Doors: Two hinges each leaf.

E. Width of Hinges:F. Calculate the width of the hinge in the full open position with the formula: two times the door

thickness minus the hinge backset, plus the clearance required to swing the door one-hundredeighty degrees, plus the inset equals the required hinge width. Should the resulting size benon-standard, select the next larger standard size.

G. Manufacturers - Hinges:1. PBB, Inc.: www.pbbinc.com.2. Bommer Industries, Inc: www.bommer.com.3. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com.4. Stanley Black & Decker: www.stanleyblackanddecker.com.5. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 PIVOTSA. Manufacturers - Pivots:

1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com/usa.2. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.06 PUSH/PULLSA. Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6.

1. Provide push and pull on doors not specified to have lockset, latchset, exit device, orauxiliary lock.

2. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces.3. On glazed storefront doors, provide matching push/pull bars on both faces unless exit

devices are specified.B. Manufacturers - Push/Pulls:

1. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc): www.trimcobbw.com.2. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com <http://www.hiawathainc.com>.3. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.07 LOCKS AND LATCHESA. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.



1. Hardware Groups indicate locking functions required for each door.2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim.4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no locking or no outside trim.5. In door sections, where a lock cylinder referenced to Section 08 7100 is specified, furnish

and install a proper lock cylinder keyed to the building keying system.B. Electrically Operated Locks: Fail secure unless otherwise indicated.

1. Lock Cylinders: Campus standard Medeco security cylinders. SUBSTITUTION NOTPERMITED. For specifics contact Campus Locksmith:

2. John Van Adrighem, Locksmith Supervisora. California State University, Sacramentob. Facilities Servicesc. 6000 J Streetd. Sacramento, CA 95819-6002e. (916) 278-2922 (Voice)f. (916) 278-4374 (Fax)g. [email protected] <mailto:[email protected]>

C. Keying: Grand master keyed.1. Include construction keying.2. Key to existing keying system if owner requires.3. Supply keys in the following quantities:

a. 3 - master keys.b. 3 - grand master keys.c. 3 - great grand master keys.d. 12 - construction keys.e. 3 - construction control keys.f. 3 - permanent control keys and __10___ extra cylinder cores.g. 2 - change keys for each lock.h. When providing keying information, comply with DHI Handbook "Keying systems and

nomenclature".D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated

"push/pull" or "not required to latch".1. Roller Latches: Trimco2. Hospital Latchset: Trimco; Passage latchset function with paddle-style trim.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.08 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETSA. Cylindrical Locksets:B. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows:

1. Passage: F75 No locking, always free entry and exit.2. Privacy: F76, emergency tool unlocks.3. Office: F82 Grade 1, key not required to lock, unlocks upon exit.4. Office: F81, key not required to lock, remains locked upon exit.5. Classroom: F84, key required to lock.6. Intruder Classroom: F110, keyed both sides.7. Communicating: F80 or F113.8. Hotel: F93.9. Always-Locked: F86, key required to lock, may not be left unlocked.10. Two-Key Entry: F88, outside locked by key from both sides, free egress11. Store Door: F91, locked by key from both sides, not an emergency exit (must be unlocked

during occupied hours).



12. Exit Only: F89, may not be left unlocked.C. Manufacturers - Cylindrical Locksets:

1. FSB North America2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.3. Alternates shown must meet warranty requirements above.

2.09 MORTISE LOCKSETS LESS TRIMA. Mortise Locksets:B. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.13, and as follows:

1. Passage: F01.2. Privacy: F19, or F02 with retraction of deadbolt by use of inside lever/knob.3. Office: F04, key not required to lock, remains locked upon exit.4. Classroom: F05, key required to lock.5. Communicating: F03, deadbolts operated independently from each side, not an exit.6. Entry, Deadbolt: F20, may be locked without key, free egress.7. Hotel: F15, when locked from inside only emergency key may unlock.8. Always-Locked: F07, may not be left unlocked.9. Two-Key Entry: F09, outside locked by key from both sides, free egress.10. Store Door: F14, deadbolt locked by key from both sides, not an emergency exit (must be

unlocked during occupied hours).11. Exit Only: F07 or F31, may have outside trim, may not be left unlocked.

C. Manufacturers - Mortise Locksets:1. Dorma Architectural Hardware: www.dorma-usa.com.2. FSB North America3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.4. Alternates shown must meet warranty requirements above.

2.10 INTERCONNECTED LOCKSETS – NOT APPLICABLE2.11 NARROW STILE LOCKS

A. Manufacturers – Narrow Stile Locks:1. Adams Rite2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.12 AUXILIARY LOCKS – NOT APPLICABLEA. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.5, and as follows:

1. Deadbolt, Classroom: E017.2. Public Entry/Exit ("nightlatch"): E023, D0123. Deadbolt, Unoccupied: E015 or F17, deadbolt by key outside and turn inside.4. Deadbolt, Classroom, Unoccupied: E010 or F18, deadbolt by key outside.

B. Manufacturers - Auxiliary Locks: Same as other locks.2.13 FLUSHBOLTS

A. Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top offrame.1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply

with code.2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds.

B. Manual Flushbolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over-size doors.C. Self-Latching Flushbolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; manually retracted.D. Automatic Flushbolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; automatic retraction of bolts

when active leaf is opened.E. Coordinators: Provide on doors having closers and self-latching or automatic flushbolts to

ensure that leaves close in proper order.



F. Manufacturers - Flushbolts:1. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc): www.trimcobbw.com.2. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com <http://www.hiawathainc.com>.3. Door Controls International4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.14 MAGNETIC LOCKSA. Manufacturers:

1. Dorma Architectural Hardware: www.dorma-usa.com.2. Security Door Controls: www.sdcsecurity.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.15 ELECTRIC STRIKESA. Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.31 and UL listed as a Burglary-Resistant Electric

Door Strike; style to suit locks.B. Manufacturers:

1. Dorma Architectural Hardware: www.dorma-usa.com.2. Security Door Controls: www.sdcsecurity.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.16 EXIT DEVICESA. Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3, and as follows:

1. Entry/Exit, Always-Unlocked: Outside lever unlocked, no outside key access, no latchholdback.

2. Entry/Exit, Free Swing: Key outside retracts latch, latch holdback (dogging) for free swingduring occupied hours, not fire-rated; outside trim must be specified as lever or pull.

3. Entry/Exit, Always-Latched: Key outside locks and unlocks lever, no latch holdback(dogging).

4. Entry/Exit, Always-Locked: Key outside retracts latchbolt but does not unlock lever, nolatch holdback.

5. Exit Only, Secure: No outside trim, no key entry, no latch holdback, deadlocking latchbolt.B. Manufacturers:

1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com.2. Detex Corporation; ADVANTEX Series: www.detex.com3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.4. Alternates shown must meet warranty requirements above.

2.17 CLOSERSA. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.

1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not an

acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated.4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to

ensure the leaves close in proper order.5. At corridors, locate door-mounted closer on room side of door.6. At outswinging exterior doors, mount closer on inside of door.

B. Manufacturers - Closers:1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com.2. LCN: www.lcnclosers.com <http://www.lcnclosers.com>.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.4. Alternates shown must meet warranty requirements above.



2.18 STOPS AND HOLDERSA. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise

indicated.1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated.2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide floor or

overhead stop. Overhead stops shall not prevent safe and full opening of door.3. Floor stops must be located within 4” of wall.4. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature

of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated.B. Wall Stops: TrimcoC. Floor Stops: TrimcoD. Overhead Holders/Stops: Dorma Architectural HardwareE. Magnetic Holder/Releases: Complying with BHMA A156.15; fail safe; doors release to close

automatically when electrical current is interrupted; holding force: 25 to 40 pounds-force (111 to177 N).

F. Manufacturers - Overhead Holders/Stops:1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com.2. Glynn-Johnson: www.glynn-johnson.com.3. Architectural Hardware Manufacturing. Inc.: www.abhmfg.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Manufacturers - Wall and Floor Stops/Holders:1. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc): www.trimcobbw.com.2. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Manufacturers - Magnetic Holder/Releases:1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com.2. Edwards Electric: www.edwards-signals.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.19 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDSA. Gasketing and Thresholds:B. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22.

1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile ofpairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets oneach door identified as a "smoke door" and 20-minute rated fire doors.

2. On wood doors with fire rating more than 20-minutes, provide frame-applied intumescentgaskets.

3. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top,sides, and meeting stiles of pairs.a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets

functioning as both smoke and weather seals.b. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated.c. On doors indicated as "sound-rated", "acoustical", or with an STC rating, provide

sound-rated gaskets and automatic door bottom; make gaskets completelycontinuous, do not cut or notch gaskets for installation.

d. On doors indicated as "lightproof", provide gaskets similar to smoke gaskets.C. Thresholds:

1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated.2. Field cut threshold to frame for tight fit.

D. Fasteners At Exterior Locations: Non-corroding.E. Manufacturers - Gasketing and Thresholds:



1. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com.2. Zero International, Inc: www.zerointernational.com.3. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.20 SLIDING AND BIFOLDING DOOR HARDWAREA. Sliding Door Hardware:B. Bifolding Door Hardware:C. Bypassing Door Hardware:D. Bifolding Door Hardware: Track, hanger fasteners, guides, and pulls; size track and hangers

according to manufacturer's recommendations for weight of doors.1. Provide one pull for each pair of panels hinged together.

E. Bypassing Door Hardware: Track, hanger fasteners, guides, and pulls; size track and hangersaccording to manufacturer's recommendations for weight of doors.1. Provide flush cup pull on each sliding panel.

F. Pocket Doors: Provide pocket door kit, including header assembly, split studs, hangers, doorhanger plates, bumper, guides, floor plate, and end bracket.1. Provide flush cup pull on both sides unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide edge pull in leading edge unless otherwise indicated.

G. Manufacturers - Sliding and Bifolding Hardware:1. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com.2. Hettich America, LP; Grant Folding and Sliding Door Hardware: www.hettichamerica.com.3. Johnson Hardware: www.johnsonhardware.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.21 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIMA. Protection Plates:

1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all-glassdoors.

2. Mop Plates:3. Armor Plates:

B. Manufacturers - Protection Plates and Architectural Trim:1. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc): www.trimcobbw.com.2. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.22 DOOR OPERATORSA. Door Operators: Provide as specified with the features and qualities described in the

manufacturer’s literature and in full compliance with all codes and regulations.B. Manufacturers - Protection Plates and Architectural Trim:

1. Dorma Automatics www.dorma-usa.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.23 KEY CONTROLSA. Key Management System: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of consecutively

numbered duplicate key tags with hanging hole and snap catch.1. Security Key Tags: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of matching key tags

for permanent attachment to one original key of each set.2. Provide key collection envelopes, receipt cards, and index cards in quantity suitable to

number of keys to be managed.B. Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with combination

lock.1. Mounting: Wall-mounted.



2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 50 percent additional capacity.3. Horizontal metal hook strips with replaceable labels covered with clear plastic.4. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each.5. Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer's standard color.6. Manufacturers:

a. MMF (Metal Manufacturing, Inc.): /www.mmfind.com.b. Lund Key Control: www.lundkeycab.net.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Fire Department Lock Box: Heavy-duty, surface mounted, solid stainless-steel box with hingeddoor and interior gasket seal; single drill resistant lock with dust covers and tamper alarm.1. Capacity: Holds 10 keys.2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark bronze.3. Products:

a. Knox Company; Knox-Box Rapid Entry System, Model _______: www.knoxbox.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames arepresent and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correctcharacteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes applied to substrate are complete.D. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in

Schedule, unless otherwise noted:1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08 1113.3. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware

for Wood Flush Doors."4. Wood doors: See Section 08 1416.5. Coordinate with door frame manufacturer’s locations and DHI "Recommended Locations

for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 4000.B. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is fully accredited and in good

standing with the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) to inspect installation and certify thathardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and as specified.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000.B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.C. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal.



3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per

manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannotbe cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.

1. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.3.07 SCHEDULE - HARDWARE GROUPS

A. Refer to drawingsEND OF SECTION


08 9100 - 1 LOUVERS

SECTION 08 9100LOUVERS


A. Louvers, frames, and accessories.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supplementary framing for wall opening.B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealing frames to weather barrier installed on adjacent

construction.C. Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: Siding terminations and trim at opening.D. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.E. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.F. Division 23 - HVAC: Exhaust fan ductwork connection to louver.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.B. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010.C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for requirements.B. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.C. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air

velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.D. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,

tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required,and frames.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at

least three years of documented experience.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of

connections.1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish.


A. Louvers:1. Airolite Company, LLC; _____: www.airolite.com.2. Construction Specialties, Inc; _____: www.c-sgroup.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: In conformance with provisions of Division 1.


08 9100 - 2 LOUVERS

2.02 LOUVERSA. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;

AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511.1. See Mechanical drawings for sizes.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Formed Aluminum: Formed sheet, ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), ____ alloy, ____ temper.

2.04 FINISHESA. High Performance Organic Coatings: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured

fluoropolymer system.2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screwattached; installed on inside face of louver frame.

B. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh.C. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel.D. Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07 6200.E. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.


A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive this work and openingdimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Coordinate with installation of flashings by others.C. Install louvers level and plumb.D. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to

exterior.E. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.F. Coordinate with installation of mechanical ductwork.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Strip protective finish coverings.B. Clean surfaces and components.

END OF SECTION


09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 2116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Metal stud wall framing.B. Cementitious backing board.C. Gypsum wallboard; including moisture resistant wallboard.D. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing.B. Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: trim at top of walls.C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing gaps in construction other than gypsum board or

plaster work.D. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile backing board.E. Section 09 7733 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels: Substrate for panels.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

H. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

I. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant GypsumBacking Panel; 2013.

J. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement InteriorSubstrate Sheets; 2014.

K. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.L. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board and accessories.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and

finishing, with minimum __ years of experience, with minimum 5 years of documentedexperience.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.3. Phillips Manufacturing Company; _____: www.phillipsmfg.com.4. Approved equal5. Substitutions: conforming to the requirements of Division 1..

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf (L/120 at 240 Pa).1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm).5. Resilient Furring Channels: as noted inch (____ mm) depth, for attachment to substrate

through one leg only.a. Products:

1) Same manufacturer as other framing materials.2.02 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:1. CertainTeed Corporation; ____: www.certainteed.com.2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ____: www.gpgypsum.com.3. Lafarge North America Inc: www.lafargenorthamerica.com.4. National Gypsum Company; ____: www.nationalgypsum.com.5. PABCO Gypsum; ____: www.pabcogypsum.com.6. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC: www.temple.com.7. USG Corporation; ____: www.usg.com.8. Substitutions: in conformance with the provisions of Division 1..

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm).b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch (16 mm).

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including restrooms.2. ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying with

ASTM C1288.a. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

D. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTMC1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: vertical surfaces behind fiberglass reinforced panels..2. Edges: Tapered.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.B. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless

noted otherwise.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1288



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1396/C1396M










C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer forproject conditions.

D. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm) in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center (at 406 mm on center).

1. Extend partition framing as indicated..3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends andedges occurring over firm bearing.1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.

C. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over wood framing members where indicated, inaccordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

D. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board except face layer ofnon-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination.

E. Installation on Wood Framing: 1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.05 JOINT TREATMENTA. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint

tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready toreceive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

D. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended bymanufacturer.

3.06 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

(3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.END OF SECTION














































09 3000 - 1 TILING

SECTION 09 3000TILING


A. Tile base, thin set application.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place ConcreteB. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit MasonryC. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2013.1.B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.C. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a

Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

D. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

E. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withOrganic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

F. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withDry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

G. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

H. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

I. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withModified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

J. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

K. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious BackerUnits; 2010 (Revised).

L. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (ExteriorGlue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed2010).

N. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012(Revised).

O. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1.P. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity,

and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products, Ceramic Tiles, and Glass Tiles;2014a.

Q. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015.


09 3000 - 2 TILING

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com.2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: In conformance to provisions of Division 1.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Glazed Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.1. Moisture Absorption: 7.0 to 20.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Edges: Cushioned.3. Surface Finish: High gloss.4. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.5. Trim Units: Self-cove base, slim foot shape in nominal 4" height..6. Products:

a. Dal-Tile S3419T.b. Approved equal.

2.02 SETTING MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:

1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com.2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.4. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com.5. Approved equal.6. Substitutions: Conforming to provisions of Division 1.

B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.2.03 GROUTS

A. Manufacturers:1. ARDEX Engineered Cements; _____: www.ardexamericas.com.2. Bostik Inc; ____: www.bostik-us.com.3. Custom Building Products; _____: www.custombuildingproducts.com.4. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com.5. Approved equal.6. Substitutions: Conforming to provisions of Division 1.

2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALSA. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew

resistant type.1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.

B. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cementgrout.1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.


09 3000 - 3 TILING


A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI

A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.B. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. C. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.D. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.E. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.F. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.G. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.H. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.I. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either

bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136
















09 7733 - 1 GLASS FIBER REINFORCEDPLASTIC PANELS

SECTION 09 7733GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS


A. Glass fiber reinforced plastic panels.B. Trim.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for panels.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of

Barcol Impressor; 2013a.B. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.C. ASTM D5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling

Panels; 2012.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.E. FDA Food Code - Chapter 6 - Physical Facilities; current edition with Supplements, if any.F. FM 4880 - Class 1 Fire Rating of Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Panels, Interior Finish

Materials or Coatings and Exterior Wall Systems; 2010.G. ISO 2812-1 - Paints and Varnishes - Determination of resistance to liquids - Part 1: Immersion

in liquids; 2007.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store panels flat, indoors, on a clean, dry surface. Remove packaging and allow panels toacclimate to room temperature for 48 hours prior to installation.


A. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels:1. Marlite: www.marlite.com.2. Nudo: www.nudo.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: In accordance with the provisions of Division 1.

2.02 PANEL SYSTEMSA. Wall Panels:

1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet (1.2 by 2.4 m).2. Panel Thickness: 0.10 inch (2.5 mm).3. Surface Design: Smooth.4. Color: As selected by the University..5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, sealant joints, no trim.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Panels: Glass fiber reinforced plastic (FRP), complying with ASTM D5319.


09 7733 - 2 GLASS FIBER REINFORCEDPLASTIC PANELS

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Class 1 fire rated when tested in accordance with FM 4880.3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.4. Scratch Resistance: Barcol hardness score greater than 35, when tested in accordance

with ASTM D2583.5. Surface Characteristics and Cleanability: Provide products that are smooth, durable, and

easily cleanable, in compliance with FDA Food Code, Chapter 6 - Physical Facilities.6. Chemical Cleanability: Excellent chemical resistance to common cleaners and detergents

when tested in accordance with ISO 2812-1.B. Trim: Vinyl; color coordinating with panel.C. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer.D. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white.


A. Verify existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work.B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION - WALLSA. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades, drill bits, or snips.C. Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel as recommended by adhesive

manufacturer.D. Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.E. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.F. Place trim on panel before fastening edges, as required.G. Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel.H. Install trim with adhesive and screws or nails, as required.I. Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with applicable sealant to prevent moisture

intrusion.J. Remove excess sealant after paneling is installed and prior to curing.

END OF SECTION


09 9000 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING

SECTION 09 9000PAINTING AND COATING

1.01 SECTION INCLUDESA. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop priming ferrous metal.B. Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: factory priming of siding and trims.C. Section 08 1113 - Steel Doors and Frames: Factory priming steel doors and frames.D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Surface preparation of gypsum board.

1.03 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint,

Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning Procedures.C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP10 - Near White Blast Cleaning Procedure.

1.04 DEFINITIONSA. General: Standard coating terms defined within Masters Painters Institute (MPI) manual.

1. Gloss level 1 - Flat with a gloss range below 5 when measured at a 60-degree meter and10 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Gloss level 2 - Low Sheen with a gloss range of 5 to 10 when measured at a 60 degreemeter and 10 to 35 when measured at an 85 degree meter.

3. Gloss level 3 - Eggshell with a gloss range between 10 and 15 when measured at a60-degree meter and 10 to 35 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

4. Gloss level 4 - Satin with a gloss range between 25 to 35 when measured with a 60degree meter.

5. Gloss level 5 - Semi-Gloss with a gloss range between 50 and 55 when measured at a 60degree meter.

6. Gloss level 6 - Gloss with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60 degreemeter.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material andcross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material bymanufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis

and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches

(150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar inmaterial, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted inapplications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as thefinish coats.



C. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item orsurface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated,University will select from standard colors and finishes available.

D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,and labels.

E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and applicationworkmanship. Mock-ups required for:1. Concrete masonry block filler.2. Concrete masonry finish coats.3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by

Architect.4. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers

bearing manufacturer's name and label:B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum

ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

D. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding airare between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C), unless manufacturers instructions specificallystate's.

E. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surroundingair are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).

F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; orat temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are

enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during applicationand drying periods.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the

quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify withlabels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to University.

B. Quantity: Furnish University with an additional three percent, but not less than 1 gal (3.8 l) or 1case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Kelly-Moore Paints2. Dunn Edwards3. Sherwin Williams4. Approved equal.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1.2.02 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that arecompatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service andapplication, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



B. VOC Classification: Provide materials, including primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials,that meet local air quality management district regulations.

C. Application Rate: Coating thickness for primer, intermediate, barrier and finish coats shall bemeasured as Dry Film Thickness (DFT) and comply with manufacturer's publishedrecommendations.

D. In all cases, apply one (1) coat primer (unless factory primed) and two (2) coats finish.1. At interior concrete masonry surfaces, one (1) coat block filler, or as necessary to

eliminate all pinhole openings; two (2) coats finish.2.03 EXTERIOR METAL

A. Ferrous Metal.1. Primer:

a. 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish; touch up factory primed surfaces.2. Finish:

a. 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.B. Galvanized Metal, Aluminum and Copper:

1. Primer:a. 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish.

2. Finish:a. 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

2.04 FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM, EXTERIORA. Lap siding, fascias, trim:

1. Primer:a. 295 Kel-Bond Universal Primer at unprimed edges of factory finished items.

2. Finish:a. 1245 ACRY-SHIELD 100 percent Acrylic Exterior Low Sheen Finish.

2.05 INTERIOR MASONRY:A. Concrete Block

1. Block Fillera. Devoe Tru-Glaze-WB 4015 Waterborne Epoxy Block Filler, white.

2. Finish:a. Devoe Tru-Glaze-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy, semi-gloss, color as selected.

2.06 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARDA. Smooth Wall Finishes:

1. Primer:a. 971 ACRY-PLEX Interior PVA Primer/Sealer.

2. Finish:a. 1010 KM PROFESSIONAL Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel.

2.07 FIBER CEMENT TRIM, INTERIORA. Wood Trim, Doors, Wainsc, Stairs (Painted Finish):

1. Primer:a. 295 Kel-Bond Universal Primer.

2. Finish:a. 1685 DURA-POXY + 100 percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

2.08 INTERIOR CEILINGSA. Gypsum Board:

1. Primer:a. 295 Kel-Bond Universal Primer.

2. Finish:a. 485 EZY - COAT Interior Acrylic Flat.



2.09 INTERIOR METALA. Ferrous Metal:

1. Primer:a. 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish.

2. Finish:a. 1685 DURA-POXY + 100 percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

B. Galvanized Metal and Aluminum:1. Primer:

a. 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish2. Finish:

a. 1685 DURA-POXY + 100 percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.C. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information oncharacteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over

substrates primed by others.2. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from

the primer Applicator before proceeding:a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions.b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting

fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impracticalor impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection beforesurface preparation and painting.1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using

workers skilled in the trades involved.B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances

that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process

will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's

written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime substrate.3. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete, brick, concrete masonry block, and cement

plaster surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, andrelease agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have beenused to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces.a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer.b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.

If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correctthis condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceedsthat permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that havenot been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign



substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPCrecommendations.a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire

brush, solvent clean, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.5. Nonferrous-Metal Substrates: Clean nonferrous and galvanized surfaces according to

manufacturer's written instructions for the type of service, metal substrate, and applicationrequired.a. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by

mechanical methods.D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's

written instructions.1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of

foreign materials and residue.2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required

during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, ifnecessary, strain coating material before using.

3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommendedlimits.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.B. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to

manufacturer's written instructions.1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application

method.2. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,

refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. University reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often asUniversity deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:1. University will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, andcertified in the presence of Contractor.

2. University may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being useddoes not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complyingpaint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with thenon-complying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove non-complyingpaint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the twocoatings are incompatible.

3.05 CLEANINGA. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by

washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing paintingoperations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

C. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced paintedsurfaces.

END OF SECTION


10 1101 - 1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

SECTION 10 1101VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS


A. Outdoor enclosed bulletin board cabinets.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Substrate construction.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on chalkboard, markerboard, tackboard, tackboard

surface covering, trim, and accessories.1.04 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01700 - Closeout Submittals, for warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Tackboard display cases:1. MooreCo, Inc: www.moorecoinc.com.2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com.3. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com.4. Approved equal.5. Substitutions: In accordance with the provisions of Division 1.

2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDSA. Bulletin Board Cabinets

1. MooreCo Model No. 94-PSU-O, 1 door, 36" high x 30" wide x 1.5" interior depth.a. Aluminum construction, silver finish.b. Clear acrylic view panel.c. Locking door with concealed hinges.d. Rubber-Tak back panel.


A. Install cabinet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure units level and plumb.

3.02 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame.C. Remove temporary protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


10 1400 - 1 SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Room and door signs, exterior locations. B. Informational signs, interior locations C. Building identification signs.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product

components,including dimensions, anchorage, and accessories. D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts

or chips. E. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flat Signs: 1. Best Sign Systems, Inc : www.bestsigns.com.2. Cosco Industries (ADA signs) ; ADA Series 1: www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: conforming to provisions of Division 1.

B. Dimensional Letter Signs: 1. ASI Sign Systems; LPP Series cut acrylic dimensional letters.2. Cosco Industries : www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.3. Inpro : www.inprocorp.com.4. Approved equal.5. Substitutions: conforming to provisions of Division 1.

C. Other Signs: 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 _______, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

http://www.ada.gov/

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00006864&item_key_date=901231&input_doc_number=ICC&input_doc_title=


10 1400 - 2 SIGNAGE

B. Room, Door and Informational Signs: Where indicated and as detailed. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with applied character panel media as specified.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) and Grade II

Raster braille, where detailed.3. Character Height: 1 inch (25 mm).4. Sign Height: as detailed.

C. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters.2. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings.

2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. Refer to drawings.

1. Edges: Square.2. Corners: Radiused.3. Wall or Door Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Concealed; adhesive on door surfaces, pins

epoxied into predrilled holes at masonry; or as approved by University..B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:

1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: As selected..4. Character Color: Contrasting color, as selected..

2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Injection Molded Panels: One-piece acrylic plastic, with raised letters and braille.

1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).2.05 NON-TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA

A. Silk Screened Plastic Panels: Letters and graphics silk screened onto reverse side of plastic surface: 1. Sign Color: Color as selected.2. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.06 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Plastic Letters:

1. Material: Acrylic plastic sheet, flat, 12" high x 1/2" depth, Arial Font.2. Color: International Orange RGB Color Code: #FF4F00 .3. Product: ASI LPP Series.4. Mounting: Concealed, as recommended by manufacturer..

a. Standoff mounting, 1/2"b. Tamper-resistant.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain University's instructions.D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.

END OF SECTION


10 2113.19 - 1 PLASTIC TOILETCOMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10 2113.19PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Phenolic toilet compartments.B. Urinal screens.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Mounting substrateB. Section 10 2800 - Toilet Accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.B. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling

Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,

door swings.D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, ____by____ inch (____by____ mm) in size

illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Phenolic Toilet Compartments:1. Bobric; Solid Phenolic Partitions and Screens; www.brobrick.com2. Partition Systems International of South Carolina; Phenolic Toilet Partitions:

www.psisc.com.3. Approved equal..4. Substitutions: In accordance with provisions of Division 1.

2.02 PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTSA. Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid

phenolic core panels with integral melamine finish, floor-mounted unbraced.1. Color: as selected.

B. Doors:1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

C. Panels:1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

D. Pilasters:1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch (76 mm).

E. Screens: Without doors; to match compartments; mounted to wall with two panel brackets withvertical support/bracing same as compartments.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel with polished finish, 3 inch (76 mm) high, concealing

floor fastenings.


10 2113.19 - 2 PLASTIC TOILETCOMPARTMENTS

1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral withpilaster.

B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum, 1 inch by 1-1/2 inch (25 mm by 38 mm) size, withanti-grip profile and cast socket wall brackets.

C. Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel.D. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, polished stainless steel.E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type.F. Hardware: Polished stainless steel:

1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door.2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature.3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door

latch.4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door.5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch (9 mm to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between

wall and end pilasters.C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16

inch (5 mm).B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging

doors to closed position.C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

END OF SECTION


10 2800 - 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 2800TOILET ACCESSORIES


A. Accessories for toilet rooms and concession.B. Electric hand/hair dryers.C. Grab bars.D. Mirrors.E. Diaper changing tables.F. Mop holders.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports for accessories, including in

wall framing and plates.B. Section 10 2113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments.C. Division 26 - Electrical: electrical power for accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.C. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless

Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015.D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.F. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus

Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011.G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.H. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).I. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing

Tables for Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceilingsupports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and

attachment methods.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Toilet Accessories:1. Bobrick: www.bobrick.com.2. ASI - American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.



4. Approved equal.5. Substitutions: In conformance with the provisions of Division 1.

B. Electric Hand/Hair Dryers:1. Dyson; Airblade: www.dyson.com2. Approved equal. No known equal.3. Substitutions: In conformance with the provisions of Division 1.

C. Diaper Changing Tables1. Koala Kare; KB200; www.koalabear.com.2. Approved equal.3. Substitutions: In conformance with the provisions of Division 1.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete

with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.1. Grind welded joints smooth.2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 4 keys for each accessory to University; master key lockable accessories.C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 or 316.E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with

G90/Z275 coating.F. Mirror Glass: Tempered safety glass, ASTM C1048; and ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality

Q2, with silvering as required.G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats

epoxy baked enamel.2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. As shown or scheduled on drawings.B. Electric Hand Dryers: Dyson Airblade.

1. Warranty: 3 years.C. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.C. For electrically-operated accessories, verify that electrical power connections are ready and in

the correct locations.D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the

drawings.B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.



C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.END OF SECTION


10 4400 - 1 FIRE PROTECTIONSPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 4400FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers & mounting brackets1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Substrate for brackets.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for procedures.C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.


A. Fire Extinguishers:1. Ansul, a Tyco Business; ____: www.ansul.com.2. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp; ______: www.kidde.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: In conformance with provisions of Division 1.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable

codes, whichever is more stringent.B. FE-36 Clean Agent Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Class: A:B:C type; size as indicated.2. Temperature Range: Minus 40 degrees F (Minus 40 degrees C) to 120 degrees F (49

degrees C).2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, suitable for application..PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure rigidly in place.

END OF SECTION


11 4000 - 1 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 4000FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT


A. Food service equipment.B. Connections to utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between equipment and adjacent walls, floors,

and ceilings.B. Section 11 4001 - Custom Fabricated Foodservice Equipment.


Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication and

Installation Guidelines; 2001.E. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on appliances; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes,

locations, and utility service connection locations, service characteristics, and wiring diagrams.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention, and ________.D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Operation Data: Provide operating data for the specified equipment and ________.F. Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules and

________.G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of standard products of thetype specified.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to applicable code for utility requirements.B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage.B. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01700 - Closeout, for requirements.


11 4000 - 2 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

B. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Food Service Equipment:1. As scheduled.2. Approved equal.3. Substitutions: In conformance with the provisions of Division 1.

2.02 EQUIPMENTA. Equipment Schedule: Refer to drawings.B. Installation Accessories: Provide all rough-in hardware, supports and connections, attachment

devices, closure trim, and accessories required for complete installation.2.03 FINISHES

A. All Components: Shop finish.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location.B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.B. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions.B. Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces.B. Wash and clean equipment.C. Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Remove protective coverings from prefinished work.B. Protect finished work from damage.

END OF SECTION


11 4001 - 1 CUSTOM FABRICATEDFOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 4001CUSTOM FABRICATED FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT


A. Custom fabricated stainless steel units, including:1. Combination serving and condiment counter.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between equipment and adjacent walls, floors,

and ceilings.B. Section 11 4000 - Foodservice Equipment: General requirements covering all food service

equipment work; manufactured equipment items.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel StainlessSteel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2015b.

B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic StainlessSteel Tubing for General Service; 2015.

C. ASTM A270/A270M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic andFerritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Sanitary Tubing; 2015.

D. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2016.E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.F. NSF 2 - Food Equipment; 2014.G. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication and

Installation Guidelines; 2001.H. SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; Sheet Metal

and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2008.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for procedureslB. Shop Drawings: Complete floor plans, elevations, cross-sections, and construction details for

all fabricated units; include:1. Layout and anchorage of equipment and accessories, including clearances for

maintenance and operation and required electrical or plumbing accommodations.2. Wiring, piping, and schematic diagrams.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inUniversity's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of commercial

food services equipment with minimum three years documented experience and NSF certifiedfor the type of equipment specified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Do not deliver fixed equipment that is not to be integrated into structure until after completion of

finished ceilings, floor and walls, painting, and lighting.B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.C. Tape fiberboard or plywood to surfaces as required by equipment shape and installation access

requirements.



D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 WARRANTYA. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: 18-8 percent chromium-nickel composition, minimum; Type 302, 304, or 316;No. 4 - Brushed finish on exposed surfaces.1. Sheets: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666.2. Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M or ASTM A270/A270M; of true roundness with seams and

welds ground smooth.3. Bars: ASTM A276/A276M.

B. Sound Deadening Material: Bituminous paint or other water resistant mastic.C. Manufactured Components:

1. Finish Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard; stainless steel with polished finish.2. Feet for Legs: Bullet shaped stainless steel; screwed into tubular legs with concealed

screw threads; minimum 1 inch (25 mm) vertical adjustment.D. Bolts, Screws, and Rivets: Stainless steel; do not use on exposed surfaces unless specifically

indicated or otherwise unavoidable.1. Bolt and Screw Caps: Provide lock washer and chromium-plated brass/bronze acorn nut

to cap visible or exposed threads on inside of fixtures.E. Anchoring Devices: Stainless steel, of type appropriate for use; provide seismic anchorage as

specified in SMACNA (KVS).2.02 CUSTOM FABRICATED UNITS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. See drawings for dimensions and configurations; ensure proper fit by taking field measurementsprior to fabrication.

B. Provide fully shop assembled units complying with SMACNA (KVS) and NSF 2, unless indicatedotherwise; stainless steel components unless indicated otherwise.1. Where details are referenced as "SMACNA" details, refer to SMACNA (KVS).2. Stainless Steel Sheet: For surfaces up to 12 feet (3.7 m) in length provide one continuous

sheet without joints or welds, including back and end splashes.3. Joints: All joints welded unless specifically indicated or impossible; do not solder or braze

stainless steel; do not use bolts, screws, or other fasteners on work surfaces, food contactsurfaces, or wet surfaces.

4. Shop prepare openings for plumbing fixtures, fittings, and other service components.5. Sound Deadening: Apply sound deadening material to accessible internal surfaces of

metal work and underside of metal counters and sinks.C. Counter and Table Tops: Stainless steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm) thick, minimum; with

underbracing as recommended by SMACNA (KVS), and bullnose edges and 45-degree backand end splashes, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Counter Edges: Provide finished edge on all open sides; close open ends down to bottom edgeof turn down; if not otherwise indicated provide bullnose edges.1. Turned Down Edges: SMACNA Figure 2-3 Detail C; 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) turn down at 90

degrees, with 1/2 inch (13 mm) return at 30 degree angle.2. Dish Tables and Counters: Make watertight joint into dishwashing machine.

E. Back and End Splashes: Provide wherever tops abut walls or other vertical surfaces; closeopen ends from top to bottom of turned down top edge.1. Where indicated and where required for concealment of plumbing, make horizontal

dimension of back and end splashes at least 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) from face of wall.



2. Wall Clips: 4 inch (102 mm) long 14 gage, (0.0747 mm) stainless steel "zee" clips;anchored to wall at 36 inches (914 mm) on center.

F. Legs: Stainless steel tubing, 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) outside diameter; fit legs with set-screwfastened sockets and adjustable feet as specified.1. Legs Over 12 inches (305 mm) Long: 14 gage, 0.065 inch (1.65 mm), minimum, wall

thickness.2. Legs Up To 12 inches (305 mm) Long: 16 gage, 0.06 inch (1.5 mm), minimum, wall

thickness.3. Weld leg sockets to continuous channel or angle or gusset plates; provide stainless steel

triangular pad where leg gussets are welded to frame.4. Legs may be bolted to table tops using studs welded to bottom of top.5. Where vibration or oscillation is anticipated anchor in floor with 1/4 inch (6 mm) stainless

steel pins.6. Unless otherwise indicated provide legs for all units.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Joints, Bends, and Edges: Make all joints close fitting, especially butt and contact joints.

1. Make brake bends free of open-texture or orange peel appearance.2. Make sheared edges free of burrs, projections, and fins.3. Neatly finish mitered and bullnosed corners with under edge of material ground to uniform

condition, without overlapping materials or cracks.B. Welding: Make all welded joints smooth, ductile, and watertight, without gaps, holes, or

discoloration or marring of surface adjacent to welds.1. Use welding processes and filler metal compatible with material being welded. Do not use

carbon arc welding on surfaces that will be exposed to view in finished work.2. Grind exposed welds flush with adjacent material; finish and polish to match adjacent

surface. Avoid excessive heating of metal and metal discoloration. In grinding, useiron-free abrasives, wheels, and belts that have not been used on carbon-steel. Removepits, runs, sputter, cracks, low spots, voids, buckles, and all other imperfections. Removegrain of rough grinding by several successively finer polishing until specified finish isattained.

3. When welding sheet, penetrate entire thickness for entire length of joint; make joints flat,continuous and homogeneous with sheet metal without reliance on straps under seams,filling with solder, or spot welding.

4. When stainless steel is joined to dissimilar materials, use stainless steel for fasteningdevices and welding material.

5. Protection Against Corrosion: Eliminate possibility of corrosion wherever welding occurson stainless steel. Minimize possibility of carbide precipitation in welding bolts and screws.

6. When welding galvanized steel, thoroughly clean and repair damaged galvanizing and coatwelds with polyurethane coating.

7. Where bolts or screws are welded to underside of tops or trim, finish and undepress theexposed side of welds.

8. Coat welds and discolorations that are not exposed to view in finished work withmetallic-based paint to prevent the possibility of progressive corrosion of joints, unlesswelds are ground and polished smooth.

C. Brazing of Copper Tubing to Brass and Bronze Fittings: Use silver solder. Do not brazestainless steel.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify correct locations of utility connections, floor drains, ventilation connections, and supports.C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.



3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with fabricator's instructions and recommendations, plumb and level and inproper locations, ready for utility connections.

B. Lay out work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment; cut, fit, andpatch where necessary; coordinate work with others.

C. Do not cut or fit units in the field; if adjustments are necessary due to inadequate fieldmeasurement prior to fabrication, take unit back to shop and perform modifications there.

D. Do not field weld unless absolutely necessary; weld and grind field joints in accordance withspecified fabrication procedures.

E. Securely anchor and attach non-mobile or adjustable-leg equipment to walls, floors, or baseswith stainless steel bolts.

F. Follow SMACNA (SRM) seismic restraint recommendations for project location.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust new and existing equipment to ensure proper operation.3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces.B. Clean equipment to condition suitable for food preparation use.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


11 6500 - 1 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 6500ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT


A. Fence padding.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 32 3113 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data showing configuration, sizes, materials, finishes,

hardware, and accessories; include:C. Samples: Submit samples of wall pad coverings in manufacturer's available range of colors.D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with factory original labels

attached.B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; protect from extremes of

weather, temperature, moisture, and other damage.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fence padding:1. Nissen.2. AK Athletic Equipment: www.akathletics.com.3. Approved equal.4. Substitutions: Conforming to provisions of Division 1.

2.02 FENCE PADDINGA. Nissen Envirosafe Backstop Padding, 6' high x 6' wide, 3" thick foam with 18 oz. PVC coated

covering; with brass grommets at 12" spacing all sides, with accessory ties suitable forattachment to chain link fence; for installation around chamfered corner of fencing; seedrawings.

B. Provide mounting ties of sufficient size and strength to securely attach equipment to fenceconstruction.


A. Take field measurements to ensure proper fitting of work. If taking field measurements beforefabrication will delay work, allow for adjustments within recommended tolerances.

B. Inspect areas and conditions before installation. Notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory ordetrimental conditions. Do not proceed until conditions have been corrected. Commencinginstallation constitutes acceptance of work site conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with contract documents and manufacturer's instructions.


11 6500 - 2 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

B. Install equipment rigid, straight, plumb, and level.C. Secure all equipment with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Remove masking or protective covering from finished surfaces.B. Clean equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


22 0100 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING

SECTION 22 0100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All levels of 22 00 00

B. General: 1. Refer to Section 01 00 00.

C. Preparations: 1. Prior to data collection and compilation, prepare and submit in duplicate an outline of the

proposed organization and content. 2. Compilation: Prepare and collect data concurrently with construction progress. Compile per

submitted outline.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Form of Submittals

1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner’s personnel. 2. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTION”. List: a. Title of Project. b. Provide indexed tabs. c. Identify of separate structure as applicable. d. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.

3. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2” x 11”. b. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages. c. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten. d. Drawings:

1.) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. 2.) Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

e. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. 3.) Provide typed description of product and major component parts

of equipment. 4.) Provide indexed tabs.

4. Binders: a. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. b. Maximum ring size: 1”. c. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. General: Record data and operation and maintenance data are complimentary. Submittal items

which may be required under both categories may be included only under one submittal if a statement to that effect is included in the other submittal.

B. Quality Assurance 1. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel.



a. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. b. Familiar with requirements of this Section. c. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. d. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.

C. Content of Manual 1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order.

a. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. b. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:

1) Subcontractor or installer. 2) Maintenance contractor, if appropriate. 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement

c. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.

2. Product Data: a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to:

1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information.

3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate.

1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams.

b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation

c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation.

a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

5. Factory Authorized Start-Up Report. a. Provide a factory start-up report for each piece of equipment. Contractor start-up

reports, unless contractor is a factory authorized representative will not be allowed. 6. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.

a. Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, give: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure. 2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.

D. Manual for Equipment and Systems: 1. Submit one copy of complete manual in final form in PDF format. 2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate.

a. Description of unit and component parts. 1) Function normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

b. Operating procedures: 1) Start-up, break-in, routing and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions. 4) Special operating instructions.

c. Maintenance Procedures: 1) Routing operations. 2) Guide to “trouble-shooting” 3) Disassembly, repair and reassemble. 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.



d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. 1) List lubricants required.

e. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacture’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams

required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear. 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

h. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Each contractor’s coordination drawings:

1) As-installed color-coded piping diagrams. j. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. k. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. l. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.

3. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. a. Description of system and component parts.

1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

b. Circuit directories of panel boards. 1) Electric service. 2) Controls. 3) Communications

c. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. d. Operating procedures.

1) Routing and normal operating instructions. 2) Sequences required. 3) Special operating instructions.

e. Maintenance procedures. 1) Routine operations. 2) Guide to “trouble shooting”. 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4) Adjustment and checking.

f. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. g. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. h. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. i. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of

Specifications.

E. Instruction of Owner’s Personnel. 1. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner’s designated operating and

maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems

2. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. a. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of

operations and maintenance.

END OF SECTION


22 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SPECIAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work of this section.

B. This section applies to all Division 22 Plumbing Sections.

1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes all plumbing (equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, specialties) inside the

building(s) and outside the building(s) to the point of connection to site plumbing systems.

B. Provide complete plumbing systems including: 1. Service connections to existing on-site utilities, and stubs for future connection to

equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications. 2. All piping systems for conduction of cold water, heated water, soil, waste, fuel gas, and

other fluids or gases as shown or specified for plumbing work. 3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings,

piping, and other piping accessories as shown or specified for plumbing work. 4. All plumbing equipment and auxiliary items as specified herein or shown on the drawings. 5. All low voltage wiring for automatic fixtures as required.

C. All chemicals utilized on site as part of coating, sealant, and other products shall not contain any chemical that is listed as part of Proposition 65 known carcinogens that are identified by NTP, IARC, and the USEPA California Proposition 65 chemical repository contractors are not allowed to bring these chemicals on site.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 23 - HVAC

B. Division 26 - Electrical Work

1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic and, although

size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site.

B. Information presented on Drawings and in the Specifications is based upon latest data available during their preparation. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by the structures and the site the contractor shall accept same with this understanding.

C. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage, protection and placing of all equipment and

materials.



B. Equipment stored and installed at the job site shall be protected from dust, water or other damage. Cover all equipment stored exposed to weather.

1.06 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from

the structural engineer.

1.07 CODES AND SAFETY ORDERS A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the

State Fire Marshall; the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety; the I.S.O. codes; latest edition of California Code of Regulations, 2016 Title 24, Part 6; the 2016 California Plumbing Code, Title 24, Part 5; the 2016 California Mechanical Code, Title 24, Part 4; the 2016 California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2, the 2016 California Green Code NFPA Codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Drawings and Specifications take precedence when work and materials called for exceed Code requirements.

1.08 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions:

1. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.

2. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by specifications.

3. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

4. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Engineer for further instructions.

5. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.

1.09 PERMITS AND FEES A. Obtain all permits and pay all required fees for permits and/or utility services. Inspections

required during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work furnish the owners representative with certificates of inspection.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS A. Assume all responsibility for damage to adjoining properties; and restore property to its original

condition, should damage occur as a result of the work of this section. Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during excavations, promptly notify the Architect for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on plans.

1.11 SUBMITTALS A. General

1. A submittal schedule shall be issued by the contractor within 15 days of award of the contract. This schedule shall allow for timely review and approval as required by the contract documents.

2. These requirements apply only to substitutions, submittals, and shop drawings. 3. The contractor shall review all submittals prior to submission to the Architect. Submittals

not reviewed by the contractor will be returned to the contractor and will not be reviewed. 4. Any deviations from specified requirements shall be clearly indicated in submittals.



5. Any errors in or omissions from submittals and any consequences of these are the responsibility of the Contractor.

6. Partial or incomplete submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements; the Contractor shall be liable for any resultant consequences.

7. Delayed submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements. Whether accepted or rejected, delayed submittals will not be considered justification for extension of contract time or similar relief.

8. Submittals not required or permitted by the Specifications but made at the option of the Contractor, will be returned without review unless accompanied with written valid justification.

9. Submittal items improperly included with those of another category (such as a proposed substitution included with shop drawing submittal) are not valid and will be returned without review.

10. Within 35 calendar days after award of the contract, and before fabrications and installation of any material or ordering of any materials, submit for approval one copy in PDF format of complete submittal data on specified and proposed substituted equipment and materials. Submittals shall list all materials proposed identified with drawing symbols and specific data on equipment such as arrangements, performance curves, sizes, capacity, motor locations, and other pertinent data. Check all submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Construction Documents before forwarding to the architect for each item. No consideration will be given to substitutions submitted past 35 day limit. The contractor shall be responsible for all quantities and errors and omissions of submittals. Furnish samples when requested.

11. Equipment and materials specified as part of the specifications and drawings are listed by two manufacturer’s names. The first named manufacturer is the basis of design. The second named manufacturer has been determined to be an equivalent in quality or utility. The second named has not been specifically determined to conform to the first named in size, layout, electrical power, voltage, or impacts to building structure. The contractor is bound by all requirements for substitutes, as described below, for all second named manufacturers and equivalent equipment or products.

12. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below. 13. Acceptance of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for omissions

from the submittal or errors in the submittal.

B. Review 1. Submittals will be reviewed for general acceptability, not necessarily including all details.

The engineers review is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is solely responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work with that of other trades and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Corrections of comments made on this submittal during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the contract documents or with its responsibilities listed herein. a. Proposed substitutes will be judged not only for the acceptability of the items

themselves, but also how they will be used under the conditions of the particular project.

b. Proposed substitutions will be judged also for compliance with qualifications and conditions stipulated in paragraph 1.13.

2. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below. a. Acceptance of a substitute does not waive the specified requirements. b. Once a substitution is accepted, no revision or re-submittal may be made except for

pressing and valid reason and after receipts of approval to do so.

C. Review Directions 1. The notation "No Exceptions Taken" indicates that no further submittal on the particular

matter is required and that the Contractor may proceed with normally ensuing action. The



notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data. The submittal has only been reviewed for general conformance with the design concept of the Contract Documents. The contractor is responsible for the dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site; information that pertains solely to the fabrication process or to the means and methods of construction; coordination of the work of all trades; and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. This notation does not modify the contractor's duty to comply with the contract documents.

2. The notation "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required, but the Contractor shall make all changes or corrections noted (but no others) before proceeding with normally ensuing action. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions or shop drawings (but usually not record data or operation and maintenance data).

3. The notation "Amend and Resubmit" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and must be revised, resubmitted, and reviewed again. In the case of submittal on substitutions and shop drawings so noted, the Contractor shall not proceed with any normally ensuing action until the resubmittal is reviewed. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data.

4. The notation "Rejected - See Remarks" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and that resubmittal on the same subject matter is not allowed and will not be considered. The notation will be applied normally only to submittals on substitutions (usually not on shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data).

5. The notation "Returned Without Review" indicates that the submittal or item has not been considered officially because it is either not proper, valid, required, or permitted by the Specifications and has no status or effect.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The contractor is responsible for providing all shop drawings as described below so that the

design professional has the opportunity to determine if the contractor understands the contract documents. It is not the purpose of shop drawings to assure that the contractor is meeting the requirements of the contract documents. Review and approval of a submittal neither extends nor alters any contractual obligation.

B. Accompany all substituted equipment with shop drawings showing revised ductwork and/or piping layouts in order to ascertain that substituted equipment does not adversely affect layout or work of others. Shop Drawings: The following conditions apply to shop drawings: 1. Shop drawings are not and do not become Contract Documents. 2. Processed shop drawing submittals and any instructions or requirements noted thereon are

a part of the work, but they may not be used as a means of increasing the scope of the work.

3. If deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the submittals are processed, the Contract Document requirements shall govern.

1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Whenever any equipment, material, or process is indicated or specified by patent of proprietary

name and/or name of Manufacturer, in the Specifications and/or on the Drawings, it is understood that such specification is used to facilitate the description of the material and/or process and deemed to be followed by the words "or equal" unless noted "no substitute".

B. Substitute equipment and materials shall be equal in all respects including quality, arrangement, utility, physical size, capacity, and performance to those specified. Approval of substitute material will not relieve the contractor from complying with the requirement of the Drawings and Specifications. The contractor shall be responsible and at his own expense, for any changes



caused by proposed substitutions which affect other parts of his own work or the work of other contractors.

C. The submittal of a proposed substitution shall clearly establish the following: 1. The item can be transported into and installed in the intended space and in the manner

shown. 2. Required connections (electrical, piping, and other) can be properly made and adjoining

work can be properly accomplished. 3. The proposed substitute is similar to and of substance equal to that specified, is suited to

the same use as that specified, and will perform the functions required by the design. 4. Motors for proposed substitute equipment will have the same minimum differential between

motor brake horsepower and motor nameplate horsepower as the specified equipment. 5. All performance requirements shall be at least equal to the specified product or equipment

including noise levels, cooling capacity, heating capacity, air flow quantity, etc.

D. By submitting a proposed substitution, the Contractor agrees to the following: 1. He will assume full responsibility for any and all modifications and necessary alterations

arising from the use of the substitute item or material including all cost incurred by all other trades.

2. He will assume full responsibility for any delay in the construction schedule resulting from the use of the substitution.

3. He will prove harmless and indemnify the Owner and the Owner's design consultants from real or alleged damages that may result from the installation, use, or performance of a substitute material or product.

E. The following conditions apply to substitutions: 1. Submittals of substitutions are not and do not become part of the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall not order, fabricate, use, or install any substitute product or procedure

unless he has received acceptance of the substitute from the Engineer. 3. Should the Contractor install any substitute product in violation of the above he shall

remove it and install the specified product at his own expense. 4. The Contractor shall provide a letter stating that all the above items shall apply to all

substituted products and equipment. 5. Any submittal for substituted equipment or product that does not clearly show that the

substituted item is equal shall be marked rejected and no further submittal shall be allowed on the substituted item. Provide in submittal format documentation that the proposed item is exactly as specified in the contract documents.

1.14 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all work for one year from date of acceptance, against all defects in material,

equipment and workmanship including repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment and workmanship. Guarantee shall be on form supplied by the owner's representative.

1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Indicate on reproducible drawings the actual location of all piping and equipment as the work

progresses. Dimension locations of underground service mains and branches. Deliver the drawings to the architect at the completion of the job.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop drawings:

1. Make all drawings to an appropriate scale, large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and the method of its connection into the work.



2. Make each drawing sheet in a reproducible form such a tracing, sepia, or Mylar transparency.

B. Grouping: Combine submittals in logical groupings; for example, submit Shop Drawings grouped by Sections of the Specifications, arranged in the specified sequence.

C. Shop Drawings: Four blue or black line prints of each for the Engineer.

D. Content: 1. Shop drawings may be:

a. Drawings or diagrams prepared by the Contractor, a supplier, a manufacturer, or other.

b. Typewritten data or descriptions. c. Manufacturer’s printed brochures, descriptions, charts, instructions, or data sheets.

E. Timing: Submit all shop drawings prior to installation of any items included in submittal.

2.02 CORROSION PROOFING A. Pipes, or product items shall be constructed of materials which are fully resistant to harmful

substances they may normally contact, or (if ferrous) shall be galvanized after fabrication, or shall be fully protected from such substances by paint or other coating in appropriate thickness or number of coats.

B. All bolts, nuts, screws, and washers shall be galvanized unless specified to be plated or unprotected.

2.03 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. All material and equipment shall be new, of the type, capacity and quality specified and free

from defects. All materials and equipment shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment wherever possible.

2.04 FILTERS A. A complete set of filters shall be supplied for use during the construction period. A complete set

of new filters shall be installed before testing and balancing.

2.05 ACCESS BOXES A. For below grade valves and piping devices

1. Brooks No.3-RT, with galvanized steel checker plate recessed H-10 traffic lid flush with rim of box. Lids for boxes located in areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be constructed to withstand H20 live loading as defined by the American Association of State Highway Officials (16,000 pound maximum individual wheel load). Service identification shall be conspicuously welded on lid before galvanizing. Provide manufacturer's box extensions to bring box bottom three inches below bottom of valve and box top flush with finish grade.

2. Box sizes (non-traffic)

Type Valve Valve Size Box No.

Water 2 1/2" and smaller B-9

2.06 ACCESS DOORS A. Unless specified otherwise by the Architect, provide access doors of the following type:

1. Milcor, Elmdor, or equal. a. Milcor Type M



b. Milcor Type UFR, fire resistive type Underwriters Laboratory Class B, 1-1/2 hour rating meets UBC, IBCO and BOCA codes for two hour rated walls self latching with key lock, Elmdor/Stonman Type FR or equal.

2. Minimum size; 18" by 18". 3. Stainless steel; keyed cylinder lock; and hinged. 4. Wall and ceiling access doors: Furnish as required for access to ducts, damper operators,

duct mounted access panels, etc.; coordinate size and location to obtain access. 5. See architectural drawings for further requirements.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Furnish and install miscellaneous equipment and materials required for the systems described

whether or not specifically shown or specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ACCESSIBILITY A. Do not install any equipment, valve, control, motor, filter, or any other device requiring

maintenance or service in an inaccessible location or position. Install access doors to render all such equipment serviceable whether specifically shown on the plans or not. Maintain code clearance to all equipment. Coordinate location of doors with lights, etc., and locate symmetrically with same.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Observations: Check all project drawings and specifications; report any discrepancies before

proceeding with the work and in time to avoid unnecessary rework.

B. Investigation: Examine the areas, conditions, and status of other work contiguous or connecting to the work to be performed; ensure that the time of installation is coordinated with other work.

C. Interruptions of Service: Portions of this work may involve connection to existing work, facilities, or utilities ties and may require interrupting shutdowns of same. Carefully plan, coordinate and execute such work so that any interruptions will be kept to a minimum in time and occurrence. Submit request for shutdowns and make shutdowns only after receiving written approval from the Owner.

D. Other: Correct any unsatisfactory conditions that may impede proper execution of the work. Ensure that all arrangements, personnel, materials, and tools are appropriate and adequate before proceeding.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General:

1. Material and equipment incorporated in the work shall be used or applied only for the purpose intended or specified.

2. Install piping and ductwork and all equipment that requires access with minimum vertical and horizontal clearances required by OSHA for service.

3. All mechanical systems such as ductwork, pipes and all other equipment shall have 2 inches minimum clearance.


B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed

instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.







3.04 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A. Where job conditions do not permit the installation of piping or equipment, etc. in the location

shown, it shall be brought to the engineer's attention immediately before fabrication of piping, etc. and the relocation required shall be determined in a joint conference.

B. The contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items installed without first obtaining the architect’s or engineer’s approval. Remove and relocate such items at the contractor’s expense as so directed by the architect or engineer.

C. Where piping or ducting is left exposed within a room, run in vertical or horizontal planes. Maintain uniform spacing between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces.

D. Horizontal runs of plumbing and/or conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide with maximum clearance below.

E. Make minor changes in locations of equipment and piping, etc. from locations shown including minor offsets when directed by the engineer, at no additional cost to the owner.

3.05 CARE AND CLEANING A. Clean and adjust all equipment at completion of installation to provide operating conditions

satisfactory to the engineer. Remove broken, damaged or defective parts; repair or replace as directed by engineer. Remove surface material and debris resulting from this work when directed.

3.06 FLASHINGS A. Furnish and install a waterproof flashing for each pipe, duct, or other penetration through roof or

wall. Flashings shall be 4 lb. seamless lead flashings Semco 1100 series with counter flashing as detailed, except in metal roofs flashing for pipes through roof shall be furnished by the roofing contractor. Where details are not specifically delineated, submit details for review.

3.07 PAINTING A. Painting is included under the Painting and Finishing Section. It shall be the responsibility of the

Mechanical Contractor to properly protect all equipment and controls during painting operations and the Mechanical Contractor shall repair and/or replace any item damaged due to painting that was not properly protected.

3.08 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors to all concealed equipment, valves, controls, etc. Locate doors where

shown or to be coordinated and symmetrically located with lights, diffusers, etc.

3.09 RECORD DATA A. Compilation

1. Record and collect information concurrently with construction progress and date all entries; make drawing entries within 24 hours after occurrence of change or installation requiring recording. Any concealed work covered before recording data shall be uncovered as directed or as necessary to obtain data. a. Record information on drawing prints using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or

indelible pencil); describe clearly by note or graphic line as appropriate.



2. Locate any concealed work adequately to allow future access with reasonable ease and accuracy. a. Identify the plan location of all stub outs, pipe lines, etc., which are buried or concealed

in the structure, whether installed where shown on the contract drawings or in a different location; show actual field dimensions from column lines, wall lines, or other permanent reference lines or points.

b. In many cases on the contract drawings, the arrangement of conduits, pipes, ducts, and similar items is shown schematically rather than as a precise scaled layout. Identify the actual location of these with horizontal and vertical dimensions. If such lines are exposed or readily accessible, omit dimensional identification.

c. When any work is installed of size, dimension, slope, or location different from that shown on the contract drawings, note the deviation on the Project Record set. If the variations are substantial or cannot be shown clearly on the record drawings, make a new drawing and attach to the Record set.

3. On other documents a. Where changes occur in specifications, clearly indicate same in ink, colored pencil, or

rubber stamp. b. Where installed equipment differs from that specified (e.g., by accepted substitution or

change order) note in the specifications and include complete data on same.

3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Preparations: Prior to data collection and compilation, prepare and submit in duplicate an

outline of the proposed organization and content.

B. Compilation: Prepare and collect data concurrently with construction progress. Compile per submitted outline.

C. See Section 22 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Plumbing.

3.11 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION REVIEW A. A representative of Peters Engineering shall be notified 48 hours prior to request for

construction review site visit. The purpose of notification is so that the required review can be made without delaying construction. When notified, Peters Engineering will advise the contractor if a field review of the construction will be made in 48 hours or that a review will not be required. If the contractor fails to notify Peters Engineering as required, and/or covers or closes in any construction before required reviews, he may be required to uncover the work for observation.

END OF SECTION


22 0523 - 1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING

22 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. All Division 22 Mechanical Sections.

1.02 SUMMARY A. See Section 22 05 00

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26: Electrical Work

B. Division 23: HVAC

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish two tee handle operators for each size to suit all valves which are installed below grade

in access boxes and which are not fitted with integral handles; hub end valves shall be used where required. 1. Valves on systems operating over 100 psi shall be rated for 150 psi or higher as required.

B. Shut-off service, domestic water 1. Ball Valves:

a. Sizes 2” and smaller: Nibco T-685-80-LF, 600 psi rated, threaded or sweat ends, full port, teflon seat, quarter turn handle with stops, two piece bronze body.

b. Sizes 2-1/2 to 4”: Nibco T-FP-600A-LF, 400 psi rated, soldered ends, full port, teflon seat, quarter turn handle with stops, two piece bronze body.

2.02 VALVE BOXES A. Underground valve box shall be "Brooks or "Christy" marked for service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL A. Valves shall be full size of line in which installed. Furnish discs suitable for service intended. All

valves shall be properly packed and lubricated. Unions shall be placed adjacent to each threaded or soldered valve or equipment connection 2" and smaller. Install flanges at all valves with stems vertical wherever possible. Stems shall not be placed below horizontal.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

C. All shutoff valves in water lines shall be or ball valves, unless otherwise shown.

D. Valves shall be provided with brass identification tags indicating service controlled. Tags may be omitted on lines exposed in equipment rooms where service is obvious.

END OF SECTION


22 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND

EQUIPMENT

22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. All Division 22 sections.

1.02 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install all work shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as required for a

complete and functional installation.

B. Any conflicting requirements of other individual sections take precedence over this section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed alternative methods of attachment for review and approval by the Engineer,

prior to deviating from the requirements given below.

B. For all seismic bracing systems, submit structural calculations and details prepared and signed by the Contractors licensed engineer which include all resultant forces applied to the building structure. Do not overstress building structure. The submittal data required does not require an analysis of the building structural numbers and their reaction to the loads of the piping. The submittal data needs to address attachment methods and shall include calculations indicating the forces that are applied to the building structure at the point of attachment. Calculations will be reviewed for compliance with design criteria, not for arithmetic.

1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26: Electrical Work

B. Division 23: HVAC

1.05 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Information presented on Drawings and in the Specifications is based upon latest data available

during their preparation. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by the structures and the site the contractor shall accept same with this understanding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. B-Line, Superstrut, Tolco, Grinnell, or equal. Numbers are B-line.

B. Finish: Electro-Chromate or hot dipped galvanized.

C. Individual: B3690, B3100 cleaves or B3110 with H-104 all thread rod. Use B3110 for pipe subject to movement.

D. Trapeze Suspension, for three or more pipes B-Line 1-5/8" width channel or a size suitable for load in accordance with manufacturer's published load ratings. No deflection to exceed 1/180 of a span.


22 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND

EQUIPMENT

E. Trapeze Supporting Rods: Diameter sufficient to support the load with a safety factor of 5. Anchor rods securely to building structure. See part three for minimum sizes.

F. Pipe Straps: B2007-B2072 for standard pipe, B2000-B2069, copper coated for copper.

G. Size: For insulated pipe - B3690 pipe hangers sized to allow pipe insulation to pass continuously through the hanger.

H. Insulated Pipe Shields: Utilize isolated pipe supports at all insulated pipe hanger locations.

I. Isolators: 319CT or Trisolator isolators at all hangers and clamps supporting un-insulated piping and tubing and at all points that pipe comes in contact with structure or other pipes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Support all piping so that it is firmly held in place by approved iron hangers and

supports and special hangers as required or as scheduled on the drawings. 1. Rigidly fasten hose faucets, and similar items at ends of pipe branches to the

building construction near point of connection.

B. Hanger Installation: On all insulated pipes, install the hangers on the outside of the pipe covering and not in contact with the pipe. Burning, welding, cutting, or drilling on any structural member may only be done if approved by the structural engineer. No valve or piece of equipment shall be used to support the weight of any pipe. Provide a hanger close to the point of change of direction of pipe run in either horizontal or vertical plane. Place supports and hangers for cast iron soil pipe as close as possible to joints; when hangers or supports do not come within one foot of a branch line fitting, install an additional hanger or support at the fitting. Protect insulation, when pipe is insulated, at each hanger with 180 degree, 18 gauge, 12 inch long G.I. Saddles.

C. Hanger rods with C-clamp type structural attachment shall be equipped with retaining straps.

D. Metallic Pipe Hanger Spacing and Rod Size Schedule:

Type of Pipe Spacing

Pipe Size ½” – 2” 2 ½” – 5”

Steel Pipe *8' - 0" 10' - 0"

Copper Tubing 5’ - 0” 8’ – 0”

Cast Iron Support at 8'- 0" intervals and on each side of and within 12" of joint.

Rod Size: 3/8” ½”

E. Anchor pipe subject to expansion or contraction in a manner permitting strains to be evenly distributed.

F. Methods of attachment and sizes shall conform to NFPA 13 and FM data sheet 2-8.

G. All hangers and fasteners are subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer.

H. Provide beam clamp retaining straps for all pipe supports attached to structural beams.

END OF SECTION


22 0700 - 1 PLUMBING INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and

DIVISION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work of this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section describes insulation materials, methods, and applications for Mechanical Work,

Special or specific details, applications, features, or methods may be described in work descriptions Sections or on the drawings.

1.03 RELATED DIVISIONS A. 01 00 00: General Requirements

B. 22 00 00: Plumbing.

C. 23 00 00: HVAC

1.04 REFERENCES A. Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the

following specifications as applicable to the specific product or end use: 1. American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications:

a. ASTM C 547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation" b. ASTM C 585, "Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal

Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)" c. ASTM C 1136, "Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders

for Thermal Insulation"

1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Insulation materials furnished should meet the minimum thickness requirements of National

Voluntary Consensus Standard 90.1 (Latest edition), "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings," of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

B. Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the fire hazard requirements of applicable building codes when tested in composite form per one of the following nominally equivalent test methods: 1. American Society for Testing of Materials ASTM E 84 2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UL 723, CAN/ULC-S102-M88 3. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255

C. Molded pipe insulation shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in the particular system.

D. Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 547.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: only a licensed firm employing installers specifically skilled and

experienced in applying insulation to piping shall do Insulation work.



B. Insulation materials and accessories furnished and installed hereunder shall, where required, be accompanied by manufacturers' current submittal or data sheets showing compliance with applicable specifications listed in above.

C. Insulation materials, including all weather and vapor barrier materials, closures, hangers, supports, fitting covers, and other accessories, shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with project drawings, plans, and specifications.

D. Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled and experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation work.

E. Codes and Standards: 1. California Code of Regulations - Title 24. 2. National Fire Protection Association - 90A 3. Insulation applied to the exterior or interior surface of ducts, and the exterior surface of

piping, shall be UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum smokedeveloped rating of 50 according to ASTME 84, when tested as a composite installation including insulation, facing materials, and adhesives as normally applied.

1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. All of the insulation materials and accessories covered by this specification shall be delivered to

the job site and stored in a safe, dry place with appropriate labels and/or other product identification.

B. The contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the insulation materials and accessories before, during, and after installation. No insulation material shall be installed that has become damaged in any way.

C. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation when fully dried out (either before installation or afterward following exposure to system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equivalent in all respects to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical assistance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION – SEE 22 07 16

2.02 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION – SEE 22 07 19

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION A. Use the types and thickness of insulation specified in work description Sections.

B. Apply insulations in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with instructions specified herein or noted on the drawings.

C. Install insulations only after the systems, items, and equipment have been installed and tested, inspected, and accepted. Exceptions: Slip-on piping insulation and equipment insulations installed at the factory.

D. Fit insulation snugly to the item being insulated; butt all joints tightly with no voids, spaces, or thin spots.

E. Seal all joints completely; where sealing tape is used, center the tape over the joint.



F. Except where specified or necessary, do not use staples or fasteners which penetrate vapor barrier jackets or covers on cold systems or equipment; where such penetrating fasteners are used, seal each penetration completely to maintain the vapor barrier integrity. All penetrations of the ASJ and exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion.

G. Use adhesives, mastics, cements, sealants, and finishes undiluted unless specifically directed otherwise; apply per manufacturer's directions.

H. Install outdoor jacketing or other specified weather proofing or finishing on all insulations outdoors.

I. Install all indoor exposed insulation with extra care and finish neatly.

J. Follow specified methods of installation unless alternative methods are submitted and approved.

3.02 FINISHING A. Finishes and Protection:

1. Insure that the exterior finish of all insulation is applied and complete as specified. 2. Make ready for painting, or painted to match existing including color where specified for

paint. 3. Install all metal jackets or protective sheathing where specified.

B. Repair, Touchup: Properly repair and touchup all dents, rips, tears, or other damage inflicted on jackets or exterior surfaces of insulation. Breaks or punctures in the vapor barrier of external insulation will not be accepted and must be repaired prior to project acceptance.

END OF SECTION


22 0719 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. A continuous intact vapor barrier is critical for all pipes conveying fluids at temperatures less

than 75° F.

B. All insulation material shall have a mold, humidity, and erosion resistant face that has met the requirements of 2016 CMC Standard No. 6-1.

C. Insulation applied to the exterior surface of pipes located in buildings shall have a flame spread of no more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50.

D. All requirements of Section 22 0700 apply to this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 IP-1 RIGID MOLDED SECTIONAL/INDOOR CONCEALED JACKET A. Regular shape (straight run).

1. Molded sectional, factory fabricated of heavy density resin bonded fibrous glass, with integral factory applied all service jack of Kraft paper/aluminum foil/glass fiber reinforcement.

2. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity k factor of 0.23 at 75° F mean temperature and be suitable for direct application and service on piping having operating surface temperatures of -60° to 450°F.

3. Jacket shall: a. Extend 1-1/2” (minimum) along one edge of longitudinal joint to form a sealing lap,

which shall be faced inside with a paper protected pressure sensitive adhesive. b. Have a permanence rating of 0.02 perm/in. and a Beach puncture resistance of 50

units; 4. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, tape seal and adhesive used to

adhere jacket to the insulation). Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread of 25 and a Smoke Developed of 50. PVC fitting covers and accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same component ratings.

5. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently flame and smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.

6. Fiberglass Schuler-Manville Micro-Lok, or equal.

B. Irregular shape (fittings, flanges, valves, etc.) 1. Fibrous glass of same density, thickness, and other properties or characteristics as the

adjacent regular shape insulation either pre-molded or field forged to fit the item being insulated. The pre-molded insulation shall be provided with weather protection cover.

2.02 IP-2 NOT USED

2.03 IP-3 ELASTOMERIC FOAM A. Insulation shall be Elastomeric Foam Insulation. Insulation should have a maximum service

temperature of 210° F, a minimum service temperature of -40°F, and a “K” factor of 028 at 75°F. The flame spread of the insulation shall be 25 or less, and smoke density shall be 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. K-Flex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS, Armacell Armaflex or equal.



2.04 IP-4 CLOSED CELL POLYOLEFIN A. Closed cell flexible plastic foam insulation should have a “k” factor of 0.27 or less at 75°F and

water vapor permeability of .2 perm-inch or less. The manufacturer shall warrant the insulation to be able to be directly buried underground without any protective jacket.

B. Closed Cell Polyolefin in tubular form shall comply with ASTM C-534, UL 94HBF, UBC 42-1 Class I, ASTM E-84 (25/50), NFPA 255 (25/50), UL 723(25/50), FMCSS-302, CAN-ULC-S102.2-M88 (25/50) Flammability Classification, MEA#267-92-M, New York.

C. IMCOA Imcolock or equal.

2.05 IP-5 RIGID MOLDED SECTIONAL/INDOOR EXPOSED JACKET A. Regular shape (straight run)

1. Molded sectional, factory fabricated of heavy density resin bonded fibrous glass, with integral factory applied all service jacket of Kraft paper/aluminum foil/glass fiber reinforcement.

2. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity k factor of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature and be suitable for direct application and service on piping having operating surface temperatures of -60° to 450°F.

3. Jacket: a. Straight runs: PVC fitting covers with vapor barrier. b. Irregular shapes: c. Zeston, Snap-Form, factory molded PVC covers, or d. Mitered aluminum sheet matching straight run jacketing, or e. Alternative jacketing: Schuler-Manville Type ML, metal jacketing system.

4. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, tape seal and adhesive used to adhere jacket to the insulation). Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread of 25 and a Smoke Developed of 50. PVC fitting covers and accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same component ratings.

5. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently flame and smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.

6. Fiberglass Schuler-Manville Mico-Lok, or equal.

B. Irregular shape (fittings, flanges, valves, etc.) 1. Fibrous glass of same density, thickness, and other properties or characteristics as the

adjacent regular shape insulation, either pre-molded or field forged to fit the item being insulated. The pre-molded insulation shall be provided with PVC protection cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS Note: Where multiple systems are listed, contractor has the option to choose.

A. Condensate (CD) water piping above grade/indoors 1. Use System IP-3. (Elastomeric Foam).

a. ¾" thickness for all sizes 2. Use System IP-4. (Closed Cell Polyolefin).

a. ¾" thickness for all sizes 3. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier.

a. ¾" thickness for all sizes

B. Domestic cold water (CW) piping above grade/indoors/concealed above ceiling or in wall cavity: 1. Use System IP-3. (Elastomeric Foam).

a. ½" thickness for all sizes 2. Use System IP-4. (Closed Cell Polyolefin).



a. ½" thickness for all sizes 3. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier.

a. ½" thickness for all sizes smaller than 1”. Use 1” thickness for 1” thru 4”

C. Domestic tempered water (TW) above grade/indoors 1. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier.

a. ½" thickness for pipes smaller than 1" diameter,

D. Domestic hot water (HW) above grade/indoors/concealed above ceiling or in wall cavity: 1. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier.

a. ½" thickness for pipes smaller than 1" diameter, 1" thickness for 1" diameter through 2" diameter.

E. Domestic CW and HW above grade/indoors/exposed: 1. Use System IP-5. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Exposed Jacket).

a. For CW: ½” thickness for pipes smaller than 1” diameter, 1” thickness for 1” and greater diameter pipe.

b. For HW: ½” thickness for pipes smaller than 1” diameter, 1” thickness for 1” diameter through 2” diameter pipe, and 1-1/2” thickness for 2-1/2” diameter pipe.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Unless specifically excluded herein or on the drawings, insulate all parts of water piping

systems, and condensate drains including fittings, flanges, valves, and pipe-mounted devices, except do not cover nameplates on devices.

B. Install insulation in removable sections over unions, flanges, and line components or devices requiring periodic maintenance.

C. Install insulation butted tightly to transitions such as insulated pipe shields, insulated pipe sleeves, equipment connections, etc.

D. Install insulation on piping systems so that condensation will not occur. Insulate pipe supports where hanger is directly in contact with pipe up to the point of connection to the building structure. All piping shall be supported in such a manner that neither the insulation nor the vapor/weather barrier is compromised by the hanger or the effects of the hanger. In all cases, hanger spacing shall be such that the circumferential joint may be made outside the hanger. On cold systems, vapor barrier shall be continuous, including material covered by the hanger saddle.

E. Treat equipment face piping as follows: 1. Where piping is subject to condensation (domestic water systems, condensate drains) and

where installed above grade outdoors (either hot or cold systems) insulate piping completely to the point of equipment connection.

2. Where not subject to condensation (hot systems) terminate insulation at the outlet side of the equipment shut-off valve, leaving the face piping un-insulated, 24” max, unless noted otherwise, except where exposed to outdoors.

F. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.

G. Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe insulation, protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. All staples used on cold pipe insulation shall be coated with Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34 vapor barrier coating to maintain vapor barrier integrity.

H. Rigid Molded Sectional/Jacketed: 1. Comply with applicable general instructions above.



2. Apply to all hot water and piping (except where specified or noted otherwise) installed above grade indoors and outdoors, concealed or exposed.

3. Seal all transverse joints (except at PVC fitting jackets) with circumferentially applied 3" (minimum) width tape of same material as the jacket, faced with the same adhesive as the longitudinal lap, or seal with Hardcast 4" wide Type DT490-C mineral impregnated woven fiber tape (synthetic fiber indoors, cotton fiber outdoors) using Hardcast FTA-20 activator/adhesive applied by brush or roller. Seal transverse joints at PVC fittings jackets with color matching PVC tape and vapor barrier mastic adhesive.

4. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-formed fiberglass fittings, fabricated sections of fiberglass pipe insulation, blanket insulation, or insulating cement. Thickness shall be equal to adjacent pipe insulation. Finish shall be with pre-formed PVC fitting covers or as otherwise specified on contract drawings.

5. Flanges, couplings and valve bonnets shall be covered with an oversized pipe insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the main pipe section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between the two insulation sections with low-density blanket insulation being used to fill gaps. Jacketing shall match that used on straight pipe sections. Rough-cut ends shall be coated with suitable weather or vapor resistant mastic as dictated by the system location and service.

6. On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends should be beveled away from bolts for easy access.

7. On cold systems, particular care must be given to vapor sealing the fitting cover or finish to the pipe insulation vapor barrier. All valve stems shall be sealed with caulking to allow free movement of the stem but provide a seal against moisture incursion.

8. Fit insulation terminations with Zeston, Snap Form, end cap jackets, or seal with Hardcast tape as specified above for joints.

9. On all piping (except equipment face piping) installed outdoors, install outdoor jacketing. Install aluminum sheet jacket with all joints turned down at 45º below horizontal; secure in place with non-corroding bands and/or blind rivets (do not puncture vapor barrier insulation jacket). On equipment face piping (including equipment shut-off valve) coat the insulation with ¼" thick Foster 46-50 or Childers CP-10/11 (weatherproofing) mastic reinforced with glass fabric and finished with two (2) coats of aluminum paint.

10. Penetrations a. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping

penetrations, except where otherwise specified.

I. Closed Cell Polyolefin: 1. Install pre slit, pre-glued closed cell polyolefin foam pipe insulation as per manufacturer's

recommendations. Seal all joints and seams with Fuse-Seal Gun or with Armstrong 520 adhesive or equal in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Fabricate fitting covers from polyolefin foam insulation using same procedure.

2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.

3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have

been fully resolved.

J. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

K. Install faced insulation with facing to occupied room side. Install non-rated facing in contact with unexposed surface of finish materials.

L. Do not install insulation over recessed light fixtures.

M. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation into crevices, spaces at outlet boxes and similar penetrations.

N. Maintain continuous foil faced vapor barrier. Provide fire resistive tape at all edges or penetrations of foil faced insulation, including batt ends.



O. Where wall insulation cavity exceeds 8 feet high, provide blocking or other approved support at 8 feet on center.

END OF SECTION


22 1100 - 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

22 1100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS,

SPECIAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work of this section.

B. Section 22 0500applies to this section.




equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications. 2. All piping systems for conduction of cold water and heated water as shown or specified for

plumbing work. 3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings,

piping, and other piping accessories as shown or specified for plumbing work. 4. All plumbing equipment and auxiliary items as specified herein or shown on the drawings.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0500 – Plumbing

B. Section 22 0700- Insulation

C. Section 23 0000 - Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning


the structural engineer and approval from DSA. Where possible, offset vents and pipes rising in walls, concealed above ceilings, below plates and rise through roof. Where this is not possible, install vents and pipes through plates as detailed on structural drawings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a general statement of materials and methods along with manufacturer’s technical data

and installation instructions for all equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, and plumbing specialties to be installed.

B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 0500 requirements. 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 0100 requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Adapters: Wrought copper male adapters shall be used wherever it is necessary to connect

copper tubing to a valve or "tee" having threaded connections

2.02 PIPE PROTECTION



A. Bare copper pipe buried in the ground shall have a corrosion protective wrap of one of the following: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride Tape: The tape shall be of a minimum thickness of 10 mils and shall be

laminated with a suitable adhesive, or shall be applied with a suitable primer adhesive. Width as recommended by the manufacturer for the pipe sizes being wrapped (4" minimum). Tape shall have continuous identification

2. 3M X-Tru-Coat, factory-applied plastic coating with additional field-applied double-layer wrapping of Scotchrap #51, 20-mil plastic tape, Trentex No. V-10, B-20, Scotchwrap No. 50 Polyvinyl chloride tape wrap, or thermofit sleeves.

3. Field Joint Cover: Tape coat, prime coat and one layer of Tape coat #20 heat-applied 62-mil tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MINIMUM COVER A. Provide trenching and backfill for buried piping and install at the following depth unless shown

otherwise, cover is from top of pipe to finish grade.

B. Water - 30"

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General:

1. Install exposed polished or enameled connections from fixtures or equipment with special care, showing no tool marks or threads at fittings. Inspect each piece of pipe and each fitting carefully for defective workmanship on pipe, or obstruction in pipes and fittings.

2. Anchor pipe subject to expansion or contraction in a manner permitting strains to be evenly distributed and alleviated by swing joints or expansion loops which shall be installed as required and/or shown. Underground anchors shall consist of plates welded to pipe and encased in concrete. Anchor all domestic cold water piping at all toilet areas that have flush valve urinals or toilets.

B. Sleeves: Install sleeves of sufficient size to allow for free motion of pipe. Finish sleeves flush when in walls and extend a minimum of 2" above floor when passing through floor slabs and outside walls shall be caulked with oakum and mastic and made watertight. No visible leakage at sleeves will be permitted. Sleeves may be omitted for waste lines through slabs on grade and rising into a concealed space if wrapped with 1" insulation. Sleeve all pipes where pipes pass through footings with PVC pipe sleeves.

C. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stopping sealant material specified in Division 7.

D. Cathodic Protection: Install insulated flanges or dielectric unions at points of connection between pipes and equipment as follows: (1) between copper or brass piping and steel or cast iron pipe. (2) Between copper or brass piping and any steel material. (3) Buried connections of copper or brass piping to steel or cast iron piping shall be protected with a polyvinyl tape wrap 10 mils thick, extending 5' each way from connection.

E. Expansion: Install piping with sufficient offsets, loops, and/or swing joints to allow for expansion and contraction. Anchor piping at equipment to restrain movement at those locations.

F. Freeze Protection: Piping shall not be installed in a location subject to freezing conditions. All piping shall and must be installed on the interior side of building envelope without exception.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PIPE PROTECTION A. Apply covering to within four inches of ends for each pipe length on pre-wrapped pipe.



B. Clean all piping of all loose scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease before wrapping. Wire brush as required, use of a quality solvent for removal of oil and grease.

C. Field Joints and Fittings: Joints shall be wrapped to provide at least two full thicknesses over the joint and to extend a minimum of 4" over the adjacent pipe covering. Tightly apply the tapes with a one-half minimum uniform lap, free from wrinkles and voids. Experienced operators shall wrap sections of piping to be wrapped that exceed 50’ of continuous lengths with an approved wrapping machine.

D. Piping Protective Covering Testing: After applying covering, and before back filling, test all protective covering using a Tinker and Rasor Holiday Detector; obtain certification upon completion of test. Correct any discovered faults in coating and repeat test until system is proved free of all faults.

E. Inspection: Damaged or defective wraps shall be repaired as directed. Do not cover wrapped pipe until the inspection and necessary repairs have been completed and approved by the Architect.

F. Defect Repair: Tape coat TC Cold prime and double wrap of Tape coat CT cold-applied tape spirally wrapped with half-tape width overlap of preceding layer.

G. Covering: Place all backfill carefully in order not to damage the wrap. No rocks or sharp edges shall be back filled against the wrap.

3.04 EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING A. Perform all excavations as required for the installation of the work included under this section,

including shoring of earth banks to prevent cave-ins and to protect workmen and equipment. Restore all surfaces, roadways, walks, curb, walls, existing underground installations, etc. damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original conditions in a manner approved by the architect. Excavations shall be ample in size to permit pipes or equipment to be laid at elevations intended, and to permit ample space for caulking and joining and compacting backfill around pipe. Maintain all warning signs, barricades, flares and red signal lanterns as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and local ordinances. Perform all pumping required to remove all water from trenches during installation of piping and backfilling.

B. Stop machine excavation for pipe trenches in solid ground, several inches above required grade, so that a firm and uniform bearing throughout entire length of pipe is provided. In lieu of above hand excavation on bottom of trench, the contractor may excavate to a depth one quarter of the nominal diameter of pipe, but in no case excavate less than 6" below required grade line, and place a bed of sand or granular soil, properly compacted to provide a uniform grade and to provide a firm support for pipe throughout its entire length. When pipe or underground conduit with insulation or protective coating is to be placed in the trench, clean sand only shall be used for bedding the pipe or conduit.

C. Refer to Division 31 for earthwork.

3.05 BACKFILLING A. No backfilling operations shall begin until the required tests and inspections have been made

and the Architect has given approval for backfilling. Should any of the work be enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, contractor shall, at his expenses, uncover the work. After it has been inspected, tested and approved, he shall make all repairs necessary to restore the work of the other contractor to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering. Insulated pipe and pipe with protective coating shall be backfilled with clean, concrete grade sand for a minimum distance of 12" above the top of the pipe. Compact sand backfill by flooding or jetting. Protect pipe from uplift during jetting operation.



3.06 CROSSING UTILITIES A. Extreme care shall be exercised during excavation across existing utility lines particularly gas

and electrical lines for trenching to install new utility lines. Hand excavate all trenches in the proximity of existing lines so as not to damage or cut into them.

B. All existing utility and service lines shall be located by hand excavation prior to trenching with equipment.

C. The location, depth and invert elevations of all existing utilities to be crossed or to which connecting shall be determined before performing any other work or ordering any materials for the project.

3.07 PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE A. Protect the work and materials of other trades as well as the Mechanical work and material from

damage during construction. Cap and/or plug all piping at the completion of roughing-in and before backfilling. Cap all piping at the close of each day.

3.08 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All water supplied to fixtures shall be provided with Speedway loose key compression shut-off

stops. Combination fixtures shall have compression stop on each water supply fitting. Concealed stops shall be Crane 9H-313 or equal.

B. Provide red brass pipe nipples for all stub-outs thru walls to fixtures or equipment. Do not use copper pipe for stub-outs.

C. Refer also to Section 40 0000.

3.09 FINAL CONNECTIONS A. Plumbing Contractor shall verify location of and make all final connections to site utilities, extend

to buildings and furnish and install valves, valve boxes, pressure reducing valves, shut-off cocks, cleanouts, pressure regulating valves, adapters and other accessories shown and/or required to connect.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Sterilization

1. After installation and before installing valves or making final connections, flush or purge piping systems clean of foreign substances; use water to flush piping conducting liquids and compressed air to clear piping conducting gases.

2. After completing cold and heated water systems, disinfect in accordance with current requirements of U.S. Public Health Department. Use 50 parts per million of chlorine with 8 hour retention and flush to leave a residual no greater than supply source. Submit written certification of disinfecting completion by independent laboratory. After sterilization take at least one (1) water sample per floor and have analyzed for "E-coli" to submit test results.

END OF SECTION


22 1116 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 22 11 00, Facility Water Distribution applies to this section.







1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 - Plumbing

B. Section 22 07 00 - Insulation

C. Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24,

Part 6, latest edition.

1.05 REFERENCES A. Pipes And Tubes

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types K, and L, water tube, drawn temper.

C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types K water tube, annealed temper.

D. Fittings 1. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 2. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, ASTM B584. 3. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Threaded -Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.15, ASTM B584. 4. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300. 5. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-

socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

E. Joining Materials 1. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, alloys to suit system requirements. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements.

1.06 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS



A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural engineer and approval from DSA. Where possible, offset vents and pipes rising in walls, concealed above ceilings, below plates and rise through roof. Where this is not possible, install vents and pipes through plates as detailed on structural drawings.



B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 01 00 requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


copper tubing to a valve or "tee" having threaded connections.

2.02 PIPE, FITTING, AND JOINING MATERIALS A. Copper Water Pipe

1. Pipe: Above grade, Type L, or K hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88, plain ends. 2. Fittings: Solder type, wrought copper per ANSI Standard B16.22 or cast red bronze per

ANSI Standard B16.18. Do not use T-drill. 3. Unions: Solder type, cast red bronze. 4. Joining Materials/Methods

a. Canfield, Silvabrite or equal lead free solder with a non-corrosive water based flux. b. 15% silver brazing alloy, water based silver brazing flux. Silver content must be

clearly identified on the brazing rod. 5. Connections

a. Copper to dissimilar metals: dielectric connector. b. Copper to threaded connections: cast brass adapters.

2.03 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Inside Building (to 5'-0" outside building line).

1. Water Piping: Above grade, Type L drawn temper, joining methods, soldered connections, below grade, Type K drawn temper copper tubing, joining methods, brazed connections.

2. Plastic pipe and fittings shall not be used inside of buildings.

B. Outside Building (from 5'-0" outside building line) 1. Not in scope of this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING A. Provide trenching and backfill for buried piping and install with the following minimum cover

unless shown otherwise, cover is from top of pipe to finish grade. 1. Water - 30"

B. Water piping 1. Run water piping generally level. No piping shall be installed to cause an unusual noise

from the flow of water under normal conditions.



2. All water branches to single fixtures shall be provided with water hammer arrestors/shock-absorbers of the same diameter pipe as the branches. Where two or more fixtures are located in a row or battery, the supply heads shall be continued full-size of the branch outlet and an air hammer arrestor/shock absorber, same pipe size as the header shall be installed on the end of the header.

3. Adapters: Wrought copper male adapters shall be used wherever it is necessary to connect copper tubing to a valve or tee having threaded connections.

4. Install Bare Metal Pipe Isolators: Stoneman "Trisolator", Superstrut "Cush-a-strip", Unistrut on all hot and cold domestic water piping.



2. After completing cold and heated water systems, disinfect in accordance with current requirements of U.S. Public Health Department. Use 50 parts per million of chlorine with 8 hour retention and flush to leave a residual no greater than supply source. Submit written certification of disinfecting completion by independent laboratory. After sterilization take at lease one (1) water sample per floor and have analyzed for "E-coli" to submit test results.

3.03 PIPING TESTING: TESTING CRITERIA System Medium Pressure Duration

Water Water 150 psig 4 hours

END OF SECTION


22 1119 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 22 0500 applies to this section.




equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications. 2. All piping systems for conduction of water as shown or specified for plumbing work. 3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings,


1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0500 - Plumbing

B. Section 22 0700 - Insulation


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Unions

1. Shall have the same pressure rating as pipe fittings.

B. Piping Penetration Auxiliaries 1. Sleeves Below Slab or Grade: Metraseal model MS or equal with schedule 80 PVC sleeve.

The seal shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. The seal shall be constructed of synthetic rubber with heavy-duty plastic pressure plates. All bolts and nuts shall be constructed of stainless steel.

2. Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated brass or painted metal.

C. Water hammer / chock absorbers shall be Sioux Industries, or equal. Provide access per 22 0500 where required for servicing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, as specified

herein, and as detailed on the drawings.

3.02 EXTERIOR HOSE BIBBS


22 1119 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install at 18 inches above finished grade and be non-freeze type.

3.03 VALVES, UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Valves shall be full size of line in which installed. Furnish discs suitable for service intended. All


B. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

C. Valves shall be provided with brass identification tags indicating service controlled. Tags may be omitted on lines exposed in equipment rooms where service is obvious.

D. Cathodic Protection: Install insulated flanges or dielectric unions at points of connection between pipes and equipment as follows: (1) between copper or brass piping and steel or cast iron pipe. (2) Between copper or brass piping and any steel material. (3) Buried connections of copper or brass piping to steel or cast iron piping shall be protected with a polyvinyl tape wrap 10 mils thick, extending 5' each way from connection.

E. Expansion: Install piping with sufficient offsets, loops, and/or swing-joints to allow for expansion and contraction. Anchor piping at equipment to restrain movement at those locations.

F. Freeze Protection: Piping shall not be installed in a location subject to freezing conditions. All piping shall and must be installed on the “warm” side of building envelope insulation without exception. Where risers occur in outside walls, ensure that building insulation is adequate and intact. All piping must be drainable; provide drains required. All piping shall be run in or above heated portion of the building.



2. After completing cold and heated water systems, disinfect in accordance with current requirements of U.S. Public Health Department. Use 50 parts per million of chlorine with 8 hour retention and flush to leave a residual no greater than supply source. Submit written certification of disinfecting completion by independent laboratory. After sterilization take at lease one (1) water sample per floor and have analyzed for "E-coli" to submit test results.

B. Piping Testing: Testing Criteria

System Medium Pressure Duration

Water Water 150 psig 4 hours

END OF SECTION


22 1300 - 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE

22 1300 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes plumbing waste pipe and fittings, specialties) inside the building(s) and

outside the building(s) to the point of connection to site plumbing systems.


equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications. 2. All piping systems for conduction of soil, waste, and other fluids or gases as shown or

specified for plumbing work. 3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings,









B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements. 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 01 00 requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MINIMUM COVER A. Provide trenching and backfill for buried piping and install with the following unless shown

otherwise, cover is from top of pipe to finish grade. 1. Sewer - 30"



3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General

1. Sleeves: Install sleeves of sufficient size to allow for free motion of pipe. Finish sleeves flush when in walls and extend a minimum of 2" above floor when passing through floor slabs and outside walls shall be caulked with oakum and mastic and made watertight. No visible leakage at sleeves will be permitted. Sleeves may be omitted for waste lines through slabs on grade and rising into a concealed space if wrapped with 1" insulation. Sleeve all pipes where pipes pass through footings with PVC pipe sleeves.

2. Expansion: Install piping with sufficient offsets, loops, and/or swing joints to allow for expansion and contraction. Anchor piping at equipment to restrain movement at those locations.

3.03 EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING A. Perform all excavations as required for the installation of the work included under this section,

including shoring of earth banks to prevent cave-ins and to protect workmen and equipment. Restore all surfaces, roadways, walks, curb, walls, existing underground installations, etc. damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original conditions in a manner approved by the architect. Excavations shall be ample in size to permit pipes or equipment to be laid at elevations intended, and to permit ample space for caulking and joining and compacting backfill around pipe. Maintain all warning signs, barricades, flares and red signal lanterns as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and local ordinances. Perform all pumping required to remove all water from trenches during installation of piping and backfilling.

B. Stop machine excavation for pipe trenches in solid ground, several inches above required grade, so that a firm and uniform bearing throughout entire length of pipe is provided. In lieu of above hand excavation on bottom of trench, the contractor may excavate to a depth one quarter of the nominal diameter of pipe, but in no case excavate less than 6" below required grade line, and place a bed of sand or granular soil, properly compacted to provide a uniform grade and to provide a firm support for pipe throughout its entire length. When pipe or underground conduit with insulation or protective coating is to be placed in the trench, clean sand only shall be used for bedding the pipe or conduit.

C. Refer to Division 31 for earthwork.

3.04 BACKFILLING A. No backfilling operations shall begin until the required tests and inspections have been made

and the Architect has given approval for backfilling. Should any of the work be enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, contractor shall, at his expenses, uncover the work. After it has been inspected, tested and approved, he shall make all repairs necessary to restore the work of the other contractor to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering. Insulated pipe and pipe with protective coating shall be backfilled with clean, concrete grade sand for a minimum distance of 12" above the top of the pipe. Compact sand backfill by flooding or jetting. Protect pipe from uplift during jetting operation.

3.05 CROSSING UTILITIES A. Extreme care shall be exercised during excavation across existing utility lines particularly gas

and electrical lines for trenching to install new utility lines. Hand excavate all trenches in the proximity of existing lines so as not to damage or cut into them.

B. All existing utility and service lines shall be located by hand excavation prior to trenching with equipment.

C. The location, depth and invert elevations of all existing utilities to be crossed or to which connecting shall be determined before performing any other work or ordering any materials for the project.



3.06 PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE A. Protect the work and materials of other trades as well as the Mechanical work and material from

damage during construction. Cap and/or plug all piping at the completion of roughing-in and before backfilling. Cap all piping at the close of each day.

3.07 FINAL CONNECTIONS A. Plumbing Contractor shall verify location of and make all final connections to site utilities.

3.08 PIPING TESTING: TESTING CRITERIA System Medium Pressure Duration

Drainage and Vent Water 10 feet water 15 minutes

END OF SECTION


22 1316 - 1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL







equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications. 2. All piping systems for conduction of soil, waste, and other fluids or gases as shown or

specified for plumbing work. 3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings,







1.05 REFERENCES A. Pipes And Tubes

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, seamless, black or galvanized, plain ends.

2. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV, drawn temper. 3. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301.

B. Fittings 1. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 2. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, ASTM B584. 3. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Threaded -Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.15, ASTM B584. 4. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300. 5. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-

socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

6. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53 or ASTM A106, Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.



7. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Classes 150 and 300; hexagonal stock; with ball-and-socket joint; metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; and female threaded ends with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

8. Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Classes 125 and 250; standard pattern; with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

9. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29. 10. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23. 11. Plastic Pipe Sleeves: ASTM C564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F477

elastomeric seal.

C. Joining Materials 1. CISPI Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 310, having ASTM

C564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 series stainless-steel, corrugated shield-and-clamp assembly.

2. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, alloys to suit system requirements. 3. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements. 4. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

D. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTMF477, elastomeric gasket.





B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 0500 requirements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 0100 requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


copper tubing to a valve or "tee" having threaded connections.

2.02 PIPE, FITTING, AND JOINING MATERIALS A. Hubless Cast-Iron/Sleeve-Clamped Joints

1. Pipe: Service weight cast iron, hubless, with hot coal tar pitch coating inside and outside, per Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301.

2. Fittings: Hubless type, Tyler No-Hub Coupling, each matched with pipe and identified with the manufacturer's name or trademark, the Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute symbol, and the pipe size. Those for connections to other types of piping - approved cast-iron adapter/transition type.

3. Joining Materials/Methods: Husky Series 4000 (Blue shield) or Mission HeavyWieght Orange shield) on pipes over 3”, neoprene sleeve type conforming to ASTM C564 specifically designed for connecting hubless cast-iron pipe, coated with manufacturer's recommended lubricant before installing; four type 304 stainless steel band clamps with a



type 305 stainless steel worm drive screw, and corrugated shield over sleeve; use standard no-hub couplings on pipe 3” and less

4. Wedge lock joints at rainwater leaders to underground drain. 5. Cleanout Plugs: Use Armite Joint Seal compound No. 411, or Enterprise Commercial

Thread-Seal.

B. Steel/Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings 1. Pipe: Galvanized steel per ASTM A-120, threaded ends, standard weight Schedule 40. 2. Fittings: Cast-iron threaded drainage type, black coated, with recessed shoulder and

pitched threads, per ASTM A-126, Class B.

C. Copper DWV Pipe: DWV drainage tubing per ASTM B-306-86, plain ends for pipe 1 ½” and larger. 1. Fittings shall be solder type, wrought copper drainage fittings per ANSI Standard B16.29-

86. 2. Joining Materials/Methods: Canfield, Silvabrite or equal lead free solder with a

non-corrosive water based flux. 3. Connections:

a. Copper to dissimilar metals: dielectric connector. b. Copper to threaded connections: cast brass adapters.

D. Steel/Threaded Fittings 1. Pipe: Black or galvanized steel per ASTM A-53 seamless, threaded ends, standard weight

Schedule 40 or Schedule 80. 2. Fittings

a. Black or galvanized (to match pipe) banded malleable iron, threaded, ASTM A-197, 150 lb. standard or 300 lb. extra heavy per ANSI Standard B16.3 (to match pipe schedule).

b. Black or galvanized (to match pipe) banded cast iron, threaded, per ASTM A-126 Class B, 125 lb. standard or 250 lb. extra heavy per ANSI Standard B16.4 (to match pipe schedule).

3. Unions: AAR 300 lb. malleable iron, black or galvanized (to match pipe). 4. Joining Materials/Methods

a. Rectorseal or pure lead and graphite thread lubricant. b. Permacel, P-412 1/2" wide teflon pipe joint sealant.

2.03 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Inside Building (to 5'-0" outside building line).

1. Soil, waste and vent piping a. Below slab, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated for sizes 2

1/2" and smaller. Above floor from 6" above slab shall be galvanized steel pipe or service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated for sizes 2 1/2" and smaller. Urinal waste shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated. Sizes 3" and larger shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated.

b. Fittings 1) Contractor may use "No-Hub" "Husky" joints per manufacturers published

instructions for installation. No-Hub fittings for waste and soil pipe shall be four band stainless steel type. Standard two band stainless steel band type may be used for vent piping.

c. As an alternate use, copper DWV Pipe. 2. Condensate Drain Piping: Type L, drawn temper copper tube, joining method, soldered

connections. Connect to equipment with P-trap and clean out plug.

B. Outside Building (from 5'-0" outside building line) 1. Not in scope of this section.



PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.02 PIPING A. Provide trenching and backfill for buried piping and install with the following minimum cover

unless shown otherwise, cover is from top of pipe to finish grade. 1. Sewer - 30"

B. Sewer Piping: Run all horizontal sanitary piping inside of the building at a uniform grade of not less than ¼" per foot unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Sewers shall have invert elevations as shown and slope uniformly between given elevations. All drainage piping shall be run as straight as possible and shall have long radius bends. All offsets shall be made at an angle of 45 degrees or less. All vent piping shall be graded so as to free itself quickly of any water or condensation. Where possible, groups of vent risers shall be jointed together with one enlarged outlet through roof. 1. Install clean-outs of the same diameter of pipe in all horizontal soil and waste lines where

indicated and at all points of change in direction and at base of all soil or waste drops. Locate-clean outs not less than 18” from building construction so as to provide sufficient space for rodding. No horizontal runs of more than 100 feet shall be without clean-out.

2. Clean-outs in floors shall be protected with a cover taped in place and removed at completion of concrete work.

3. Provide trap at each inlet to sanitary sewer system. Provide trap primers where shown and as required by code.

C. Condensate drain piping 1. Provide "P" trap having 2" minimum trap seal. 2. Install trap with top of trap outlet 2" minimum below bottom of condensate collection pan,

and within 12" of pan outlet. 3. Make changes in direction in the condensate drain line using tees; fit the free leg of the tee

with a screwed plug for clean-outs. Provide additional such clean-outs where required by code or where necessary for cleaning drain line.

4. Extend condensate drain line to appropriate disposal point, receptor, or sewer as prescribed by code or shown on drawings.

5. Insulation: Provide insulation as shown or specified (Section 22 0719).

3.03 VENT LOCATIONS A. Plumbing fixture vents have been combined wherever possible to minimize the number of roof

penetrations.

B. Plumbing contractor shall not shift or relocate vents through the roof or other penetrations from the locations shown without prior approval of the Architect.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Testing:

1. Testing Criteria

System Medium Pressure Duration Drainage and Vent Water 10 ft water 15 minutes

END OF SECTION


22 1319 - 1 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL













PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Cleanouts: Model Numbers are Josam. Provide Josam, Zurn, JR Smith, or equal.

1. Vertical: #58890 with polished bronze cover. 2. Floor: #56000 with nickel-bronze cover, #56000-14, with carpet cleanout marker in

carpeted areas. 3. Grade: #56040, C.I. with brass plug set in concrete. 4. Use floor clean outs where located in walks.

2.02 PIPING PENETRATION AUXILLIARIES A. Sleeves Below Slab or Grade: Metraseal model MS or equal with schedule 80 PVC sleeve. The

seal shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. The seal shall be constructed of synthetic rubber with heavy-duty plastic pressure plates. All bolts and nuts shall be constructed of stainless steel. 1. Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated brass or painted metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




22 1319 - 2 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

3.02 VALVES AND FLANGES A. Valves shall be full size of line in which installed. Furnish discs suitable for service intended. All


B. Valves shall be provided with brass identification tags indicating service controlled. Tags may be omitted on lines exposed in equipment rooms where service is obvious.

C. Cathodic Protection: Install insulated flanges or dielectric unions at points of connection between pipes and equipment as follows: (1) between copper or brass piping and steel or cast iron pipe. (2) Between copper or brass piping and any steel material. (3) Buried connections of copper or brass piping to steel or cast iron piping shall be protected with a polyvinyl tape wrap 10 mils thick, extending 5' each way from connection.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Testing: Testing Criteria

System Medium Pressure Duration Drainage and Vent Water 10 feet water 15 minutes

END OF SECTION


22 4000 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. All Division 22 sections apply to this section.

1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes all plumbing fixtures.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0500 – Common Work Results For Plumbing






B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 0100 requirements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. See fixture and equipment schedules on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All fixtures shall be furnished as scheduled. All finished plumbing shall be accurately lined up

and where batteries of fixtures occur, special care shall be taken with the roughing-in and finished plumbing.

B. The number and position of all plumbing fixtures are shown on the plumbing drawings. Consult architectural drawings for the location dimensions and mounting heights of fixtures. Heights shall comply with the C.B.C., the latest handicapped requirement, and all ADA requirements.

C. All water supplied to fixtures shall be provided with Speedway loose key compression shut-off stops. Combination fixtures shall have compression stop on each water supply fitting. Concealed stops shall be Crane 9H-313 or equal.


22 4000 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES

D. Provide red brass pipe nipples for all stub-outs thru walls to fixtures or equipment. Do not use copper pipe for stub-outs.

E. All finish for exposed metal trim on any fixture shall be polished chromium plated. This shall include wall flanges, nuts, and washers. Handles on all faucets and stops shall be of all metal, chromium plated. Porcelain caps secured with putty shall be provided and installed for all exposed bolt heads.

F. All fixtures shall be properly and securely installed and supported as required and approved. Fixtures set against concrete walls shall be bolted thereto. Fixtures secured to partitions shall be securely bolted to the wall carrier fittings with foot supports, and shall be provided in types as required to suit the particular installation and fixture.

G. Connection between fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made absolutely gas tight and water tight with graphite type gaskets (wall hung fixture) or Fedar's closet setting compound (floor outlet fixtures). Rubber gaskets, or putty will not be permitted.

H. Fixtures not having integral traps shall be provided with "P" traps of chromium plated solderless seamless brass with trap screw at bottom and connected to concealed waste in wall sanitary fittings. All trap tail pieces shall be 17 gauge minimum.

I. Unions on waste pipes on fixture side of traps may be slip or flange joints with soft rubber or lead gaskets.

J. All flush valves shall be tested and adjusted so that each fixture receives the proper amount of water. All faucets, hose bibbs, drinking fountains, etc., shall be properly regulated to the approval of the Architect.

K. Comply with State handicapped requirements regarding flow control devices, fixture mounting heights, insulation of piping under fixtures, etc.

L. Furnish and install stainless steel Hudee frames for counter mounted fixtures unless "Self-Rimming".

M. Grout all voids between fixtures and adjacent surfaces with 100% white Dow Silicon sealant.

N. All hot water fixtures, except kitchen 3-compartment and janitor’s mop sink, to be provided with tempering valves set at 110oF. Provide thermostatic mixing valve at each fixture or group of fixtures as shown on drawings; where limit of 110oF is required. Install the mixing valve in concealed location with access doors provided where needed for servicing.

END OF SECTION


23 0100 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC

SYSTEMS

23 0100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.02 ALL LEVELS OF 23 0000.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Refer to Section 01 0000.

B. Preparations. 1. Prior to data collection and compilation, prepare and submit in duplicate an outline of the

proposed organization and content. 2. Compilation: Prepare and collect data concurrently with construction progress. Compile per

submitted outline.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Form of Submittals 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner’s personnel.

a. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION”. List:

b. Title of Project. c. Provide indexed tabs. d. Identify of separate structure as applicable. e. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.

2. Format: a. Size: 8 ½” x 11”. b. Paper: 20-pound minimum, white, for typed pages. c. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten. d. Drawings:

3. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. 4. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

a. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. 6. Provide indexed tabs. 7. Binders:

a. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. b. Maximum ring size: 1”. c. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. General: Record data and operation and maintenance data are complimentary. Submittal items which may be required under both categories may be included only under one submittal if a statement to that effect is included in the other submittal.

B. Quality Assurance 1. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel.



SYSTEMS

a. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. b. Familiar with requirements of this Section. c. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. d. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.

C. Content of Manual 1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order.

a. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. b. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:

1) Subcontractor or installer. 2) Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement.

c. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.

2. Product Data: a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to:

1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information.

3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate.

1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams.

b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation

c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation.

a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

5. Factory Authorized Start-Up Report. a. Provide a factory start-up report for each piece of equipment. Contractor start-up

reports, unless contractor is a factory authorized representative will not be allowed. 6. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.

a. Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, give: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure. 2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.

D. Manual for Equipment and Systems: 1. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. 2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate.

a. Description of unit and component parts. 1) Function normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

b. Operating procedures: 1) Start-up, break-in, routing and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions. 4) Special operating instructions.

c. Maintenance Procedures: 1) Routing operations. 2) Guide to “trouble-shooting” 3) Disassembly, repair and reassemble. 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.



SYSTEMS

d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. 1) List lubricants required.

e. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacture’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams

required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear. 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

h. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Each contractor’s coordination drawings:

1) As-installed color-coded piping diagrams. j. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. k. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. l. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. m. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. n. Description of system and component parts.

1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

o. Circuit directories of panel boards. 1) Electric service. 2) Controls. 3) Communications

p. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. q. Operating procedures.

1) Routing and normal operating instructions. 2) Sequences required. 3) Special operating instructions.

r. Maintenance procedures. 1) Routine operations. 2) Guide to “trouble shooting”. 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4) Adjustment and checking.

s. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. t. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. u. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. v. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of

Specifications.

E. Submittal Schedule 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to

start of work. 2. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 3. Submit one copy of complete data in final form fifteen days prior to final inspection or

acceptance. 4. Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with comments. 5. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form 10 days after final

inspection or acceptance.

F. Instruction of Owner’s Personnel. 1. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner’s designated operating and

maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems

2. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.



SYSTEMS

a. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.

END OF SECTION


23 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. This section applies to all Division 23 Mechanical Sections.

1.02 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install all mechanical work shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as

required for a complete and functional installation. B. This section includes materials and methods applicable to the work described in all Division 23

Mechanical Sections. Specific work requirements of individual Mechanical Sections take precedence if in conflict with requirements of this Section.

C. All chemicals utilized on site as part of coating, sealant, and other products shall not contain any chemical that is listed as part of Proposition 65 known carcinogens that are identified by NTP, IARC, and the USEPA California Proposition 65 chemical repository contractors are not allowed to bring these chemicals on any California Intel site.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 - Electrical Work

B. Division 22 - Plumbing

1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic and, although

size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site.

B. Information presented on Drawings and in the Specifications is based upon latest data available during their preparation. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by the structures and the site the contractor shall accept same with this understanding.

C. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage, protection and placing of all equipment and

materials.

B. Equipment stored and installed at the job site shall be protected from dust, water or other damage. Cover all equipment stored exposed to weather.

1.06 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS



A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural engineer.

1.07 SEISMIC RESISTANCE A. See Section 23 0548.

1.08 CODES AND SAFETY ORDERS A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the

State Fire Marshall; the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety; the I.S.O. codes; the 2016 California Plumbing Code, Title 24, Part 5; the 2016 California Mechanical Code, Title 24, Part 4; the 2016 California Building Code, the 2016 California Green Code, Title 24, Part 2, NFPA Codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Drawings and Specifications take precedence when work and materials called for exceed Code requirements.

1.09 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed

instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.





1.10 PERMITS AND FEES A. Obtain all permits and pay all required fees for permits and/or utility services. Inspections

required during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work furnish the owners representative with certificates of inspection.

B. Include in bid all costs for gas service including meter, regulators and service line installed by a gas utility company or a gas utility company approved contractor.

1.11 SITE CONDITIONS A. Assume all responsibility for damage to adjoining properties; and restore property to its original

condition, should damage occur as a result of the work of this section. Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during excavations, promptly notify the Architect for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on plans.

1.12 SUBMITTALS A. General

1. A submittal schedule shall be issued by the contractor within 15 days of award of the contract. This schedule shall allow for timely review and approval as required by the contract documents.

2. These requirements apply only to substitutions, submittals, and shop drawings. 3. The contractor shall review all submittals prior to submission to the Architect. Submittals

not reviewed by the contractor will be returned to the contractor and will not be reviewed. 4. Any deviations from specified requirements shall be clearly indicated in submittals.




6. Partial or incomplete submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements; the Contractor shall be liable for any resultant consequences.




10. Within 35 calendar days after award of the contract, and before fabrications and installation of any material or ordering of any materials, submit for approval one copy in PDF format of complete submittal data on specified and proposed substituted equipment and materials. Submittals shall list all materials proposed identified with drawing symbols and specific data on equipment such as arrangements, performance curves, sizes, capacity, motor locations, and other pertinent data. Check all submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Construction Documents before forwarding to the architect for each item. No consideration will be given to substitutions submitted past 35 day limit. The contractor shall be responsible for all quantities and errors and omissions of submittals. Furnish samples when requested.

11. Equipment and materials specified as part of the specifications and drawings are listed by two manufacturers names. The first named manufacturer is the basis of design. The second named manufacturer has been determined to be an equivalent in quality or utility. The second named has not been specifically determined to conform to the first named in size, layout, electrical power, voltage, or impacts to building structure. The contractor is bound by all requirements for substitutes, as described below, for all second named manufacturers and equivalent equipment or products.

12. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below. 13. Acceptance of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for omissions

from the submittal or errors in the submittal.

1.13 REVIEW A. Submittals will be reviewed for general acceptability, not necessarily including all details. The

engineers review is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is solely responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work with that of other trades and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Corrections of comments made on this submittal during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the contract documents or with its responsibilities listed herein. 1. Proposed substitutes will be judged not only for the acceptability of the items themselves,

but also how they will be used under the conditions of the particular project. 2. Proposed substitutions will be judged also for compliance with qualifications and conditions

stipulated in paragraph 1.12.

B. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below. 1. Acceptance of a substitute does not waive the specified requirements. 2. Once a substitution is accepted, no revision or resubmittal may be made except for

pressing and valid reason and after receipts of approval to do so.

1.14 REVIEW DIRECTIONS



A. The notation "No Exceptions Taken" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required and that the Contractor may proceed with normally ensuing action. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data. The submittal has only been reviewed for general conformance with the design concept of the Contract Documents. The contractor is responsible for the dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site; information that pertains solely to the fabrication process or to the means and methods of construction; coordination of the work of all trades; and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. This notation does not modify the contractor's duty to comply with the contract documents.

B. The notation "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required, but the Contractor shall make all changes or corrections noted (but no others) before proceeding with normally ensuing action. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions or shop drawings (but usually not record data or operation and maintenance data).

C. The notation "Amend and Resubmit" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and must be revised, resubmitted, and reviewed again. In the case of submittal on substitutions and shop drawings so noted, the Contractor shall not proceed with any normally ensuing action until the resubmittal is reviewed. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data.

D. The notation "Rejected - See Remarks" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and that resubmittal on the same subject matter is not allowed and will not be considered. The notation will be applied normally only to submittals on substitutions (usually not on shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data).

E. The notation "Returned Without Review" indicates that the submittal or item has not been considered officially because it is either not proper, valid, required, or permitted by the Specifications and has no status or effect.

1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The contractor is responsible for providing all shop drawings as described below so that the

design professional has the opportunity to determine if the contractor understands the contract documents. It is not the purpose of shop drawings to assure that the contractor is meeting the requirements of the contract documents. Review and approval of a submittal neither extends nor alters any contractual obligation.

B. Accompany all substituted equipment with shop drawings showing revised ductwork and/or piping layouts in order to ascertain that substituted equipment does not adversely affect layout or work of others. Shop Drawings: The following conditions apply to shop drawings: 1. Shop drawings are not and do not become Contract Documents. 2. Processed shop drawing submittals and any instructions or requirements noted thereon are

a part of the work, but they may not be used as a means of increasing the scope of the work.

3. If deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the submittals are processed, the Contract Document requirements shall govern.

1.16 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Whenever any equipment, material, or process is indicated or specified by patent of proprietary

name and/or name of Manufacturer, in the Specifications and/or on the Drawings, it is understood that such specification is used to facilitate the description of the material and/or process and deemed to be followed by the words "or equal" unless noted "no substitute".

B. Substitute equipment and materials shall be equal in all respects including quality, arrangement, utility, physical size, capacity, and performance to those specified. Approval of substitute material will not relieve the contractor from complying with the requirement of the Drawings and



Specifications. The contractor shall be responsible and at his own expense, for any changes caused by proposed substitutions which affect other parts of his own work or the work of other contractors.

C. The submittal of a proposed substitution shall clearly establish the following: 1. The item can be transported into and installed in the intended space and in the manner

shown. 2. Required connections (electrical, piping, and other) can be properly made and adjoining

work can be properly accomplished. 3. The proposed substitute is similar to and of substance equal to that specified, is suited to

the same use as that specified, and will perform the functions required by the design. 4. Motors for proposed substitute equipment will have the same minimum differential between

motor brake horsepower and motor nameplate horsepower as the specified equipment. 5. All performance requirements shall be at least equal to the specified product or equipment

including noise levels, cooling capacity, heating capacity, air flow quantity, etc.

D. By submitting a proposed substitution, the Contractor agrees to the following: 1. He will assume full responsibility for any and all modifications and necessary alterations

arising from the use of the substitute item or material including all cost incurred by all other trades.

2. He will assume full responsibility for any delay in the construction schedule resulting from the use of the substitution.

3. He will prove harmless and indemnify the Owner and the Owner's design consultants from real or alleged damages that may result from the installation, use, or performance of a substitute material or product.

E. The following conditions apply to substitutions: 1. Submittals of substitutions are not and do not become part of the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall not order, fabricate, use, or install any substitute product or procedure

unless he has received acceptance of the substitute from the Engineer. 3. Should the Contractor install any substitute product in violation of the above he shall

remove it and install the specified product at his own expense. 4. The Contractor shall provide a letter stating that all the above items shall apply to all

substituted products and equipment. 5. Any submittal for substituted equipment or product that does not clearly show that the

substituted item is equal shall be marked rejected and no further submittal shall be allowed on the substituted item. Provide in submittal format documentation that the proposed item is exactly as specified in the contract documents.

1.17 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all work for one year from date of acceptance, against all defects in material,

equipment and workmanship including repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment and workmanship. Guarantee shall be on form supplied by the owner's representative.

1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Indicate on reproducible drawings the actual location of all ductwork, piping and equipment as

the work progresses. Dimension locations of underground service mains and branches. Deliver the drawings to the architect at the completion of the job.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop drawings:



1. Make all drawings to an appropriate scale, large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and the method of its connection into the work.

2. Make each drawing sheet in a reproducible form such a tracing, sepia, or Mylar transparency.

B. Grouping: Combine submittals in logical groupings; for example, submit Shop Drawings grouped by Sections of the Specifications, arranged in the specified sequence.

C. Shop Drawings: Four blue or black line prints of each for the Engineer.

D. Content: 1. Shop drawings may be:

a. Drawings or diagrams prepared by the Contractor, a supplier, a manufacturer, or other.

b. Typewritten data or descriptions. c. Manufacturer’s printed brochures, descriptions, charts, instructions, or

data sheets.

E. Timing: Submit all shop drawings prior to installation of any items included in submittal.

2.02 CORROSION PROOFING A. Corrosion Proofing / U.V. Protection: Products which will be installed outdoors, exposed to the

weather, exposed to moisture, or other potentially damaging conditions shall be constructed to resist the effects of such exposure.

B. Exterior casings shall have lapped or gasketed joints effectively sealed to prevent intrusion of moisture or other injurious substances.

C. Casings, ducts, pipes, or product items shall be constructed of materials which are fully resistant to harmful substances they may normally contact, or (if ferrous) shall be galvanized after fabrication, or shall be fully protected from such substances by paint or other coating in appropriate thickness or number of coats.

D. All bolts, nuts, screws, and washers shall be galvanized unless specified to be plated or unprotected.

E. Any exposed plastic pipe must have a U.V. inhibitor.

2.03 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. All material and equipment shall be new, of the type, capacity and quality specified and free

from defects. All materials and equipment shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment wherever possible.

2.04 FILTERS A. A complete set of filters shall be supplied for use during the construction period. A complete set

of new filters shall be installed before testing and balancing.

2.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Unless specified otherwise by the Architect, provide access doors of the following type:

1. Concealed hinges, prime coated with rust-inhibitive paint, style of door to suit wall, ceiling, floor or roof construction and fire rating. a. Milcor

1.) Stainless frame & door panel, with keyed cylinder lock, and hinged door Elmdor/Stonman or equal.

2. Minimum size; 18" by 18". 3. Wall and ceiling access doors: Furnish as required for access to ducts, damper operators,

duct mounted access panels, etc.; coordinate size and location to obtain access.



4. See architectural drawings for further requirements.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Furnish and install miscellaneous equipment and materials required for the systems described

whether or not specifically shown.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. General:

1. Do not install any equipment, valve, control, motor, filter, or any other device requiring maintenance or service in an inaccessible location or position. Install access doors as specified herein to render all such equipment serviceable whether specifically shown on the plans or not. Maintain code clearance to all equipment. Coordinate location of doors with lights, etc., and locate symmetrically with same.

B. Observations: Check all project drawings and specifications; report any discrepancies before proceeding with the work and in time to avoid unnecessary rework.

C. Investigation: Examine the areas, conditions, and status of other work contiguous or connecting to the work to be performed; ensure that the time of installation is coordinated with other work.

D. Interruptions of Service: Portions of this work may involve connection to existing work, facilities, or utilities ties and may require interrupting shutdowns of same. Carefully plan, coordinate and execute such work so that any interruptions will be kept to a minimum in time and occurrence. Submit request for shutdowns and make shutdowns only after receiving written approval from the Owner.

E. Other: Correct any unsatisfactory conditions that may impede proper execution of the work. Ensure that all arrangements, personnel, materials, and tools are appropriate and adequate before proceeding.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. General:

1. Material and equipment incorporated in the work shall be used or applied only for the purpose intended or specified.

2. Install piping and ductwork and all equipment that requires access with minimum vertical and horizontal clearances required by OSHA for service.

3. All mechanical systems such as ductwork, pipes and all other equipment shall have 2 inches minimum clearance.


3.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed instructions,

obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.

B. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by specifications.

C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

D. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Engineer for further instructions.

E. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.



3.04 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCT WORK A. Where job conditions do not permit the installation of piping, ductwork, etc. in the location

shown, it shall be brought to the engineer's attention immediately before fabrication of ductwork, piping, etc. and the relocation required shall be determined in a joint conference.

B. The contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items installed without first obtaining the architect’s or engineer’s approval. Remove and relocate such items at The contractors expense as so directed by the architect or engineer.

C. Where piping or ducting is left exposed within a room, run in vertical or horizontal planes. Maintain uniform spacing between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces.

D. Horizontal runs of plumbing and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide for maximum clearance.

E. Make minor changes in locations of equipment, piping, ducts, etc. from locations shown including minor offsets when directed by the engineer, at no additional cost to the owner.

3.05 CARE AND CLEANING A. Clean and adjust all equipment at completion of installation to provide operating conditions

satisfactory to the engineer. Remove broken, damaged or defective parts; repair or replace as directed by engineer. Remove surface material and debris resulting from this work when directed.

3.06 FLASHINGS A. Furnish and install a waterproof flashing for each pipe, duct, or other penetration through roof or

wall. Flashings shall be 4 lb. seamless lead flashings Semco 1100 series with counter flashing as detailed, except in metal roofs flashing for pipes through roof shall be furnished by the roofing contractor. Where details are not specifically delineated, submit details for review.

3.07 PAINTING A. Painting is included under the Painting and Finishing Section. It shall be the responsibility of the

Mechanical Contractor to properly protect all equipment and controls during painting operations and the Mechanical Contractor shall repair and/or replace any item damaged due to painting that was not properly protected.

3.08 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors to all concealed equipment, valves, controls, etc. Locate doors where

shown or to be coordinated and symmetrically located with lights, diffusers, etc. Access doors furnished by the mechanical contractor shall be installed by the general contractor.

3.09 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide motor starters for each fan motor ¾ horse power and greater. Install at concealed

location providing access door for servicing where required. Coordinate with Division 26.

B. Provide working space around electrical equipment in compliance with the applicable Code and all Safety Orders.

C. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the Electrical Work to comply with the above. Furnish and set in place all motors and duct or pipe installed controls.

D. Location of all new switches shall be verified with the architect or architect before roughing-in. Furnish necessary control diagrams and instruction for the proper installation of the controls.

E. Assume responsibility for the proper supervision and testing of the controls for sequence of operation.



F. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

G. All equipment electrical characteristics shall be as noted on the drawings, or as specified. Verify before ordering any equipment.

H. Before permitting operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed or modified under this contract, review all wiring connections that pertain to mechanical equipment or work, and verify that these connections are correct.

I. Ascertain that the over-load protection devices installed are of the correct type, rating and setting to properly protect this equipment.

3.10 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and

maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.

B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations

and maintenance.

3.11 RECORD DATA

B. Compilation 1. Record and collect information concurrently with construction progress and date all entries;

make drawing entries within 24 hours after occurrence of change or installation requiring recording. Any concealed work covered before recording data shall be uncovered as directed or as necessary to obtain data.

2. Record information on drawing prints using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil); describe clearly by note or graphic line as appropriate.

C. Locate any concealed work adequately to allow future access with reasonable ease and accuracy.

3. Identify the plan location of all stub outs, pipe lines, etc., which are buried or concealed in the structure, whether installed where shown on the contract drawings or in a different location; show actual field dimensions from column lines, wall lines, or other permanent reference lines or points.

4. In many cases on the contract drawings, the arrangement of conduits, pipes, ducts, and similar items is shown schematically rather than as a precise scaled layout. Identify the actual location of these with horizontal and vertical dimensions. If such lines are exposed or readily accessible, omit dimensional identification.

5. When any work is installed of size, dimension, slope, or location different from that shown on the contract drawings, note the deviation on the Project Record set. If the variations are substantial or cannot be shown clearly on the record drawings, make a new drawing and attach to the Record set.

B. On other documents 1. Where changes occur in specifications, clearly indicate same in ink, colored pencil, or

rubber stamp. 2. Where installed equipment differs from that specified (e.g., by accepted substitution or

change order) note in the specifications and include complete data on same.

3.12 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION REVIEW A. A representative of Peters Engineering shall be notified 48 hours prior to request for

construction review site visit. The purpose of notification is so that the required review can be made without delaying construction. When notified, Peters Engineering will advise the contractor if a field review of the construction will be made in 48 hours or that a review will not



be required. If the contractor fails to notify Peters Engineering as required, and/or covers or closes in any construction before required reviews, he may be required to uncover the work for observation.

END OF SECTION


23 0513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SEE SECTION 23 0500

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTOR AND STARTERS A. Motors furnished as part of mechanical equipment shall be of size indicated and shall have

starting torque sufficient to start and drive equipment load to which they are connected.

B. Electric motors shall be NEMA Premium efficiency, Gould "E 3Plus,", or equal. Provide motors with maximum efficiency and power factor at their normal load operating point.

C. Motor enclosures shall be: 1. Open drip proof for general use. 2. Totally enclosed for wet or exterior use. 3. Explosion-proof for hazardous location use.

D. Electric Motors of ¾ HP rating and over, heavy duty, ball bearing, open (drip-proof), squirrel cage induction type, normal starting torque 60 cycle service, 40o F continuous rating, and shall conform in all respects to the latest applicable standard of NEMA and AIEE. Motors up to ¾ HP rating shall have sleeve or ball bearing. Electric motors which are not housed within equipment they serve, shall be stamped for Quiet-Operation. Motors shall be of an Energy Efficient design meeting C.E.C., Title 24.

E. Motor starters and contactors shall be included in the mechanical work.

F. Starters: Starters furnished integral to, or specifically for, mechanical equipment shall be Square D, General Electric, Cutler-Hammer, or equal and shall comply with the following: 1. Enclosures shall be NEMA Standard to suit location/duty:

a. Type 1: general purpose. b. Type 3: rain tight. c. Type 4: watertight. d. Type 7&9: explosion proof.

2. Thermal overload protection devices shall be provided as follows: a. One for single-phase motors. b. Three for three-phase motors. c. One for each ungrounded conductor for each winding of multi-wound or multi-speed

motors. 3. Starters for motors up to 1/2 HP may be manual type if no interlocking is required; pilot light

to indicate ON position is required. 4. Starters for motors up to 30 HP shall be magnetic across-the-line type except as stipulated

above. 5. Starters for motors over 30 HP shall be transition-type magnetic-reduced voltage unless

specified otherwise. Coordinate the characteristics to ensure adequate starting torque and to limit the starting current to a level compatible to the electrical system and acceptable to the utility company/agency.

6. Magnetic starters shall be provided with: a. 120 volt control circuits. b. H-O-A switch in cover. c. Auxiliary contacts for necessary interlocking. d. Integral disconnect switch or circuit breakers for branch circuit, short-circuit and

ground-fault protection.


23 0513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

7. Short-circuit interrupting capacity of starters and disconnects shall be adequate for voltage employed and for current to be interrupted. This may require use of high interrupting capacity breakers or current limiting fuses. If fuses are used, provide three spares for each disconnect.

8. Starters shall be compatible with the motor they control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide working space around electrical equipment in compliance with the applicable Code and

all Safety Orders.

B. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the Electrical Work to comply with the above. Furnish and set in place all motors and duct or pipe installed controls.

C. Location of all new switches shall be verified with the architect or architect before roughing-in. Furnish necessary control diagrams and instruction for the proper installation of the controls.

D. Assume responsibility to insure that all motors are connected with flexible conduit per Division 26 requirements.

E. Assume responsibility for the proper supervision and testing of the controls for sequence of operation.

F. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

G. All equipment electrical characteristics shall be as noted on the drawings, or as specified. Verify before ordering any equipment.

H. Before permitting operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed or modified under this contract, review all wiring connections that pertain to mechanical equipment or work, and verify that these connections are correct.

I. Ascertain that the over-load protection devices installed are of the correct type, rating and setting to properly protect this equipment.

J. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize mechanical equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with the electrical systems so that proper wiring of the equipment involved is affected.

END OF SECTION


23 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SEE SECTION 23 0500

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed alternative methods of attachment for review and approval by the Engineer,

prior to deviating from the requirements given below.

B. For all seismic bracing systems, submit structural calculations and details prepared and signed by the Contractors licensed engineer which include all resultant forces applied to the building structure. Do not overstress building structure. The maximum allowable loads are as indicated in 3.01 of this specification. The submittal data required does not require an analysis of the building structural numbers and their reaction to the loads of the piping. The submittal data needs to address attachment methods and shall include calculations indicating the forces that are applied to the building structure at the point of attachment. Calculations will be reviewed for compliance with design criteria, not for arithmetic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE SUPPORTS A. All pipes within the outer casings shall be supported at not more than 10-foot intervals. These

supports shall be designed to allow for continuous airflow and drainage of the conduit in place. The straight supports shall be designed to occupy not more than 10% of the annular air space. Supports shall be of the type where insulation thermally isolates the carrier pipe from the outer conduit. The surface of the insulation shall be protected at the support by a sleeve not less than 12 inches long, fitted with traverse and, where required, rotational arresters.

2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Building Attachments: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials, UL listing and FM approval for fire-protection systems. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Provide beam clamp retaining straps for all pipe supports where attached to steel beams.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials.

C. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

D. B-Line, finish: Electro-Chromate or hot dipped galvanized. 1. Individual: B3690, B3100 cleavis or B3110

a. Use H-104 all thread rod. b. Use B3110 for pipe subject to movement.

2. Pipe Straps: B2007-B2072 for standard pipe, B2000-B2069, copper coated for copper.

3. For insulated pipe - B3690 pipe hangers sized to allow pipe insulation to pass continuously through the hanger. a. Trapeze Supporting Rods: Diameter sufficient to support the load with a safety

factor of 5. b. Isolators: 319CT or Trisolator.


23 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General

1. Miscellaneous: Provide all supports, anchors, concrete pads, grouting, bedding, bracing, vibration isolation, and accessories required for pumps and other equipment.

2. Support all piping with appropriate manufactured devices as specified use no wire or makeshift device.

3. The engineer prior to installation shall approve all hanger material. 4. Size hanger rods, screws, bolts, nuts, etc., according to manufacturer's recommendations.

Size hangers to fit around bare pipe, isolator, or insulated pipe shield as appropriate. 5. Use cadmium plated or galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other

accessories where exposed to weather. Hot dip galvanize all items which are not factory finished. Plating for hinged movements must be done at factory.

6. Hanger rods with C-clamp type structural attachment shall be equipped with retaining straps.

7. At each support on bare copper tubing or piping system, install an isolator; at each support point on insulated piping systems, install an insulated pipe shield.

8. Burning, welding, cutting, or drilling on any structural member may only be done if approved by the structural engineer.

9. No valve or piece of equipment shall be used to support the weight of any pipe. 10. Provide a hanger close to the point of change of direction of pipe run in either horizontal or

vertical plane. 11. When hangers or supports do not come within one foot of a branch line fitting, install an

additional hanger or support at the fitting.

B. Pipe Supports 1. Horizontal Lines

a. Suspend all horizontal pipes individually and not in contact with the structure except as specified below. Support each branch line with at least one hanger.

C. Parallel pipes may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Size trapeze hangers to support weight of piping plus a surcharge of 300 pounds. For three or more pipes use a size suitable for the load in accordance with manufacturers published load ratings. No deflection to exceed 1/180 of a span. Anchor rods securely to building structure.

END OF SECTION


23 0530 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK

23 05 30 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work in this section.

1.02 SECTIONS INCLUDE A. General: Refer to Section 23 0500, Mechanical - General.

B. Work Included: Provide all ductwork and ductwork accessories, auxiliaries, and adjuncts for all and systems as specified or shown.

C. Work Described Elsewhere: HVAC piping, equipment, and controls are specified in other HVAC Sections.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. All Sections of Division 23.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Air Balancing: Provide submittals for air balancing work as specified in Section 15600 HVAC

General.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL: A. The contractor shall provide all miscellaneous metal to bridge between structural beams to

provide connection for duct supports. As an alternate ductwork may be supported from the roof deck if approved by the owner and structural engineer.

B. Rectangular Ducts (Horizontal): 1. Up to 30" duct width: Two 1-1/8" wide 16 gauge galvanized steel straps bolted to opposite

sides of duct and firmly secured to overhead construction. Each strap must also be turned and screwed to bottom of duct.

C. Round Ducts (Horizontal): 1. Up to 40” in diameter: Two (2) 1 - ½" wide 18 gauge galvanized steel straps, firmly

secured to overhead construction and extending around the entire perimeter of the duct and secured to the duct. Provide bracing to prevent duct sway as specified above for rectangular duct.

D. Vertical Ducts: 1. Rectangular: Unistrut, Powerstrut, P-1000 channel riveted or bolted to side of duct and

secured to the structure at each floor or other such level. 2. Round: Fabricate two-piece angle iron collar, rivet or bolt to duct, secured to structure per

above.

E. Structure Attachments: Grinnell, Elcen, Fig. 282 (with piece of interlocking reinforcing bar) or Fig. 202 as required, provide vibration isolation for all vertical ducts and horizontal ducts per Section 23 0548.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


23 0530 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK

3.01 DUCTWORK SUPPORTS A. Supports

1. Install ductwork in accordance with applicable details, SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems, 1991 ed." recommendations, manufacturer's recommendations, and best practice, coordinate all ductwork support connection with the Structural Engineer.

2. Install ducts rigidly, securely, and air tight. 3. Support ducts independently of ductwork - connected equipment and visa-versa. 4. Ducts shall be vibration isolated as described in 23 05 48: 5. Penetrations:

a. Description: All penetrations of walls separating shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2-inch and a maximum clearance of 3/4 inch.

b. Materials: A minimum 1.5 lbs/cu.ft. fiberglass insulations shall be used and a nonhardening caulking compound.

c. Installation: The opening around the penetration shall be filled loosely with the fiberglass insulation. The opening is then to be sealed airtight with the non-hardening caulking compound. Pipes, ducts, etc., shall be supported on either side of the wall with supports to roof structure.

6. Support of rectangular metal ducts: 7. Support per SMACNA or current local Mechanical Code whichever is more stringent. 8. Support of round metal ducts:

a. Support per SMACNA or current local Mechanical Code whichever is more stringent.

END OF SECTION


23 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT

23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SEE SECTION 23 05 00 A. Furnish and install all systems, units, equipment, and parts to meet or exceed current applicable

requirements for seismic resistance specified by codes, regulations, or agencies having jurisdiction. Include all supports, anchors, braces, and other restraining devices required. All seismic restraints and isolation are the responsibility of the contractor.

B. Design and installation of seismic bracing shall be per UBC Chapter 16.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All isolators furnished under this Section for a given application shall be of a single

manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the equipment.

B. Manufacturers must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to the equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. Wherever possible, all materials and systems specified in this section shall be purchased from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials used.

C. Vibration and Noise: The completed installation must control vibration and noise to the specified limits. Systems equipment, or parts which vibrate or generate vibration unduly or which generate or emit undue noise while in operation shall: (1) be adjusted, repaired, or replaced as appropriate to obtain acceptable levels of vibration or noise, or (2) be supported on or fitted with suppression or absorption devices or means which effectively prevent the transmission of vibration or noise beyond the offending item.

D. The Mechanical subcontractor shall be responsible for meeting the following noise criteria - open office RC-40, conference rooms RC-35, video conference rooms shall be RC-30 if the contractor deviates from the drawings. The general contractor shall hire a sound consultant to test each area to determine that all above-mentioned areas meet the sound criteria. See specification section 15660 HVAC Testing and Balancing.

1.03 SEISMIC RESISTANCE A. Furnish and install all systems, units, equipment, and parts to meet or exceed current applicable

requirements for seismic resistance specified by codes, regulations, or agencies having jurisdiction. Include all supports, anchors, braces and other restraining devices required. All seismic restraints will meet the following site specific seismic design criteria: 1. Seismic Design Category D, 2) Importance Factor, Ip = 1.0) SDS = 0.573 2. Seismic restraints are the responsibility of the contractor.

B. Design of seismic bracing shall meet requirements of CBC Chapter 16A.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data:

1. Provide materials lists, catalog data sheets, manufacturer's drawings and technical literature covering details of all equipment or items specified or shown on drawings.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit plans, elevations and sections and details showing installation, operating heights

and spring constants.


23 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT

C. Project Information:

D. Static seismic calculations for all equipment, piping and miscellaneous structural steel connections to building frame. 1. Calculations shall be performed by a California licensed structural engineer employed by

the isolation manufacturer for a minimum of five years

E. Certification of Seismic restraints include details of materials or methods which depart widely from those specified.

F. All mechanical equipment shall be anchored or braced to meet the horizontal and vertical forces prescribed in the 2016 CBC.

G. The attachment of the following items shall be designed to resist the forces prescribed in 2016 CBC, but need not be detailed on the plans:

H. Equipment weighing less than 400 pounds supported directly on the floor or roof.

I. Furniture required to be attached in accordance with Part 2, Title 24, C.C.R..

J. Temporary or movable equipment.

K. Equipment weighing less than 20 pounds supported by vibration isolators.

L. Equipment weighing less than 20 pounds suspended from a roof or floor or hung from a wall.

M. For those elements that do not require details on the approved drawings, the installation shall be subject to the approval of the Mechanical Engineer and the field representative of the Division of the State Architect.

N. Copies of the manual shall be on the jobsite prior starting hanging and bracing of the pipe and ductwork systems.

O. The structural engineer shall verify the adequacy of the structure to support the hanger and brace loads.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Acceptable manufacturers of vibration and seismic control devices:

B. Mason Industries; Kinetics Noise Control; Flexonic, Metraflex, or equal.

C. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems as specified or indicated on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Duct Flexible Connectors (DFC)

1. Provide at inlet and outlet of each supply and return fan and as shown on drawings. 2. Allow one inch (1") minimum free space between metal collars each side of fabric. 3. Connection shall be nominal six inches (6") wide with material taunt.

END OF SECTION


23 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SEE SECTION 23 05 00

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment: Black Phenolic Plates engraved with 1/2" high white letters. The equipment shall

be identified by the mechanical equipment schedule tag numbers shown on the plans (ie. IEF-1, IEF-2). Coordinate identification numbers with electrical contractor to ensure that the disconnect switches and other electrical/mechanical equipment has consistent identification numbers.

B. Controls: Same as equipment above except 1/2" high letters.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all equipment with permanently attached plates.

B. Identify all controls and controllers except thermostats in finished areas.

END OF SECTION


23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SEE SECTION 23 05 00 A. Work Included: This Section describes balancing requirements for all phases of HVAC work.

The work includes complete balancing, adjusting and testing of the air and hydronic equipment and systems.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC National

Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation only by an AABC or NEBB licensed contractor.

B. Work shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency that specializes in, and whose business is limited to testing and balancing of air conditioning systems.

C. Instruments used for testing and balancing of systems shall have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months and shall be checked for accuracy prior to start of work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide to the Owner and Contractor with four (4) copies of a balancing agenda prior to start of

balancing work including: 1. A complete list of all flow and terminal measurements to be performed. 2. Agenda shall also include specific procedures for determining test parameters for flow.

Specify type of instruments to be used, method of instrument application and air terminal correction factors for: a. Air terminal configuration. b. Flow direction (exhaust). c. Effective area application to each size and type of air terminal. d. Density corrections.

3. Furnish a copy of agenda to the engineer and Owner prior to start of work, including qualifications of key personnel assigned to the project.

B. Provide four (4) copies of final report, (two to the Owner and two to the Contractor) containing information outlined in AABC and in Part 3 - EXECUTION.

1.04 NOTIFICATION AND SCHEDULING A. The Balancing Contractor is responsible for initiating this continuing coordination to determine

schedule for final testing and balancing services.

1.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. To bring the HVAC system into a state of readiness for testing, adjusting and balancing, the

Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Ensure that all dampers are properly located and functional. Dampers serving

requirements of exhaust air shall provide tight closure and full opening, with a smooth and free operation.

2. Verify that all grilles are installed and operational. 3. Ensure that all fans are operating and free of vibration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INSTRUMENT AND TOOLS



A. Furnish all instrumentation and tools required to perform a complete air balance of all systems on this project.

2.02 FLOW METERING SYSTEM A. Use flow metering systems specified and/or furnished to perform air balance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL A. Coordinate required locations of duct test openings and damper locations specified in other

sections.

B. Coordinate work done by testing and balancing agency with work of other trades.

C. Plan Check and Review: 1. Review location and type of volume dampers inlet conditions to air terminals, valves and

HVAC equipment. 2. Review location, type and size of balancing valve, flow metering stations and automatic

control valves in the water flow system. 3. Review location of pressure sensors in the air and water distribution systems. 4. Review automatic control systems as they affect the test and balance procedure. 5. Review sheet metal and piping shop drawings to verify the installation of flow control

devices.

D. Job Site Inspections 1. Identify and report possible restrictions in systems such as poorly installed duct fittings. 2. Check for necessary balancing hardware such as dampers to determine if they are

installed properly and readily accessible.

3.02 TESTING A. Testing equipment shall be furnished by the contractor; testing personnel shall be competent to

conduct the tests.

B. Test all ductwork for excessive leakage and/or noise. Testing on any completed section of the ductwork must be made before installation of the finished ceiling or before the ductwork is furred in inaccessible spaces. Any leaks found must be properly repaired or joints remade and the section retested until tight. Any leaks which cause an objectionable noise must be repaired, regardless of the amount of leakage.

C. Should any piece of an apparatus or any material or work fail in any of the tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by new material, and portion of the work replaced shall again be tested by Contractor at his own expense.

3.03 OPERATIONAL TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Coordination of all items associated with the mechanical systems is the responsibility of the

mechanical contractor, including all wiring in connection with mechanical equipment. It shall be this contractor's responsibility to determine that his systems, equipment and apparatus are properly wired and controlled and completely ready for satisfactory operation and test.

B. Operating and any safety controls shall be tested at least three times, under ambient design conditions.

C. AIR BALANCE

D. Changes, additions and modifications to dampers and other equipment necessary for proper air balance shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.



E. The Mechanical Contractor shall retain the services of an independent certified test and balance agency to provide a complete air balance. All work shall be done by using instruments certified accurate to limits used in standard practice for testing and balancing of air distribution for heating-cooling systems.

F. Study design specifications and engineering drawings and prepare schedule to physically inspect mechanical equipment for air distribution systems to be tested and balanced.

G. Prepare test and balancing schedule, test record forms and necessary technical information about the fan systems, for complete total air balance.

H. Recommend adjustments and/or corrections to mechanical equipment and air distribution systems that are necessary for proper balancing of air handling systems.

I. Upon completion of the exhaust systems, the Air Balance Agency shall complete tests, analysis and balance of the systems. The Air-Balance Agency then shall submit four copies of balance report to the Mechanical Contractor for forwarding to the Architect for evaluation and approval.

J. Air Balance Report shall include the following data 1. Design specifications of equipment

a. CFM b. Static Pressure c. Fan Motor HP d. Fan Motor BHP e. Fan RPM

2. Installed equipment data a. Manufacturer b. Identifying Data

3. Balancing test data a. Fan Speed b. Fan Operating amperes c. Fan Operating BHP d. Fan Duct sizes e. Air Velocity (avg.) f. Total CFM g. Static Pressures h. Design Specifications of grilles i. Manufacturer No. and Data j. FPM k. CFM

4. Installed equipment data a. Manufacturer No. and Data b. Location

5. Balancing test data a. FPM b. CFM

K. Exhaust air dampers shall be set for design CFM for each duct branch.

L. Motor and Starters 1. Measure the ampere reading of each motor input after final adjustments have been made.

3.04 OWNERS INSTRUCTION A. Review the installation of all equipment and controls with the Owner after all systems are

operating automatically. Instruct the Owner in the adjustment of all control and equipment devices. Allow a minimum of 8 hours for this instruction.

END OF SECTION


23 0900 - 1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. All Sections of Division 23

1.02 SUMMARY A. General: All heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All HVAC equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest

edition.

B. Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.


the structural engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Miscellaneous equipment not specified herein shall be furnished as scheduled on the drawings.

2.02 CONTROLS A. General: The control system products shall consist of the following switching and speed control

devices: 1. Concessions:

a. Marktime 93306; 0-6 hour wall-mounted manual timed switch, for on/off operation. b. Greenheck accessory wall mounted soild state speed controller; for user limited fan

speed control. 2. Restroom:

a. Intermatic mechanical dial time clock for manual setting of on/off schedule. Wall mounted time clock in the Custodial closet.

B. Control Wiring and Conduit for the control equipment in accordance with the wiring diagrams and the functional operation of the control system shall be the responsibility of the control subcontractor. The control contractor in accordance with Division 26, local codes and the C.E.C shall install all control wiring. All control wiring shall be in conduit, concealed in walls or slab or above ceiling. Line voltage control wiring and low voltage control wiring shall be Type THHN/THWN wire per C.E.C.

C. Electrical Power Wiring and connections to motors and control equipment and panels shown on the temperatures control diagrams or specified, will be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor performing this work.

D. After completion of the installation, the control Sub-Contractor shall regulate and adjust all time locks other equipment provided under this contract.


23 0900 - 2 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

E. Guarantee: Entire system shall be guaranteed for one year without charge to the Owner from the date of acceptance of the completed building. Form of Guarantee subject to Owner approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General

1. Perform testing, calibration and demonstrations as specified in other HVAC Sections.

END OF SECTION


23 3113 - 1 METAL DUCTS

23 3113 METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply the work in this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. General: Refer to Section 23 05 00, Mechanical - General.

B. Work Included: Provide all ductwork and ductwork accessories, auxiliaries, and adjuncts for all and systems as specified or shown.

C. Work Described Elsewhere: HVAC piping, equipment, and controls are specified in other HVAC Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT WORK A. Requirements

1. Shop Fabricated Ductwork a. Fabricate ductwork as required by classification as described below or gauges, and of

configuration and sizes shown on the Drawings. Note that duct sizes shown are net inside; where ducts are lined, fabricate larger than shown to accommodate lining with shown dimensions net inside lining.

b. Fabricate ducts and fittings as shown on drawings, or if not detailed, fabricate in accordance with SMACNA.

c. Fabricate ducts with adequate cross-bracing or reinforcing to prevent drumming; should drumming subsequently occur, provide additional reinforcement as necessary to overcome same.

d. Construct ducts to provide smooth passage for the conducted air, laying edges exposed to the airstream in the direction of air flow.

e. Fabricate elbows or other fittings for changing direction of duct with a centerline radius equal to 1.5 times the duct width unless shown otherwise or necessitated by space restrictions. Where square or short radius turns are shown or required, fit with air turning vanes.

f. Fabricate diverging transitions with side slopes of 1:6; fabricate converging transitions with side slopes of 1:2. Greater slopes may be used only where space restriction prohibits specified slopes.

2. Factory fabricated ductwork construction shall conform to applicable requirements stipulated above for shop fabricated ductwork.

B. Galvanized Steel Ductwork (GSD) 1. Rectangular Cross Section

a. Shop fabricated of prime grade lock seam for quality galvanized steel sheet in accordance with requirements stipulated above and fitted with auxiliaries and accessories as specified below and shown on the drawings.

2. Low Pressure Ductwork, up to 2" static pressure and 2,500 fpm: 3. Rectangular Duct: GSD gauge per SMACNA or C.M.C whichever is more stringent. 4. Round Duct: As manufactured by United McGill Corp or equal. Uni-Rib, UNIRIB DUCT

machine formed, spiral lock seam construction spot welded and bonded seams with an intermediate standing rib for rigidity. Slip joint construction couplings with a minimum of 2" insertion length. GSD gauge per SMACNA or C.M.C whichever is more stringent.

5. Fittings: (except elbows) machine formed using SMACNA RL-1 seams with seal class B.



6. Plenums: Fabricate cross-brake panels and stiffen with galvanized steel angle iron members. Provide duct access doors as specified below and as shown on drawings.

7. Elbows: fittings shall have a wall thickness not less than that specified for longitudinal straight ducts as shown in Table 3-2 and 3-3, SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 4" - 8" two piece, die stamped with fully welded longitudinal seam; 9" - 30", segmented standing seam construction; 31" - 36", segmented construction with joint spot welded and bonded. Each segmented elbow shall have the number of segments as indicated by Table 3-1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible for above 1500 fpm.

C. Conical Fittings: 1. Low pressure:

a. All conical fittings shall be constructed with a minimum 2” flare around entire perimeter and a minimum 1:2 slope unless noted otherwise.

D. 45 degree entry fittings: 1. All 45 degree entry fittings shall be constructed per SMACNA HVAC Construction

Standards Metal And Flexible, figure 2-6.

E. Provide ¾” thick fiberglas blanket wrap insulation on exhaust air duct for prevention of condensation on duct exterior. Provide continuous wrap stapled with 3” overlap.

2.02 DUCTWORK ADJUNCTS A. Intake/Exhaust Screens: Provide ½” mesh 18 gauge galvanized iron bird screens at all exterior

openings in mechanical system except where provided by others.

B. Duct Penetrations: 1. Where ducts penetrate fire separations in the building, provide fire dampers or smoke/fire

dampers as specified, shown and required by code. 2. Where ducts penetrate roof or exterior walls, provide 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal

flashing and counterflashing; solder all joints and make watertight, including under all air handlers, around all duct work penetrations, and exhaust fans.

C. Sealants 1. Design Polymerics DP1020, Ductmate PROseal high velocity duct sealant, Childers CP-

146/CP-148, Fosters 32-19/32-17, or equal, UL 723, ASTM E-84 2. Low Shrinkage, flexible, and mildew resistant conforming to NFPA 90A and 90B

D. Tapes and Adhesives: 1. Pressureless Tapes: Hardcast, 4" wide Type DT 5400 mineral impregnated woven fiber

tape with manufacturer's FTA-20 activator/adhesive (indoors) and RTA-50 activator/adhesive (outdoors), applied with brush or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

E. Transverse Duct Connections: 1. Traverse Joints: Ductmate or WDCI proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted.

Ductwork constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements. TDC/TDF/T-24 shall be constructed as a SMACNA T-24 flange.

2. The Ductmate companion angle with an integral polymer mastic seal shall be securely fastened to the duct walls using self-drilling screws, rivets or spot welding. Fastener spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the size or duct and the pressure class. The raw duct ends shall be properly seated in the integral mastic seal. A continuous strip of closed cell gasket tape, size 1/4" x 3/4", shall be installed between the mating flanges of the companion angles at each transverse joint, and the joint shall be made up using 3/8" diameter x 1" long plated bolts and nuts. Drive-on or snap-on cleats shall be used at spacings as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. The Ductmate system shall not be used for applications with duct gauges heavier than 16 gauge or lighter than 26 gauge.



4. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh Lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with a mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Galvanized Steel Ductwork (GSD): Except where specified or shown otherwise, use (GSD)

conforming to requirements (Part 2), or cross section configuration shown, in all locations (indoor/outdoor, above/below grade, concealed/exposed).

3.02 DUCTWORK A. Pressure-Velocity Classification:

1. All general exhaust ductwork: a. All ductwork shall be constructed per SMACNA static pressure class of negative -2”

and a velocity of 2500 FPM. b. Seal all joints and seams on all ducts and plenums per SMACNA seal class B.

Pressure sensitive tapes are not allowed.

B. Broken places in galvanized coating made in forming shall be completely covered with galvanized paint.

C. All ductwork shall comply with the C.M.C and the local jurisdiction’s addendum.

D. Ducts shall be reinforced in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005 (low pressure and medium pressure, where shown on drawings). Duct shall be diagonally creased on all four sides. Seams shall be double crimped, bent and elbows shall be made with the throat radius of all bends 12" diameters of the width of the duct wherever possible and in no case shall the throat radius be less than one diameter of the branch duct. Where space does not permit the above radius or where square elbows are indicated on the drawings, they shall be equipped with turning vanes of an approved type for low velocity ducts. Medium velocity ducts shall not use turning vanes and shall not use square elbows unless shown otherwise. Use Ductmate closure systems for all round and rectangular ducts.

E. Transition pieces in the ducts shall have the sides sloped approximately one to five and no abrupt changes or offsets of any kind in the duct system will be permitted. Round to round take-offs shall be made with 45° wye fittings.

F. Ductwork Auxiliaries 1. Flexible Connectors

a. Install duct sections being fitted with a flexible connector with a 3" minimum gap between the ends being bridged by the flexible connector. Provide a generous fold in connector to allow for movement; staple and seal closure.

G. Access and Inspection Panels and Doors 1. Install wall and ceiling access panels required for access to damper operators; and

coordinate size and location to obtain good access.

H. Paint the inside of ductwork visible through grilles and registers dull black.

I. Furnish and install 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 3/16" closure angles around all exposed ducts through walls and ceilings. (Both sides)

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General

1. Perform testing and provide demonstrations as specified in other HVAC Sections..

B. Duct Cleaning



1. Clean all ductwork in the shop prior to shipping. All ductwork shall be transported to the site in covered vans to eliminate contamination or shall be sealed prior to shipment and shall be protected from contamination at the site.

2. After fabrication, and during and after installation, seal sections of open ductwork with plastic sheeting to prevent the intrusion of dirt and debris.

3. After installation is complete, but before balancing and final connections are made, and with construction filters in place, blow clean all ductwork with the system fans operating at full air volume.

C. Inspections: Evidence of poor fabrication or installation, as disclosed by job site test and balance data, will be cause for rejection; replacement or repair of defective work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND FINISHING A. General: Comply with requirements of Part 3, 23 0500. Adjust fan speeds as necessary.

END OF SECTION


23 3313 - 1 DAMPERS

23 3313 DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 23 05 00, General Mechanical Requirements applies to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All HVAC equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title-24, Part 6, latest

edition.

B. Comply with UL 1/81 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DAMPERS A. Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Round Ductwork 16” and smaller (low pressure): a. Butterfly type, volume dampers. b. Provide locking mechanism shall be provided on either the quadrants or end bearings.

Ventlock or equal. Damper blade shall be a minimum of 22 gauge, but not less than two gauges more than the duct gauge.

c. All duct penetrations shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage. d. Provide stand-offs as required for specified insulation thickness (see section 23 07 13. e. Continuous 3/8” min rod shall be provided. f. In locations where ducts are exposed use Ventlok #688 damper regulator for low

pressure applications. 2. Rectangular Ductwork 12” high dimension and smaller (low pressure):

a. Rectangular volume dampers shall be Air Balance #111 or equal. 3. Rectangular Ductwork larger than 12” high dimension (low pressure):

a. Rectangular volume dampers shall be Air Balance #AC-2 or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DAMPERS A. Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in

SMACNA standards.

B. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.

C. Ductwork shall comply with Chapter 6 C.M.C.

D. Balancing Dampers 1. Provide balancing dampers (same as volume dampers specified in this section) where

shown on drawings and any other locations required to achieve proper system air balance. See drawings for general locations.

2. Damper operators shall be installed either to side or bottom of ductwork. 3. Provide ceiling access as specified at 23 0500.

END OF SECTION


23 3343 - 1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

23 3343 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 23 05 00, General Mechanical Requirements applies to this section

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All HVAC equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest

edition.

B. Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Flexible Connectors: Ventlok, flexible fabric, Duralon Flexible fabric with Metalfab connectors at

connections to fans and air handling equipment. 1. Comply with UL 181, Class 1. 2. Minimum fabric weight 26 oz. / sq. yd. ± 2 oz., thickness 0.019". 3. Ventfabrics Inc. Ventlon, or equal, for exterior applications, resistant to sunlight, ozone and

weather. 4. Ventfabrics Inc. Ventglass, or equal, for interior applications. 5. Complies with Underwriters Laboratories Standard # 214 for fire retardancy, and is

accepted by the National Fire Protection Association for vibration isolation connectors in duct systems as covered by Paragraph 2-1.2.3 NFPA Bulletin #90A.

6. Bonding Agent, Ventfabrics # 655 Adhesive or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DUCTWORK AUXILIARIES A. Flexible Connectors

1. Install duct sections being fitted with a flexible connector with a 3" minimum gap between the ends being bridged by the flexible connector. Provide a generous fold in connector to allow for movement; staple and seal closure.

2. Provide 26-gauge galvanized steel weather shield on top and sides of flexible duct connectors for outdoor installations. Install weather shield at same time as flexible connectors; unprotected flexible connections will be replaced with new connectors at contractor's expense if the weather shields are installed at a subsequent time.

3. Ductwork shall be supported separately from the fan within 3 feet of the flexible connection.

END OF SECTION


26 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide electrical systems as shown and specified, including wiring and connections to certain equipment provided by others and any work not specifically noted but that can be reasonably inferred or is necessary to provide a complete functional system.

B. Section Includes: 1. Electrical equipment coordination. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical requirements.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 070690 Joint Sealants B. Section 078400 Firestopping

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-Butadiene rubber. C. CBC: California Building Code 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. General

1. A submittal schedule shall be issued by the Contractor within 15 days of award of the contract. This schedule shall allow for timely review and approval as required by the contract documents.

2. The Contractor shall review all submittals prior to submission to the University’s Representative. Submittals not reviewed by the Contractor will be returned to the Contractor and will not be reviewed.

3. Any deviations from specified requirements shall be clearly indicated in submittals.


5. Partial or incomplete submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements; the Contractor shall be liable for resultant consequences.




9. Within 15 calendar days after award of the contract, and before fabrications and provision of any material or ordering of any materials, submit for approval six (6) copies of complete submittal data on specified and proposed substituted equipment and materials. Submittals shall list all materials proposed, identified



with drawing symbols and specific data on equipment such as arrangements, performance curves, sizes, capacity, motor locations, and other pertinent data. Submit only one manufacturer for each item included in the submittal package. Check all submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Construction Documents before forwarding to the University’s Representative for each item. No consideration will be given to substitutions submitted past 15 day limit. The contractor shall be responsible for all quantities and errors and omissions of submittals. Provide samples when requested.

10. Equipment and materials specified as part of the specifications and drawings are listed by at least three manufacturer’s names. The first named manufacturer is the basis of design. The other named manufacturers have been determined to be an equivalent in quality or utility. The second, third, etc., manufacturers named have not been specifically determined to conform to the first named in size, layout, electrical power, voltage, or impacts to building structure. The Contractor is bound by all requirements for substitutes, as described below, for all other named manufacturers and equivalent equipment or products.

11. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below.

12. American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) Compliant Products shall be considered as a basis for manufacturer acceptance on this project. Proof of compliance shall accompany product data submitted and will be considered incomplete if not included.

13. Acceptance of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for omissions from the submittal or errors in the submittal.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Contractor is responsible for receipt of delivery, storage, protection and placing of all

equipment and materials. B. Protection: Contractor shall protect from damage during construction, work and materials

of other trades as well as electrical work and material. Electrical equipment stored or placed on job site shall be protected from dust, water, or any other damage.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE A. The Contractor is held to have visited the site, checked existing conditions, and be

satisfied as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed before submitting bid. No allowances shall be made in the Contractor's behalf for any extra expense to which the Contractor may be put due to failure or neglect to discover conditions affecting the scope of work.

1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other systems.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit positioned at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be

clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate placement of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place

concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. 1.08 RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of California Code of Regulation, Title 24 California Building Standards Code, National Electrical Code, Local City and County Code, applicable regulations of local utility



companies, E.U.S.E.R.C. Standards, and General Order 95 of the Public Utilities Commission, and any other applicable laws or regulations.

B. Nothing in these drawings or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to the above codes.

C. Drawings and/or specifications shall take precedence when work and material called for exceed code requirements.

1.09 WORKMANSHIP A. Good workmanship shall be evidenced in the placement of all electrical materials and

equipment. Equipment shall be level, plumb and true with the structure and other equipment. All materials shall be firmly secured in place and adequately supported and permanent. The requirements of the codes are minimum standards. The recommendations of the National Electrical Contractors Association Standards shall be followed except where otherwise specifically directed.

1.10 CLEANING A. After all other work such as plastering, painting, etc., has been accomplished, lighting,

panelboards, switchboards, and all other electrical equipment shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease, plaster, paint or other marks.

1.11 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Provide all necessary electrical connections to all equipment provided by others. Obtain

specific power and control wiring requirements and connection points from others to perform electrical work. Contractor shall assist in testing equipment but responsibility is limited to correctly wiring and terminating electrical connections.

B. All control wiring for mechanical space conditioning and ventilation equipment, both line and low voltage, shall be provided in the mechanical work, except for line voltage control wiring for exhaust fan switches which shall be in the electrical work. Disconnect switches and motor starters shall be provided by Contractor.

1.12 SEISMIC RESISTANCE A. Provide systems, units, equipment, and parts to meet or exceed current applicable

requirements for seismic resistance specified by codes, regulations, or agencies having jurisdiction. Include supports, anchors, braces, and other restraining devices required. Seismic restraints shall meet the local Seismic Zone requirements, SMACNA, and California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 16a, which are the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Design of seismic bracing will be per CBC Chapter 16. 1.13 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS

A. Follow manufacturer's directions where these directions cover points not included on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

1.14 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide conduit, conductors, disconnects, and connections for power and

controls for equipment requiring electrical services. 1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall provide one set of clean "record" marked black line prints to the University’s Representative at completion showing clearly any changes made during construction. Changes including the result of RFI’s or field directives shall be included in this record set. It will not be acceptable to cut and paste the drawing changes to this set.


A. Unless otherwise noted, all material and equipment shall be new, of the type, capacity and quality specified and free from defects. Material shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the Underwriters' Laboratories or Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).



B. Unless specified otherwise, materials and equipment shall be manufactured and assembled in the United States of America. Materials shall be of the same brand or manufacture throughout for each class of material or equipment wherever possible.

C. Equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer who has, for a period of not less than five (5) years, been in successful manufacture of the equipment and who has a nationally distributed catalog covering ratings and specifications of said equipment.

2.02 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized

steel, plain ends. B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no

side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50

inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.03 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.04 RACEWAYS

A. Exposed runs shall be neatly placed parallel or at right angles to the structural members. B. Pull Wires: Provide #12 in empty conduits 1 inch and smaller and 3/16 inch

polypropylene rope in conduits 1-1/4 inch and larger. C. Cap Conduits: Keep conduits capped until wires are pulled. Use manufacturer plugs and

caps, push-penny plugs of flexible plastic or steel pennies under bushings. D. Conduit Penetrations: Provide seamless lead flashing where conduits penetrate the roof,

consisting of lead flashing and cast iron counter-flashing. Flashing shall be Semco 1100 Series, Stoneman or equal. Where conduits pass through finished walls, provide steel escutcheon plates, chrome or painted as directed. Conduits which penetrate ceiling or floor slabs and concrete or masonry walls shall be grouted and sealed watertight at penetration.

E. Underground Conduit Stub Marker: Mark location of all underground conduit stubs. Provide capped conduit stake at end of stub with non-corrosive tag identifying source of stub. Set stake flush with final grade after University’s Representative has been shown location. Extend all conduit stubs a minimum of 5 feet -0 inches beyond concrete footings, curbs or sidewalks, etc. Provide exact dimensions on record drawings for all stub locations. Cap ends of stubs.



1. Prior to backfilling trenches, ground work, etc., Contractor shall record video raceways 2 inches and larger. Submit video to University’s Representative in mpg, mov or wmv format for review.

2.05 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COOPERATION

A. Coordinate work with that of all construction trades and Contractors on the job for an efficient and effective completion of the project. Refer to the contract documents of other trades for construction details.

3.02 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL A. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center

of unit for wall-mounting items. B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

locate components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. 1. Adequate working space shall be provided around electrical equipment in strict

compliance with the Electrical Safety Orders. In general provide six and one-half feet of headroom and thirty-six inches minimum clear work space in front of panelboards and controls for 120/208 volt equipment, and forty two inches for 277/480 volt equipment.

C. Equipment: Placement shall facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby infrastructure. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

D. Right of Way: Give to piping systems with slope requirements. 3.03 SLEEVES FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Provide sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Provide sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall

assemblies unless openings compatible with Firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves penetrating floors 2 inches above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 070690 "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Provide sleeves and seal



raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Above ground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve and provide mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Provide cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve and provide mechanical sleeve seals.

3.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical

infrastructure to restore or maintain fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and execution requirements are specified in Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before any fixtures or

equipment are connected and where such tests indicate faulty insulation or other defects, they shall be located, repaired and tested again at the Contractor's expense. Electrical loads shall be balanced at the panelboards and motors shall be checked for correct rotation.

B. Contractor shall perform the following applicable tests and inspections for the equipment specified in the drawings unless noted otherwise and results issued in written form prior to final punch of project: 1. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 100 AMP FRAMES AND LARGER

a. Items Inspected: 1) Proper mounting and alignment. 2) Proper conductor type and size. 3) Proper feeder designation. 4) Smooth operation. 5) Defects. 6) All line, load, control and mounting connections torqued to

proper values recommended by manufacturer. In the absence of manufacturers torque values refer to Table 1 herein this specification.

2. INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST SPECIFICATIONS – Cables – Low voltage to 600 volts maximum. a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1) Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single line diagram.

2) Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer’s recommended values with a calibrated torque wrench. In absence of manufacturer’s data use Table 1.

3) Check cable color-coding with applicable University’s Representative’s specifications and National Electrical Code standards.

b. Electrical Tests: 1) Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor including

neutral with respect to ground and adjacent conductors before



connecting to equipment. Applied potential to be 1000 volts dc for one (1) minute withstand test, per NETA ATS-1987.

2) Perform continuity test on all power equipment branch and feeder circuit conductors. Verify proper cable connection and phasing.

c. Test Values: 1) Minimum insulation resistance values shall be not less than 50

megohms. C. Notify University’s Representative in advance prior to project completion. At such time,

arrange an operating test for approval and/or schedule for electrical apparatus testing by a third party testing company. Demonstrate equipment to be in conformance with applicable Codes and operate in accordance with Requirements of this Section of the Specifications. Provide all instruments and personnel required for test.

Table 1

U.S. Standard

Bolt Torques for Bus Connections

Heat Treated Steel – Cadmium or Zinc Plated GRADE SAE SAE SAE SAE

1 & 2 5 6 8 Minimum

Tensile (P.S.I.)

64K

105K

133K

150K Bolt Diameter Torque (Foot Pounds)

1/4 4.0 5.6 8.0 8.4 5/16 7.2 11.2 15.2 17.6 3/8 12.0 20.0 27.2 29.6 7/16 19.2 32.0 44.0 48.0 1/2 29.6 48.0 68.0 73.6 9/16 42.4 70.4 96.0 105.6 5/8 59.2 96.0 133.6 144.0 3/4 96.0 160.0 224.0 236.8 7/8 152.0 241.6 352.0 378.4 1. 225.6 372.8 528.0 571.2

END OF SECTION 26 05 00


26 0519 - 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 05 19 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


A. Section includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding B. Section 260529 Hangers and Supports C. Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes D. Section 260553 Identification E. Section 262200 Low Voltage Transformers F. Section 262413 Switchboards G. Section 262416 Panelboards H. Section 262816 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers I. Section 265100 Interior Lighting J. Section 280513 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. C. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with of Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data and

Samples. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All conductors and cable shall comply with the applicable standards of Underwriter’s

Laboratories, Inc. B. Testing of conductors and cables by Contractor. C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 1 of the following: 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Or Equal

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70 – Power cables rated 2000 volts or less.



1. Conductors #10 AWG and Smaller shall be solid copper, 98 percent conductivity except for control wires.

2. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper, 98 percent conductivity.

3. Stranded Copper, #12 AWG minimum, except for control circuits which may be #14 AWG minimum. Signal and control circuits other than mechanical shall be as indicated on Drawings or as required by equipment manufacturers.

C. Conductor Insulation: All insulation shall be 600 V minimum except for low voltage 50 volts and less. Fixture tap and branch circuit wiring within fixture wireways shall be Type THHN 90 degrees Centigrade. Control wiring #14 and smaller shall be Type THHN/THWN. Insulation for bonding and grounding conductors shall be Type THWN except as noted on the Drawings.

D. All conductors, unless noted in the Drawings otherwise, shall be Type THHN/THWN. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 1 of the following: 1. Burndy, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 6. Or Equal

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 1. Splices for conductors #8 AWG and smaller use pre-insulated pressure type

(with live spring) rated 105 degrees Centigrade, 600 V for building wire and 1000 V in signs or fixtures.

2. Splices for conductors #6 AWG and larger use compression type connector, Burndy type YS long barrel or equal, requiring the use of a 360 degree circumference compression type tool. Wire splicing devices shall be sized according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Compression splices shall be insulated with a tape wrap using Scotchtape No. 88 or equal.

4. Use Scotchfill or equal around large or irregular shape splices for insulation build-up and Scotchtape No. 88 or equal.

5. In outdoor locations and below grade all sizes shall be compression type with heat shrink style watertight splice covers.

2.03 WIRING PULLING LUBRICANT A. Minerallac Pull-in compound, Y-ER-EAS wire pulling lubricant, Poly-water, or other UL

Listed lubricant. Flax soap is not approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Color code all branch circuits and feeders as noted in Section 260553 Identification. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.



C. Code size ground wire shall be provided in all raceways, secured using approved methods to each pull box, junction box, and equipment housing.

D. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain-relief device at terminations to suit application.

E. Class 1 and Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.03 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. All wiring shall be in raceways. B. Swab conduits before installing cables, and exercise care in pulling to avoid damage or

disarrangement of conductors. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Mount exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 Hangers and Supports. 3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Provide conductor pigtails at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After conductors and cables are placed and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test each conductor including the neutral with respect to ground and adjacent conductors before connecting to equipment. a. Megger and record insulation resistance of all 600 volt insulated

conductors, size #4/0 AWG and larger using a 500 volts dc megger for 1 minute. Make tests with circuits isolated from source and load.

2. Perform continuity test on all power equipment branch and feeder circuit conductors. Verify proper cable connection and phasing.

3. Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than 2 megaohms. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



26 0523 - 1 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES


A. Section includes low voltage cabling for controls 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Section 017800 Close Out Submittals B. Section 061000 Rough Carpentry C. Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes D. Section 260553 Identification E. Section 260943 Network Lighting and Controls F. Section 265100 Interior Lighting

1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. UTP 2. RS-485 cabling. 3. Low-voltage control cabling. 4. Control-circuit conductors. 5. Identification products.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than

50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. F. TIA/EIA. Telecommunications Industry Association cabling standards G. NRTL. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. H. BICSI. Building Industry Consulting Service International I. RCDD. Registered Communications Distribution Designer J. NECA. National Electrical Contractor’s Association K. UL. Underwriter’s Laboratory L. TDMM. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual


Samples. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, Placement supervisor, and field

inspector. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals in accordance

with Section 017800 Close-out Submittals.



1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not provide UTP and optical fiber cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, and 2-1/2

inches deep. 2.02 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, ¾ inches by 48 inches by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 Rough Carpentry.

2.03 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Draka USA. 5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 6. KRONE Incorporated. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M. 12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 13. Or, Equal.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into paired groupings as noted in the drawings with binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.



3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CMP b. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX

2.04 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 2. Dynacom Corporation. 3. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 4. KRONE Incorporated. 5. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The). 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 11. Or, Equal.

B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110 style for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

2.05 RS-485 CABLE A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM

1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.06 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Two pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.



3. Unshielded. 4. Plastic jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.07 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF,

complying with UL 83. 2.08 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. HellermannTyton. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Or, Equal.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 Identification. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Placement of conduits and wireways.

C. Provide manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows. D. Pathway Placement in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is provided or in the corner of room if multiple sheets of plywood are provided around perimeter walls of room.

2. Provide cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 5. Provide metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding

conductor to grounding system. E. Backboards: Provide backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets

tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."



2. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

3. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Provide lacing bars and distribution spools.

5. Do not provide bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during Placement and replace it with new cable.

6. Cold-Weather Placement: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

7. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Placement: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Provide 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry. D. Placement of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Provide wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes.

E. Open-Cable Placement: 1. Provide cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications

spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts,

or other potentially damaging items. F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2

inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6




4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3


5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.03 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. 3.04 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 18 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG.

3.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Section 078400 Firestopping."

3.06 GROUNDING A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM,

"Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526

Grounding and Bonding. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in

TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.



C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE A. Section includes:

1. Grounding systems and equipment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables B. Section 260553 Identification C. Section 262200 Low Voltage Transformers D. Section 262413 Switchboards E. Section 262416 Panelboards F. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Rooms G. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling H. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling I. Section 280513 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security J. Section 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NETA: International Electrical Testing Association B. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory C. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association D. ASTM B 3: Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire E. ASTM B 33: Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire


Samples. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor to perform testing per NETA standards. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code and authority having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

2.02 GROUND ELECTRODES



A. Copper clad steel rods, 1 inch diameter by 10 feet with pointed end, driven to a depth where the rod top is not less than 6 inches below finished grade at the equipment pad.

B. Metallic Piping: A connection to the interior metal piping system. 2.03 GROUND BUSES

A. Provide a ground bus at each service distribution panel for joining the ground connections.

2.04 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to the University’s Representative for

applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least 2 bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. To Ground Rods: Exothermic weld, Cadweld or equal, utilizing weld molds of the type and size recommended by the weld manufacturer.

D. To Ground Buses and to Equipment: Pressure indented copper cable terminal, 1 hole: Burndy HYLUG, T&B Blue, or equal. Provide with inch galvanized or cadmium plated steel machine bolts with beveled washer on each side.

E. Ground Cable Splices: Exothermic weld, Cadweld, or equal, utilizing molds of the type and size recommended by the weld manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Provide stranded conductors unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe Conductor Terminations: Bolted mechanical clamps listed for the application.

2. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: NEMA drilled 2-Hole compression lug connectors.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

3.03 GROUND ELECTRODES A. Protect rod top with a driving tool while driving to prevent deformation or other damage.

3.04 CONDUCTOR ROUTING A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless

otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

3.05 LABELING A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 Identification for instruction signs. The label

or its text shall be green. B. Place labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and

at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any

reason, notify the University’s Representative." 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor to provide the services of an independent testing agency to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment placement, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections:



1. After placement of grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Grounding test shall be by fall of potential method. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 KVA and less: 10 ohms. 2. Power Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 KVA: 5 ohms. 3. Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify University’s Representative promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 3 Concrete B. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables C. Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes D. Section 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls E. Section 262413 Switchboards F. Section 262416 Panelboards G. Section 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers H. Division 27 Communications I. Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit. C. RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit. D. MFMA-4: Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Standards for Metal Framing

Channels E. NECA 1: National Electrical Contractors Association Standard Practice of Good

Workmanship F. NECA 101: National Electrical Contractors Association Standard for Installing Steel

Conduits G. MSS SP 58: Manufacturers Standards Society, Standards for Materials, Design,

Manufacture, Selection, Application and Installation H. ASTM A325: American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard Specification for

Structural Bolts I. ASTM A780: Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip

Galvanized Coatings J. CBC: California Building Code, 2010 Edition K. NFPA 70: California Electrical Code, 2010 Edition

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic bracing shall meet requirements of CBC Chapter 16A.


Samples. B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.



1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of conduit and equipment supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 1

of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. e. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. f. Or equal

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and

associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items

or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Hilti Inc. 3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 4) Or equal

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

5. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel, 1/2 inch minimum.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/2 inch in diameter.

B. Multiple Raceways: Provide trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways to these supports with 2-bolt conduit clamps.

3.02 SUPPORTS A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Pounds.

B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 3. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with

MSS SP-69. 4. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 5. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

C. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.03 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after

erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



26 0533 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES


A. Section includes: 1. Raceways 2. Fittings 3. Boxes 4. Enclosures 5. Cabinets for electrical wiring

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 078400 Firestopping B. Section 099100 Painting C. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables D. Section 260523 Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables E. Section 260529 Hangers and Supports F. Section 260553 Identification G. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Rooms H. Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling I. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. RMC: Rigid metal (steel) conduit C. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit D. PVC: Poly Vinyl Chloride – SCH 40 E. NFPA 70: California Electrical Code, 2007 Edition


Samples. B. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. EMT: 1. Shall be galvanized steel, thin wall. Maximum trade size to be used shall be 4

inch. May not be used underground, under floor, exposed to weather, in concrete, or in any location subject to physical damage.

2. Connectors shall be steel rain-tight compression type requiring the tightening of a nut, with insulated throat. Couplings shall be steel rain-tight compression type,



requiring the tightening of a nut up to 2 inches. Fittings larger than 2 inches shall be threaded type.

B. RMC: 1. Standard weight, mild steel pipe, heavy wall, with threaded fittings, zinc coated

on both inside and outside by a hot dipping or sherardizing process. Conduit fittings finished to same requirements as for rigid steel conduit.

2. Conduit fittings finished to same requirements as for rigid steel conduit. All couplings, unions and fittings threaded type. Compression type fittings are not acceptable.

3. Elbows: Shall be factory made with a minimum radius of 6 times the trade size. 4. Apply thread sealant to all joints except in permanently dry locations. 5. Termination of conduits, wiring gutters or boxes shall be fitted with steel locknut

and insulated metallic bushing or with 2 steel locknuts and insulating bushings. When grounding bushings are required, use insulated grounding bushing. Where conduit connections are exposed to weather or excessive moisture they shall be fitted with insulated watertight sealing hub; i.e., Myers Hub or equal.

6. All cut ends of conduit shall be reamed to remove rough edges where conduit is threaded in the field; an electrical conduit thread cutting die with a taper shall be used.

C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket 1. Shall be galvanized steel with minimum trade size of ½ inch. In wet and

corrosive locations, outside, or motor connections, shall be liquid-tight. May be used to connect recessed lighting fixtures or mechanical controls and equipment. Length shall be kept to a minimum but to allow for movement or removal of equipment. Leave slack in flex connection to maintain flexibility of conduit, minimum of 3 feet of flex and one 90 degree bend.

2. Connectors shall be tite-bite type with insulated throat Crouse-Hinds Series ACB or T & B Series 3110; connectors for liquid-tight shall be with insulated throat Crouse-Hinds Series LTC or T & B Series 5331 with sealing "O"- ring at outside of enclosure.

D. Pull Lines: Provide 1/8 inch diameter yellow poly line pull line in empty conduits 1inch and smaller and 3/16 inch polypropylene rope in conduits 1-1/4 inch and larger.

E. Joint compound for RMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

F. Conduit Straps: 2 hole steel snap-on type with ribbed back or malleable iron with galvanized or cadmium plated finish. Secure straps with metal screws or machine screws and bolts on metal material, and expansion shields with machine screws on concrete or solid masonry. Use of nail straps or perforated strap iron is prohibited.

2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Arnco Corporation. 2. CANTEX Inc. 3. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 4. Condux International, Inc. 5. ElecSYS, Inc. 6. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.



7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 9. Or, Equal

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.03 METAL WIREWAYS A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA Type 1, unless

otherwise indicated. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, Screw-cover type, Flanged-and-gasketed types as conditions warrant.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. d. Or, Equal e. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). f. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. g. Or, Equal

2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Shall be of size and shape best suited for particular application, properly code sized for

number of wires and conduits passing through or terminating therein, but in no case less than 4 inches square or octagon. Support boxes directly to structural members, framing or blocking by means of screws, anchors or bolts.

B. Outlet boxes shall be Appleton FS and FD Cast Aluminum, malleable iron, threaded type. Boxes shall be fitted with copper-free aluminum covers. Surface covers shall be used where exposed wiring is permissible. 1. Outlet boxes in damp or outdoor locations shall be malleable iron with threaded

hubs, fitted with gasket and cast cover. C. Pull Boxes: Indoor pull boxes fabricated of code gauge steel, of size shown or as

required, complete with screw covers, surface type in unfinished areas, primed, and painted. See drawings for additional requirements. 1. Hoffman NEMA 1, ASE Series or equal.

D. Pull boxes used outdoors or in damp locations fabricated of code gauge steel with rain-tight welded seams, conduit hubs on top or sides, screw covers with neoprene or korprene gaskets. Hardware non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized. Boxes located on roof, entire boxes painted two coats of rust-inhibiting aluminum paint, Rustoleum or equal. Boxes located on building walls or free standing; finish powder paint color to match exterior building color. 1. Hoffman, NEMA 3R, A Series or equal.



2.06 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have bottom, as

indicated in the drawing details. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having

structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." "TELEPHONE.", etc. as required

for each service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with

entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 16 inches wide by 30 inches long and larger shall have inserts for

cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand

and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawingsor a comparable product by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis. e. Or, Equal

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for

compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent

testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT with rain tight fittings.

B. Comply with the following outdoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) 2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

3.02 RACEWAYS & BOXES A. Keep raceways at least 10 feet away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water

pipes. Mount horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.



B. Complete raceway placement before starting conductor Work. C. Support raceways as specified in Section 260529 Hangers and Supports. D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. E. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise

indicated. F. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Note that some building or local electrical codes may not permit nonmetallic tubing in fire-rated slabs in subparagraph below.

4. Change from PVC to RMC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit before rising above the floor.

G. No more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run will be accepted except for communications conduits, for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed.

H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect all conductor sizes, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Provide pull lines in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 pound tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Tag pull lines at each end indicating the location of the opposite.

K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. Trade Size 1-1/4 inch and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50

feet. 2. Trade Size 1-1/2 inch and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75

feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of

raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of

refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RMC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F , and that has straight-run length that exceeds 50 feet. 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type

and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:



a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch

per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting

selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

N. Identify raceway pullboxes in accordance with Section 260553 Identification. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Retain this Article if Project includes small amounts of exterior underground wiring, 600 V and less. Delete if Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" is included in the Project Manual. See Editing Instruction No. 3 in the Evaluations.

B. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work

toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose,

and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend

steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Tape: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated

with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.



D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and

cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33


26 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

SECTION 26 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS


A. Section includes: 1. Channel support systems. 2. Anchors

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes B. Section 260529 Hangers and Supports C. Section 262200 Low Voltage Transformers

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CBC: California Building Code, 2007 Edition. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, units, equipment, and parts to meet or exceed current applicable

requirements for seismic resistance specified by codes, regulations and authority having jurisdiction. Include all supports, anchors, braces and other restraining devices required.

B. Seismic bracing shall meet requirements of CBC Chapter 16A. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with of Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Seismic restraints and bracing systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by 1 of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti Inc. 3. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 4. Or equal

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: As noted in the Drawings. 2.02 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Galvanized steel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before further placement of equipment, panels, boxes, conduits, etc.

C. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


26 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Raceways: Secure raceways to trapeze member with bolted 2 piece clamps. B. Torque fittings, anchors and connections per manufacturer’s recommended values.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Tests and Inspections:

1. Test at least 4 of each type and size of secured anchors and fasteners selected by University’s Representative.

2. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 3. If a device fails test, modify all mountings of same type and retest until

satisfactory results are achieved. END OF SECTION 26 05 48


26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION


A. Section includes: 1. Identification for raceways 2. Identification of power and control cables 3. Identification for conductors 4. Warning labels and signs 5. Instruction signs 6. Equipment identification labels 7. Miscellaneous identification products

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 Electrical B. Division 27 Communications C. Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute B. CFR: Code of Federal Regulations C. OSHA: Occupational Safety & Health Administration D. NFPA: National Fire Protection Agency


Samples. B. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2 Pipe Labeling Standards. B. Comply with NFPA 70, California Electrical Code, 2007 Edition. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145 Safety Color Code for Marking

Physical Hazards. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate Work of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied and with location of access panels and doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Engraved laminated impact resistant acrylic tag engraved with white lettering on black background with capitalized 3/8 inch high lettering secured with 1 piece nylon tie. 1. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type



2.02 POWER CABLE PHASE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Clear plastic over wrap-to-wrap 1-1/4 times minimum around cable. Label colored per

color-coding with phase letter printed 1 inch high. Apply to each cable. B. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.03 WIRE MARKER MATERIALS

A. Slip-on wire markers: PVC wire marker with permanent machine printed or embossed lettering.

2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Provide plastic laminated impact resistant acrylic plate, 2 layer, 3/16 inch minimum

thickness, machine engraved with capitalized red lettering, on white background. Lettering 2 inches high.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Workspace Clearance Warning for 250 volts & less: "WARNING - OSHA

REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2. On all motors: “CAUTION. AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT. MAY START AT ANY TIME.”

2.05 SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE LABELS 2.06 Provide clear color base dymo labels on all lighting switches and convenience and special

purpose receptacles to show panel and circuit number to which the device is connected. 2.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Provide rigid plastic laminated impact resistant acrylic plate, 2 layer, with 3/16 inch minimum thickness, machine engraved with 3/8 inch high capitalized white lettering, on black background. 1. Provide nameplates on the following:

a. Panels b. Motor starters c. Disconnect switches d. Associated electrical devices e. Pull boxes indicating feeder designation

2. For remote devices such as disconnect switches, etc. and all panels indicate the source of power.

3. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.08 CABLE TIES A. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior

sunlight, self extinguishing, 1 piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 degrees Fahrenheit, 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS



A. Verify identity of each item before applying identification products. B. Location: Apply identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Attach signs and acrylic labels with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and

substrate. E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding

band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of 2-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use

colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than

No. 8 AWG, if authority having jurisdiction permits. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White. 5) Ground: Green.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, Motors and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Mechanically fastened warning labels. 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 2. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 3. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Controls with external control power connections.

C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, apply unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:



a. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Distribution Panels c. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. d. Contactors. e. Variable Frequency Drives. f. Motors g. Monitoring and control equipment.



26 0923 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES


A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor occupancy sensors. 2. Wall-box dimmers 3. Wall-switch occupancy sensors 4. Manual light switches

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables B. Section 260553 Identification C. Section 260943 Network Lighting Controls D. Section 262726 Wiring Devices

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. PIR: Passive Infrared B. SP: Single Pole C. NECA 1: National Electrical Contractors Association Standard Practice of Good

Workmanship D. CBC: California Building Code, 2010 Edition E. NFPA 70: California Electrical Code, 2010 Edition F. UL 773 A: Underwriter’s Laboratory, Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting

Control 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product. C. Shop Drawings: Show wiring & mounting details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field wiring. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Sensor Switch, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper.



6. Or, Equal B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor

occupancy sensors with a separate power pack. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application. 2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is

occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed

behind hinged door. 6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and

normal operation of sensor. 7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when

selected lighting level is present. C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR

and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

2.02 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Sensor Switch, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper. 6. Or, Equal

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application, and shall comply with California Title 24.



2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent

at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent. C. Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 2100 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. 3. Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off. 4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; dual-technology type. 5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10

to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage

patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. D. Wall-Switch Sensor for square and near square rectangular rooms:

1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: PIR. 3. Dual Relay. 4. Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off." 5. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; dual-technology type. 6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10

to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

7. Retain one of two "off" time-delay subparagraphs below. 8. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 9. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage

patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SENSOR PLACEMENT

A. Coordinate layout of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Place and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 CONTACTORS A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate

structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are placed in an enclosure with factory-mounted vibration isolators.

3.03 WIRING A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 Conductors and Cables. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions

unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.



3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553

Identification. 1. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors

at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized

service representative: 1. Operational Test: After providing time switches and sensors, and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment. C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.06 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector

range. Set time delay to suit University Representative’s operations. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train University Representative’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.



26 2416 - 1 PANELBOARDS

SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Section includes:

1. Distribution Panelboards 2. Disconnecting and Overcurrent Devices

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables

B. Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding

C. Section 260529 Hangers and Supports

D. Section 260553 Identification

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NETA: International Electrical Testing Association

B. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory

C. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

D. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association

E. NFPA 70: National Fire Protection Agency, Electrical Code

F. CBC: California Building Code, 2007 Edition

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus dimensions, configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective

devices. Fully rated panels and devices are required. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.



6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For application in panelboards. Provide final versions after load balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

G. Warranty: See Article 1.10 Warranty


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1, Standards for Panelboards.

E. Comply with NFPA 70; California Electrical Code, 2007 edition.

F. Comply with UL489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures, UL50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, UL 67 Panelboards and UL 98 Enclosed and Dead Front Switches.

G. Panelboards shall be qualified for use in seismic areas as follows:

1. High seismic loading as defined in CBC 16A 2. Seismic compliance shall be qualified only through shake table testing.

Compliance by calculation is not acceptable.



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; provide temporary electric heating (75 Watts per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.

C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection or cover with heavy canvas or plastic to keep out dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 degrees Fahrenheit to plus

104 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied unless permitted under the following conditions:

1. Notify University’s Representative no fewer than 7 business days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without University Representative’s written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and placement of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment shall fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in California Electrical Code.



B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Notice of Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Coordinate with Section 262813 Fuses for quantities of spare fuses.

B. Provide extra materials that match products provided and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers: Spares as noted on the panel schedules with no less than 2

spares for each panelboard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Arrangement as indicated on Drawings is based on IEM with General Electric devices. Panel class, size, breaker ratings, etc. shall be as shown on Drawings.

B. Approved Manufacturers:

1. IEM with General Electric devices. 2. General Electric. 3. Cutler Hammer / Eaton 4. Or, Equal

C. Outside finish, including a fully painted box, factory white enamel.

D. Enclosure shall be of code gauge galvanized steel with front trim, hinged door, door-in-door, and two (2) metallic semi-flush cylinder locks for each door. All panelboard locks keyed alike.

1. Door-in-door construction shall be hinged from the can and allow access to the side wireways/gutters without removing the dead front.

E. Multiple pole circuit breakers shall have internal common trip connections. All breakers shall be bolt-on to the bus type, with a minimum symmetrical amp rating of 22,000 RMS unless noted otherwise in the drawings. All breakers shall be listed for termination of copper, insulated at 75 degree Centigrade temperature rating or higher. All breaker lugs shall be copper. Breakers shall be fully rated for the symmetrical amp rating listed unless specified otherwise.

F. Busses shall be copper and extend full length of usable space. Provide copper ground bus complete with lugs, not insulated from enclosure. The bussing shall be braced for a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amps unless noted otherwise in the drawings.

G. Semi-recessed panels shall be provided with a wood or metal escutcheon return to wall finish, flush with edge of trim. Surface mounted enclosure trims shall be the



same height and width as the box. Recessed (Flush) mount enclosure trims shall overlap the box by 3/4inch on all sides.

H. Recessed cabinets shall be provided with a minimum of three ¾-inch empty conduits stubbed and capped into the accessible space above ceiling. Drawings may require additional conduit stubs.

I. Provide panelboard with a “Metal Frame” directory card holder welded on the inside of the door with a clear plastic cover. Directories shall be typewritten to conform to circuit assignment at time of occupancy, stating type of load and location.

J. Mount wall panelboards with top at +6 feet-6 inches above the finished floor.

K. Conduits shall enter cabinet through neat hole and perpendicular to entrance face.

L. Provide equipment completely factory assembled, wired and tested before delivery, bearing UL labels. Design shall meet NEC, NEMA and OSHA requirements.

M. Main breakers, where specified, as part of a combination main and distribution section or panel, shall be located above or below distribution bussing and be connected such that normal load side of breakers is disconnected when breaker is in open position. Backwards connections are prohibited.

N. Where spaces are indicated on the Drawings, all required hardware and trim shall be provided to allow future installation of the circuit breaker.

O. All panelboards /electrical equipment shall be labeled with warnings to qualified personnel of the potential arc flash hazards and note the appropriate level of appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) required, per the latest issue of the NEC and NFPA-70E. Incoming Mains Location: As conditions warrant.

P. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

Q. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future devices.

R. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals, 22,000 symmetrical amperes minimum rating.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 1 of the following:

1. IEM Type CDP with General Electric breakers. 2. Eaton, Type PRL4. 3. General Electric Spectra Series (Bolt-On to the bus style). 4. Or equal

B. Distribution Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

1. NEMA 250 3R enclosure with screened venting and base channels. a. The enclosure shall have 2 screened vents, top and bottom on each

side to vent the interior section.



b. Each door shall have 2 screened vents top and bottom to vent the vestibule.

C. Doors: Secured with pad locking provisions.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide 3 point latch. 2. Door-in door construction.

D. Mains: As indicated in the panel schedules.

E. Provide with thermostatically controlled heat strip.

F. Dead front type completely metal enclosed, self-supporting structure of the universal frame type using die-formed, welded and bolted members. Formed ends sectionalized and removable with screw-on plates and NEMA 3R top covers, front facing side covers formed hinged with brass knurled knobs and concealed hinges. Finish gray, ASA70 dry powder polyester plastic electro statically applied, meeting a 3,000 hour salt spray test.

G. Bussing shall be copper with silver plated connections and joints sized to limit temperature rise of 55 degrees Centigrade per UL standards.

H. Breakers shall be bolt-on to the bus type with frame and minimum symmetrical amp rating as indicated on Drawings. The rating shall be full symmetrical amp rating and series rated only when specifically noted in the Drawings. 250 amp frames and larger shall be interchangeable trip type. All breakers shall be provided with factory installed padlocking provisions. All breakers shall be listed for termination of copper or aluminum conductors insulated at 75 degrees Centigrade temperature rating or higher. All breaker lugs shall be copper.

1. Circuit breakers serving motor loads utilizing variable frequency drives shall be Eaton Series C, HFD Frame or larger with fixed trip units or equal.

2. Breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type common trip with 1 operating handle and solid state 7 or 9 function trip unit.

I. Conduits shall enter cabinet through neat holes and perpendicular to entrance face. Lace all conductors with Nylon Tie-Wraps. Provide laminated acrylic nameplates at all breakers.

J. Where spaces are indicated on the Drawings, all required hardware and trim shall be provided to allow future installation of breakers.

K. Provide equipment completely factory assembled, wired and tested before delivery and shall bear UL labels. Design shall meet CEC, NEMA and OSHA requirements.

L. Manufacturer shall provide equipment to meet the space provided, and shall not reduce the number of sections shown on the Drawings.

M. Switchgear enclosures that are installed in exterior locations exposed to weather shall have thermostatically controlled heat strips.

N. Switchgear/electrical equipment shall be labeled with warnings to qualified personnel of the potential arc flash hazards and the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) required, per the latest issue of the CEC and NFPA-70E.

O. Provide a minimum of 25 percent of space for spare capacity.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before placement. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with Work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Mount panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. For free standing distribution panelboards, secure epoxy-coated anchor bolts that anchor into structural concrete.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided with items to be embedded.

3. Secure anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.

4. Level the free standing distribution panelboard so doors close properly without forcing into position.

5. Rodent proof enclosure a. Grout bottom perimeter of enclosure. b. Seal conduits

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Mount distribution panel cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

E. Factory manufactured filler plates shall be placed over unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 Identification.

B. Create a directory that indicates circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate University Representative’s final room designations. Obtain approval before applying. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 Identification.



D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 Identification.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working

schedule of the facility and at time directed. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all

load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a

panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


26 2726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES


A. Section includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables B. Section 260553 Identification C. Section 260923 Lighting Control Devices D. Section 260943 Network Lighting Controls E. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. C. NFPA 70: National Fire Protection Agency Electrical Code D. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association


Samples. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70, California Electrical Code, 2007 Edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. Or equal

2.02 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 standards for wall devices. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 5352 (duplex) b. Hubbell; CR5352 (duplex) c. Leviton; 5352 (duplex) d. Pass & Seymour; 5352 (duplex)



e. Or equal 2. Duplex Convenience receptacles – premium industrial grade, 3 wire grounded,

nylon face, white in color. 2.03 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. c. Or equal

2. Duplex GFCI Convenience receptacles – premium industrial grade, 3 wire grounded, nylon face, white in color.

3. Waterproof and gasketed lift cover listed for wet locations. 2.04 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles: NEMA configuration as required to accommodate the project equipment and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. e. Or, Equal

2.05 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of

equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with

green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.06 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way). e. Or, Equal

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V. e. Or, Equal

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON." D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 2221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L. e. Or, Equal

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use

with mechanically held lighting contactors. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 1995. b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251. e. Or, Equal

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 1995L. b. Hubbell; HBL1557L. c. Leviton; 1257L. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L. e. Or, Equal

2.07 WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with

audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with

UL 1472. C. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim

potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.08 FAN SPEED CONTROLS A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible

frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.



1. Continuously adjustable slider, 5 A. 2. Three-speed adjustable rotary knob, 1.5 A.

2.09 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V. b. Hubbell; WS1277. c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200. f. Or, Equal

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

B. Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V. b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID. c. Or, equal

2. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP. b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW. c. Pass & Seymour; WA1001. d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100. e. Or, Equal


D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP. b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW. c. Watt Stopper (The); DT-200. d. Or, equal

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft.

E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP. b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW. c. Pass & Seymour; HS1001. d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3. e. Or, Equal


F. Exterior Occupancy Sensors: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Leviton; PS200-10. b. Watt Stopper (The); EW-100-120. c. Or, Equal

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, weatherproof, adjustable time delay up to 15 minutes, 180-degree field of view, and 110-foot detection range. Minimum switch rating: 1000-W incandescent, 500-VA fluorescent.

2.10 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS A. Telephone Outlet:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649. c. Or, Equal

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 3562. b. Leviton; 40595. c. Or, Equal

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.

2.11 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Stainless. 2. Material for Damp Locations: Cast metal with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-

resistant cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Coordination with Other Trades:



1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. B. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign

matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large

enough. C. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to

hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. D. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 Identification. B. All device cover plates shall be labeled per panel and circuit with clear adhesive tape and

black font complying with the requirements listed in Section 260553 Identification.



3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not

acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test ability to trip. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely

mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at

the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.



26 2813 - 1 FUSES

SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed

switches, panelboards, switchboards, enclosed controllers, and motor-control centers.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260553 Identification B. Section 262413 Switchboards C. Section 262416 Panelboards D. Section 262816 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association B. NFPA 70: National Fire Protection Agency, Electrical Code


Samples. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,

dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been

adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original

fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature

adjustment calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,

electrical characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single

source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 standards for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70, California Electrical Code 2007 Edition.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40

degrees Fahrenheit (5 degrees Centrigrade) or more than 100 degree Fahrenheit (38


26 2813 - 2 FUSES

degrees Centrigrade), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse

size and with system short-circuit current levels. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra materials that match products provided and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of the required quantity for each size and type, but

no fewer than 3 of each size and type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Or equal

2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings

consistent with circuit voltages. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before placement. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and product instructions. Apply fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with assembly only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. 2. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.03 FUSES A. Assemble fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable

without removing fuse. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Apply labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 Identification and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



26 2816 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches 2. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs) 3. Enclosures

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables B. Section 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls C. Section 260553 Identification D. Section 262813 Fuses

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. DPST: Double pole, single throw. D. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory E. NEMA KS 1: National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards for enclosed

switches F. NEMA 250: National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards for electrical

enclosures G. NFPA 70: National Fire Protection Agency, Electrical Code


Samples. B. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and

component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. C. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches

and circuit breakers.



1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches overcurrent protective devices,

components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70, California Electrical Code, 2007 Edition. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 degrees Fahrenheit and not

exceeding 122 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and placement of switches, and components with equipment served

and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra materials that match products provided and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Refer to Section 262813 Fuses for required spares. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Or equal

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, for both 240 and 600 V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground

conductors. 2. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are

specified. 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to

activate before switch blades open. 4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.02 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Enclosed molded case circuit breakers are not used in this project.

2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches: NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental

conditions at applied location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.



2. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

B. Enclosure shall be lockable in the off position. C. Provide defeater mechanism to bypass door lock out when the operating handle is in the

on position PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with Work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Provide individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls. C. Provide fuses in fusible devices.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 Identification.

1. Identify conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site. Retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report identifying enclosed switches, circuit breakers and test results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 28 16


26 2913 - 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

SECTION 26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 3. Multispeed.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables

B. Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding

C. Section 260529 Hangers and Supports

D. Section 260553 Identification

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. NEMA ICS 2: Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600V.

F. NEMA ICS 5: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.

G. NEMA ICS 6: Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures.

H. NEMA KS 1: Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600V Maximum).

I. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.

J. NFPA 70E: Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

K. N.O.: Normally open.

L. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

M. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

OCPDs in combination controllers. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.




C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by University unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify University’s Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without University

Representative’s written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide Two spares for each size and type of magnetic

controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Provide three spares for each size and type of magnetic

contactor installed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.

1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. c. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. f. Or, Equal.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Surface mounting. 4. Red run and Green ready LED pilot lights.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20

tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red run & Green ready LED pilot lights.

D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20

tripping characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type.



4. Surface mounting. 5. Red run & Green ready LED pilot lights. 6. Two N.O. and Two N.C. auxiliary contacts.

E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120 V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT control power source of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting.

7. Solid-State Overload Relay: a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 20 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage

and current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting. e. Analog communication module.

8. N.C. & N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 9. External overload reset push button.

F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.



2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:



a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate FRS or FRN dual element fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 4. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type. a. Push Buttons: Recessed Shrouded types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

2. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; nonresettable.

B. Two each Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

F. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

G. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

H. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

I. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; wired.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PROVISION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Provide enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports."

B. Provide fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

C. Provide fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 13 "Fuses."

D. Provide heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

E. Provide, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Provide wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices where noted. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.



C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of

motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify University’s Representative before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more

than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.



3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train University's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.

END OF SECTION 26 2913


26 5100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Lamps and diodes. 3. Ballasts and LED drivers. 4. Emergency lighting units. 5. Exit signs. 6. Lighting fixture supports.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260519 Conductors and Cables B. Section 260523 Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables C. Section 260529 Hangers and Supports D. Section 260923 Lighting Control Devices E. Section 260943 Network Lighting Controls

1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI C82.1 Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 2. ANSI 82.2 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, Method of Measurement.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 66 Fixture Wire. 2. UL 542 Standard for Fluorescent Lamp Starters. 3. UL 924 Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. 4. UL 935 Standard for Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts. 5. UL 1598 Luminaires. 6. UL 2108 Standard for Low Voltage Lighting Systems.

C. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): 1. IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. 2. IESNA LM-80-2008 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED

Light Sources. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a fully functioning and operational lighting system as described herein complete with lamps, ballasts, drivers, wiring, controls and attachment to support system adhering to applicable seismic code requirements.

1.05 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color-rendering index. D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.



F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples B. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.

Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Sway adapters, seismic restraint devices and detailed method of mounting. 3. A sample of the hanger assembly for suspended luminaires shall be supplied to

the University’s Representative for review and approval. 4. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 5. Ballast, including BF. 6. Energy-efficiency data. 7. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound

power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

8. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 9. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a

manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

C. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. D. Samples: For each lighting fixture as requested. Each Sample shall include the

following: 1. Lamps and ballasts. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system.

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components.

a. Details shall clearly illustrate methods for complying with requirements of CAC Title 24 and UBC Standard No. 47-18 requiring support independent of the suspended ceiling system.

3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires.

4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.



5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.

6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access Panels/Doors.

7. Perimeter moldings. F. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. G. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures,

from manufacturer. H. Field quality-control reports. I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers'

codes. B. Warranty: See Article 1.11 Warranty.

1.08 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Provide extra materials that match products utilized and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating utilized. Provide at least one of

each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating utilized.

Provide at least one of each type. 3. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20

emergency lighting units utilized. 4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating utilized. Provide at least one

of each type. 5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating utilized. Provide

at least one of each type. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.


C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and

labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. 1.10 COORDINATION



A. Prior to rough-in of fixtures, consult the University’s Representative drawings for details of ceiling construction, finish, reflected ceiling plans and other applicable details and coordinate layout of lighting fixtures and suspension system. Field coordinate other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in

which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of

Notice of Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. Labor shall be included for the duration of the Warranty at no additional expense to the University.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: 5 years from date of Notice of Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. Labor shall be included for the duration of the Warranty at no additional expense to the University.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. Or, Equal.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed

fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to

NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to

NEMA LE 5B. D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to

prevent warping and sagging. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise

indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and

ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.



b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

I. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory provided to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

J. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 1. Air-Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot

assemblies. 2. Heat-Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity. 3. Combination Heat-Removal and Air-Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp

cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air-supply units. 4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume. 5. Static Fixture: Air-supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches

active units. 2.03 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-

level control is indicated. 4. ANSI C82.11 states that lamp and ballast combinations are for operation at

temperatures of 50 to 105.8 deg F (10 to 41 deg C). Applications outside this range should be noted in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule on Drawings.

5. Sound Rating: Class A. 6. See Evaluations for discussion on harmonic considerations. 7. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 8. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better. 9. Lower operating frequencies are available but may interfere with default ballasts

when used in proximity of infrared sensors. 10. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 11. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 12. BF: 0.88 or higher. 13. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 14. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11

and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.



C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8, T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1. ANSI C82.1 states that lamp and ballast combinations are for operation at

temperatures of 50 to 105 deg F (10 to 40 deg C). Applications outside this range should be noted in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule on Drawings.

2. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements

and bundled extension wiring to suit final conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0

deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. G. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18,

Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment.

H. Use of bi-level and tri-level ballasts may comply with state and local energy-conservation code requirements, including Title 24, Part 6, of the California Code of Regulations.

I. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light

output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control

system and lamp type indicated. 4. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 5. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control

system and lamp type indicated. 2.04 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.



10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

2.05 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within

lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate two fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an

output as described on General Luminaire Schedule Notes. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates

trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power

transfer relay. 5. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-provided infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-provided electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect

unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture

continuously. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit



2.06 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.

Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-

factor type.



2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models

designed to minimize audible fixture noise. B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless

otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F. 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.

2.07 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-

contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit

voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-provided infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-provided electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.



4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations: a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit

signs, and provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote unit.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.

2.08 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying

with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire guard in first subparagraph below is optional feature. Coordinate with Drawings.

7. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 8. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when

power is restored after an outage. 9. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit



2.09 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial

lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3100 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).



3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.10 LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LED): A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedule for size and type of LED lamps required. B. All diodes shall be of the same manufacturer and bin number. C. Diodes shall be tested and tuned for the specified Kelvin color. D. Color correlated temperature: 4100 unless otherwise noted in the drawings. E. Minimum CRI (Color Rendering Index): 80 F. LED luminaire shall be free of toxic materials and be RoHS compliant. G. Groups of three or more diodes in a single housing shall be tested for even distribution. H. Standard lumen output shall meet or exceed the State of California Title 24 Energy Code

for high efficiency luminaires. I. LED luminaires shall have an IES formatted electronic photometrics report. J. Diodes shall have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and maintain at least 70 percent of

initial lamp lumens during this period. 2.11 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

B. Pulse-start, metal-halide lamps in first paragraph below are available in ratings from 30 to 1000 W and provide higher lumen maintenance and reduced color-shift throughout the life of the lamp, compared with basic metal-halide lamps. This may permit use of lower-wattage lamps to provide the same maintained illumination level provided by an equal number of conventional metal-halide lamps. Consult manufacturers to verify compatibility of lamps with ballasts and fixtures.

C. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. D. Ceramic, pulse-start, metal-halide lamps in first paragraph below are available in ratings

from about 40 to 250 W. Besides advantages inherent in pulse-start technology, these lamps have an improved CRI, between 80 and 94, with higher initial and maintained lumen output.

E. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

2.12 LED DRIVERS A. Drivers shall be integral to fixture housing. B. Drivers shall have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and maintain at least 70 percent of

initial lamp lumens during that period. 2.13 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge.



E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped

with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by University’s Representative, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, provide and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, and provide new lamps.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. Provide ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling

suspension devices for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Provide as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Provide at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Suspended luminaires shall be provided such that they are able to swing 45

degrees from vertical in all directions unobstructed. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 4. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod

for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 5. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or

rods to building structure. 6. Connect wiring according to Section 260523 Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 Identification.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.



B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

C. Lamps not operable, having discoloration or flickering at the time of final punch shall be replaced with new. Failed lamps also require that the associated ballast be examined and replaced if determined to be faulty.

D. LED luminaires will be considered faulty and require replacement if one or more diodes are not functioning.

3.04 STARTUP SERVICE A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy

by University. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.05 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide

on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of University’s Representative.



31 0000 - 1 EARTH MOVING

SECTION 31 0000 EARTH MOVING

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work under this section shall include: 1. Work shall include all clearing of remaining building remnants, slabs, utilities, pavements,

trees, shrubbery, fences and associated items, excavation to lines and grades as shown on drawings.

2. Preparation of surfaces to be filled, filling, spreading, compaction, observation, and testing of the fill; preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements.

3. All subsidiary work necessary to complete the grading to conform with the lines, grades, and slopes as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2500 – Erosion and Sediment Control. B. Section 32 1313 – Site Concrete. C. Section 33 1000 – Water Utilities D. Section 33 0000 – Sanitary Sewer Utilties E. Section 33 4000 – Storm Drainage Utilities

1.03 REFERENCES A. City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

1.04 PROTECTION A. Adequate protection measures shall be provided to protect workmen and passers by the site.

Streets and adjacent property shall be fully protected throughout the operations. Contractor shall comply with California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD).

B. In accordance with generally accepted construction practices, the Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for working conditions at the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.

C. Any construction review of the Contractor's performance conducted by the University's Representative is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site.

D. Adjacent streets and sidewalks shall be kept free of mud, dirt, or similar nuisances resulting from earthwork operations.

E. Surface drainage provisions shall be made during the period of construction in a manner to avoid creating a nuisance to adjacent areas.

F. The site and adjacent influenced areas shall be watered as required to suppress dust nuisance. 1.06 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS

A. See division 1, section ___ - coordination, for utility locations 1.07 SEASONAL LIMITS

A. Fill materials shall not be placed, spread, or rolled during infavorable weather conditions. When the work is interrupted by heavy rains, fill operations shall not be resumed until field tests indicate that the moisture contents of the subgrade and fill materials are satisfactory.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups OW, UP, EM, SM, SO and SP.

B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, AL, CH, OL, OR and PT.

C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetable and other deleterious matter.

D. Local materials excavated only from existing planter areas may be used as fill for proposed planters.

1. All fill shall be of approved local materials, supplemented by imported fill, if necessary. Approved local materials are defined as local soils free from quantities of rubble, rubbish, and vegetation, and having been tested and approved by the University’s Representative prior to use.

2. Local materials excavated from existing paved areas may only be used as fill for proposed paving areas and shall not be used as fill for planters.

3. Imported fill materials shall be approved by the University's Representative, meet the above requirements, shall have a plasticity index not exceeding twelve, and shall be of 1" maximum particle size.

E. Imported Topsoil: Sandy Loam, free of debris and persistent weeds acceptable to University's Representative.

F. River sand for bedding and initial backfill shall be free from vegetable material, lumps, balls of clay, or adherent films of clay. The material shall not have more than twenty percent (20%), passing a 200 mesh screen and minor amounts of small gravel up to one half (½”) inch in size will be permitted. Payment for river sand used for bedding and initial backfill shall be included as payment for the utility being installed and shall not be paid as a separate item.

G. Crushed rock, when specified for backfill, shall mean a uniformly graded material that is the product of crushing rock or gravel; free of organic material, oil, alkali, or other deleterious substances and is hard, sound, and durable. Crushed rock shall conform to the requirements for coarse (½" x No. 4) crushed screenings as set forth in Section 37-1.02 of the State Specifications. In addition, crushed rock shall have a minimum cleanliness value of fifty (50) as determined by California Test 227.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT AND PREPARATION

A. ALayout all work, establish grades, locate and flag existing underground utilities, set markers and stakes, set up and maintain barricades for protection of utilities, all prior to beginning actual earthwork operations..

3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing shall consist of, but shall not be limited to, removal of grass, trees and organic debris,

concrete slabs or foundations, drain inlets, headerboards, fences, rubbish, piping, curbs, walks and asphalt paving including surfacing and aggregate base and selected-underground utilities within 2.0' of original or final grade (which ever is lower). Excavations and depressions resulting from the removal of such items, as well as any existing excavations or loose soil deposits as determined by the University's Representative shall be cleaned out to firm undisturbed soil and backfilled with suitable material in accordance with these specifications. Street signs, site lighting and irrigation facilities which are to be salvaged shall be stockpiled for delivery to the University's Representative.

B. Grubbing shall consist of removal and disposal of all stumps and roots larger than 1” in diameter to a depth not less than 18” below any subgrade, bottom of trench or structure. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps and



roots shall be refilled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface condition conform to the surrounding ground surface.

3.03 EXCAVATION A. Replace excavated soils with suitable sub-base material. Place fill materials in layers (lifts) not

more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 1. Prior to compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture

content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density. Do not placefill material on surfaces that are muddy.

2. Place fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping or conduit to required elevations.Take care to prevent wedging action of fill against structures or displacement of piping orconduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to approximatelysame depth in each lift.

B. Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to sub-grade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.

C. Unauthorized Excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the University's Representative. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the University's Representative shall be at Contractor's expense. 1. backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations or

same classification, unless otherwise directed by the University's Representative.D. Excavate material from existing planters and stockpile for use in future backfill of planters in a

location designated by University's Representative. E. Excavate material from paved areas and stockpile separately for use as fill material only within

areas to be paved. F. The tolerance for top surface of sub-grade shall be plus or minus 0.1’.

3.04 PREPARATION, PLACEMENT, COMPACTION OF OTHER FILL MATERIAL A. The surfaces upon which fill is to be placed, as well as sub-grades of the areas left at existing

grade, shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of at least 6", until the surface is free from ruts, hummocks, or other uneven features which would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the selected equipment.

B. When the moisture content of the sub-grade is below that required to achieve the specified density, water shall be added until the proper moisture content is achieved.

C. When the moisture content of the sub-grade is too high to permit the specified compaction to be achieved, the sub-grade shall be aerated by blading or other methods until the moisture content is satisfactory for compaction.

D. After the foundations for fill have been cleared, plowed, or scarified, they shall be disced or bladed until uniform and free from large clods, brought to the optimum moisture content and compacted to not less than 95%, as determined by the ASTM D1557 91 compaction test.

E. The selected soil fill material shall be placed in layers which when compacted shall not exceed 6" in thickness. Each layer shall be spread evenly and shall be thoroughly mixed during the spreading to promote uniformity of material in each layer.

F. When the moisture content of the fill material is below that required to achieve the specified density, water shall be added until the optimum moisture content is achieved.

G. When the moisture content of the fill material is too high to permit specified degree of compaction to be achieved, fill material shall be aerated by blading or other methods until the moisture content is satisfactory.



H. Compaction shall be undertaken with equipment capable of achieving the specified density and shall be accomplished while the fill material is at the required moisture content. Each layer shall be compacted over its entire area until the desired density has been obtained.

I. After each layer has been placed, mixed, and spread evenly, it shall be thoroughly compacted to the following minimum standards:

LOCATION MINIMUM % COMPACTION (ASTM D1557) Building Pads 95% Pavement Areas (Vehicle Traffic) 90% J. The filling operations shall be continued until the fills have been brought to the finished slopes

and grades as shown on the Drawings. The filling operations at landscaped areas shall continue until fill has been brought to the finished slopes and grades as shown on the Drawings. Only material excavated from planter areas may be used for backfill in new planters.

K. All portions of the work shall be kept free of standing water at all times until all work specified herein is complete and the entire project covered by this contract has been accepted by the University's Representative.

L. The surface of all areas of earth and other materials shall be finished to a reasonably smooth and compact surface substantially in accordance with the surface lines and cross sections shown, or the elevations indicated on the drawings, or as directed by the University’s Representative. The degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade grader or scraper operations, or by hand shovel operation, as the Contractor may elect, subject to approval. During construction, existing graveled and paved surfaces shall be kept shaped and drained.

M. The tolerance for top of sub-grade shall be plus or minus 0.1’. 3.05 FINAL SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. The finished subgrade, immediately prior to placing subsequent material thereon, shall have a

relative compaction not less than 95% for a depth of 0.5’, in accordance with Section 19 of California Standard Specifications, 1988 (CSS), except that testing will be in accordance with ASTM Designation D 1557 instead of California Test Method 216. The subgrade shall be free of segregated material and shall be smooth and true to 0.10 foot above or below the theoretical grading plane. No material shall be placed upon the sub-grade until the sub-grade meets the above requirements. It is also specified that no rocks or hard lumps of material exceeding 6” in diameter shall be within the upper 0.5’ of the sub-grade and that the subsurface shall be clean and free of loose material prior to placing aggregate base.

B. All underground utilities shall be installed and approved prior to the placement of any layers of aggregate base.

C. Compaction of backfill around structures or in area too small for self propelled equipment shall be obtained by use of mechanical or hand tampers to the specified density.

D. Backfill planters uniformly and compact to 85% in landscaped areas. Backfill shall be brought to the finished slopes and grades as shown on the Drawings.

3.06 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL A. Trenching shall be in open cut trenches to the lines and grades shown on the drawings.

Trenching shall include removal of all materials encountered. Trenches shall have vertical walls for a minimum of 1’ over the top of pipe being installed.

B. B. Unsheathed trenches for pipes greater than 2” and less than 33” inside diameter shall be 8” wider on each side than the exterior diameter of the pipe barrel or as required by the pipe manufacturer. For pipes 2” or less, the width is optional. Where sheathing is required, the width of the trench shall be increased only sufficiently to accommodate the sheathing and timbers. The bottom of the trench shall be finished off with a firm bed without gravel or rocky projections



and a true grade to fit the barrel of the pipe, and with joint holes dug with only sufficient space to permit proper jointing. If sub-grade material is rock or gravel too large to permit the forming of a proper and uniform bed for the pipe, the improper material shall be excavated to a depth of 4” below sub-grade and replaced with clean, sandy material compacted into place, or with crushed aggregate varying from No. 4 to ½” in size. In cases where the ground is too soft to furnish a firm support for the pipe at the prescribed grade, excavation shall be carried to an additional depth of 6” below the bottom of the pipe, and sub-grade consisting of clean, graded aggregate varying from 2” to ½” in size, shall be placed over the full width of the trench.

C. Bedding shall be a firm layer of sand bedding material. At least 3” of sand shall be placed beneath the outside diameter of the pipe. In addition, a minimum of 3” of sand shall be placed in contact with and beneath all pipe joints and couplings. The sand bedding material shall provide uniform support for the full length of the pipe to a width of at least one half of the outside diameter of the pipe.

D. Bed sewers under pavements and wrapped piping in sand prior to backfilling. Backfill to point 6” above pipe with sand.

E. When pipe or underground conduit with a protective wrapping is to be placed in the trench, sand only shall be used for bedding the pipe or conduit. The sand used shall be certified to have a minimum resistance of 5,000Ω (ohms) per cubic centimeter when wetted to any moisture content with distilled water and shall consist of clean, natural, washed-sand, hard and durable particles varying from fine particles to particles of such size that all will pass through a ⅜” screen, not less than 90% will pass through a Ό” screen, and not more than 25% will pass through a No. 50 screen.

F. After pipe lines in excavation have been installed and tested, backfill excavation to point 6” above pipe using sand, fine earth, or otously tamp. Except as hereinafter noted, backfill above 6” above top of pipe shall be made by using earth from excavation placed in layers of 8” maximum depth. Compaction of each successive layer will be made with mechanical compactor. Excavation fill material will not be wheel rolled or jetted.

G. Backfill shall be native material or approved imported material as specified hereinafter, it shall be free from organic material, rubbish or other substances which will prevent compaction of the fill. Compaction of backfill to finish grade shall be done in a manner which will not injure or disturb the pipe or existing facilities. Backfill shall be placed around pipe and not dropped directly on the pipe.

H. Sand, when used, shall be clean, granular material with 100% passing the No. 4 sieve and not over 10% passing the No. 200 sieve.

1. Initial Backfill (up to 6” over pipe) shall be, compacted to 90% of the maximum density. This material shall be placed immediately after pipe joints have been completed, and shall be compacted by mechanical means. The material shall be installed in lifts not exceeding 6” in depth before compaction, with a difference in level on either side of the pipe not to exceed 6”.

a. Initial backfill for water and PVC drain facilities shall be river sand. b. Initial backfill for ABS sewer shall be river sand. 2. Typical backfill from 6” above the pipe shall be site excavated material.

a. The backfill shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6”, and shall be compacted by approved mechanical means to a minimum density of 90% at optimum moisture content.

b. The completed backfill shall be brought to pavement sub-grade and be graded and ready to receive the required pavement section.

I. When the moisture content of the trench backfill or sand bedding material is below that required to achieve the specified density, water shall be added until the proper moisture content is achieved.



J. When the moisture content of the trench backfill or sand bedding material is too high to permit the specified degree of compaction to be achieved, the material shall be aerated by blading or other methods until the moisture content is satisfactory for compaction.

K. After each layer has been placed, mixed and spread evenly, it shall be thoroughly compacted.

The minimum degree of compaction shall not be less than 90% of maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D1557 9 compaction test, except that backfill within 2' 0" of final grade within pavement areas shall be compacted to a minimum degree of compaction of at least 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with the above standard. Compaction shall be undertaken with equipment capable of achieving the specified density and shall be accomplished while the backfill material is at the required moisture content. Each layer shall be compacted over its entire area until the desired density has been obtained.

L. The filling operation shall be continued until the trench backfill has been brought to the finished slopes and grades as shown on the Drawings.

M. The sides of all excavations shall be supported in the manner set forth in the current rules, orders and regulations prescribed in the Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety of the State of California. Existing and new structures or utilities shall be protected fully from damage. During backfilling, the sheet piling and other timbering shall be withdrawn so as to prevent caving, lateral movement or flowing of the sub-soils, or damage to piping or other structures. No sheathing or timbering shall be left in the excavation.

N. Excavations for structures and trenches for piping shall be kept free from water until compaction backfills and structures and pipelines are complete to above water, safe from uplift and horizontal water pressure or leakage. The Contractor at all times shall have on the site sufficient pumping machinery for immediate use.

O. Water removed shall be disposed of in such a manner as to cause no injury to property nor be a menace to public health.

P. Any backfill placed under this contract which subsides or settles below the adjacent finished grade or paving level during the guarantee period shall be brought to grade by the Contractor by adding compacted backfill or additional paving in paved areas.

3.07 UNSUITABLE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. A. Any unsuitable material encountered within 2’ below the subgrade or 2’ below original

ground, whichever is lower, shall be brought to the attention of and removed at the direction of the University's Representative and the additional excavation greater than that required for preparation of original ground or subgrade shall be computed and paid for at the contract unit price bid per cubic yard of roadway excavations. .

B. The Contractor shall use extra care in excavating unsuitable material so as not to aggravate the condition. If, in the opinion of the University's Testing Laboratory, the Contractor methods for excavating are increasing the amount of unsuitable material required to be excavated, the University's Representative will require the Contractor to take the necessary steps to correct the condition.

C. Backfill to replace the unsuitable material removed as roadway excavation shall be placed and compacted to sub-grade as specified herein. Suitable backfill material shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section.

D. The selection of the proper backfill shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. Backfill will be paid for at the contract unit price. The pay quantity will be the same as that computed for unsuitable material excavated as roadway excavation as specified herein.

3.08 TESTING AND OBSERVATION A. Grading operations shall be observed by University's Testing Laboratory. B. Field density tests shall be made by the University's Testing Laboratory after compaction of

each layer of fill. Additional layers of fill shall not be spread until the field density tests indicate that the minimum specified density has been obtained.



C. Earthwork shall not be performed without notification or approval of the University's Representative. The Contractor shall notify the University's Representative at least two working days prior to commencement of any aspect of the site earthwork.

D. If the Contractor should fail to meet the technical or design requirements embodied in this document and on the applicable plans, he shall make the necessary readjustments until all work is deemed satisfactory, as determined by University's Representative. No deviation from the Specifications shall be made except upon written approval of the Engineer

3.09 DESIGNATED DISPOSAL AREA A. Gravel, asphalt, and cement rubble, grass strippings, utility debris and organic debris shall be

removed from the University’s site. B. Excess native material shall be removed from the University’s site.

END OF SECTION


31 2500 - 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

SECTION 31 2500 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL


A. Work of this section shall include all materials and installation necessary to provide sediment and erosion control and construction practices to prevent pollution of stormwater.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 32 12 16 – Asphalt Concrete Paving. C. Section 32 13 13 – Site Concrete D. Section 31 00 00 – Earth Moving E. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage Utilities

1.03 REFERENCES A. City of Sacramento Administrative and Technical Procedures Manual for Grading and Erosion

Control. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s data sheet submittal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials utilized shall conform to the references identified in 1.03 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to start of onsite construction activities, contractor shall review references and project drawings to identify required preventive measures to be applied during construction.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Specific preventative measures are as shown on the drawings. Timing of installation of such

measures is subject to approval of the CSUS’s Representative.. 3.03 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall inspect and maintain preventative measures as specified in the reference. Records shall be kept of inspections.

3.05 CLEAN-UP A. At completion of construction activities and when approved by the CSUS’s Representative, the

Contractor shall remove preventative measures and trapped debris.. END OF SECTION


32 1313 - 1 SITE CONCRETE

SECTION 32 1313 SITE CONCRETE


A. Work under this section shall include materials and installation of portland cement concrete pavement, concrete formwork and concrete reinforcement as shown and detailed on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 33 00 00 – Earth Moving. B. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control.

1.03 REFERENCES A. City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Works construction, dated June 2007. B. Testing: Tests shall be by Owner’s Testing Laboratory and under direction of Owner’s

Representative; cost of testing shall be borne by Owner. C. Caltrans Standard Specifications 2010 (CSS).

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Proprietary admixtures, curing compounds. B. Mix Design: Submit for project record only. Mix design shall be solely the Contractor’s

responsibility and review shall be for completeness of information only. Keep on job site until completion (MD record info.)

C. Certificates: Submit for cement, aggregate and commodity type admixtures. Certification shall be by independent testing laboratory agency acceptable to Owner. Certification cost shall be included in bid sum. Certify that the cement conforms to specifications. Samples, test and certify concrete aggregate for grading, soundness and abrasion, before concrete mix design and established.

D. Placement Records: Keep on job site until completion, and open to inspection, record showing the date of placing concrete in each portion of structure

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection during Concrete Placement: Provide protective covering and runways, and use

appropriate equipment and means of access to work areas to avoid soiling or damage to existing conditions.

B. Protection After Concrete Placement: Finish surface shall be protected at all times from concrete adjacent to them. Inspect forming against such work and establish tight leak-proof seal before concrete is poured. Finish work defaced with concrete on surface shall be replaced.

C. Runoff: Prevent run off of water contaminated by construction agents and chemicals from soiling existing surfaces and from contaminating existing and future landscape areas.

D. Notify Owner’s Representative at least two (2) days prior to placing of concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. A. Formwork: 1. Forms: a. Lumber: Construction grade Douglas Fir, or equal.

b. Plywood: PS 1, C Grade Douglas Fir, or equal 5/8 inch minimum; sound undamaged sheets with clean true edges



c. Fasteners: As required of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

B. Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615, deformed; Grade 60 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, Plain Type; 6x6 W1.4 x W1.4, unless otherwise noted. 3. Reinforcing Supports:

a. General: Metal chairs, bolsters, bar supports, or spacers, sized and shaped for strength and support during concrete placement.

b. Footings: Bottom bars supported with concrete blocks. 4. Tie Wire: 16 gage annealed type. C. Concrete Materials: 1. General: Acquire cement and aggregate from single source. 2. Cement: ASTM C150 Portland cement, type as indicated on Structural Drawings or Type I

or Type II if not indicated. Gray color. 3. Concrete Aggregates: a. General: ASTM C33 4. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, scale, or organic

Materials. Complying with ACI c-33-7.1 5. Admixtures:

a. Cement Dispersing Admixtures: Use admixture to improve placing, reduce water cement ratio and ultimate shrinkage. Such admixture must receive prior approval of Owner’s Representative and be included in original design mix. Use no admixture not included in mix design.

b. Bonding Agent for Patching: Adhesive Engineering, W.R. Meadows, Inc., or equal.

2.02 MIXES

A. Concrete Design: 1. Design Strength and Class of manhole and drain inlet: Class “A” per section 25 and 30 of

City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. 2. Design Strength and Class of Concrete pavement, walk, bench, curb and gutter: Class “B”

per section 19 and 24 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. Mix shall be modified to delete lampblack and add integral color as directed by architect.

3. Design strength and class of thrust blocks shall be Class “D” concrete conforming to City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

B. Mixing Concrete: 1. General: All concrete shall be mixed until there is uniform distribution of material and mass

in uniform and homogeneous, mixer must be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. Conform to requirements of CBC Chapter 26.

2. Ready-Mix Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with the requirements set forth in ACI C-94 11.1.

3. Admixtures: Verify compatibility of concrete admixtures when multiple admixtures are called for in a specific mix.

4. Job Mixed Concrete:



a. General: Use batch mixer of approved type, with capacity to handle one or more full sack batches, no split sack batches permitted. Operate as recommended by manufacturer, mixing at least one and one-half (1-1/2) minutes after all materials are in drum.

b. Handling and Mixing of Concrete: Owner’s Representative may order removal of any equipment which in Representative’s opinion is insufficient or in any way unsuitable.

C. Grout: Provide mortar conforming to Section 51-1.02F of Caltrans Standard Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: Refer to Section ______– COORDINATION B. Examination: Examine conditions of work in place before beginning work, report defects C. Measurements: Take field measurements; report variances between plan and field dimensions.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in conformance with reference standards, manufacture’s written directions as

shown, and specified. B. Concrete Form Work: 1. Workmanship: Provide formwork required to produce smooth concrete; straight, plumb and

true to plane. Concrete out of the line, level or plumb will be rejected. 2. General: Provide straight, true, sound and form material, able to withstand deformation due

to loading and the effects of moist curing. Do not reuse warped or delaminated materials that require more than minor patching of contact surfaces.

a. Construction: Construct forms to shapes, lines, grades and dimensions indicated, tight to prevent leakage, properly braced and tied together to maintain position and shape. Form bevels, grooves, and recesses to neat, straight lines, chamfer corners where indicated. Provide for easy removal without hammering, wedging, or prying against concrete.

b. Adjustment: Tighten forms, posts and shores during and immediately after concrete placement; readjust as required to maintain grades, levels, and camber.

c. Expansion Joints: 20’-0” maximum, for exterior concrete 3. Embedded Components:

a. General: Install straight, level and plumb; brace, anchor and support items to prevent displacement or distortion.

b. Inserts: Coordinate work of other Sections in setting bolts, anchors, and other components, as required.

c. Formed Openings: Provide sleeves where required for work to be imbedded in or pass through concrete.

4. Form Coating: a. General: Before placement of reinforcing steel, coat exposed face of forms

to prevent moisture absorption from concrete and facilitate removal of forms, seal all cut edges.

b. Re-use: Thoroughly clean and recoat form material acceptable for re-use. C. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Fabrication: Do not bend or straighten reinforcement in manner that will injure material.

Bars with kinks or bends not shown, and heating of bars for bending is not permitted.



2. Placement: Provide minimum center to center distance between parallel bars 2-1/2 times diameter, 1-1/2 inches or 2-1/2 times maximum size coarse aggregate. Wire bar lap together, splice reinforcing steel with lap of 40 diameters, unless otherwise shown.

D. Cast-In-Place Concrete 1. General: Placement of forms, inserts and reinforcements are subject to approval of Owner’s

Representative. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 72 hours prior to placement of concrete.

2. Cleaning: a. Remove wood chips, sawdust and other debris before concrete pour, use

compressed air at inaccessible areas. b. Reinforcing: Clean reinforcement and other embedded items of substances

that might impair bonding, prior to placement of concrete. c. Previously Placed Concrete: Clean with steel brush prior to applying bonding

agent. 3. Placing of Concrete:

a. General: Place concrete in dry conditions, keep excavations free of water loose soil and debris.

b. Weather Requirements: Per ACI 305R (Hot) and ACI 306I (Cold). Additionally, hot weather is defined as any period in which temperature exceeds 85 degrees F., or in which temperature exceeds 70 degrees F, with the North (dry) wind blowing in excess of 10 MPH.

c. Transportation: Handle concrete from mixer to place of deposit as rapidly as possible; using methods to prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Deposit in final position; avoid rehandling or flowing. Do not place partially hardened concrete in work. Do not wheel placement containers directly on top of reinforcing steel.

d. Placement: 1) General: Place concrete continuously between predetermined

expansion, control and construction joints. Do not break or interrupt placement of concrete in manners that cause cold joints to occur.

2) Footings: Place footings in one continuous pour. 3) Concrete Slabs:

a) General: Lay slabs to required lines and grades, in pattern shown. Water subgrade at exterior concrete the night before placement; wet again immediately before placement.

b) Flatness: Per ASTM E1155 – Test Method for Determining Flatness and Levelness using the F-Number System.

e. Compacting: 1) General: Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement,

embedded components and into corners of forms. Do not puddle, tamp or vibrate concrete which has already taken initial set nor shall it be continued so long as to cause segregation of material/

2) Slabs: Compact concrete on grade by spading and puddling. 3) Formwork: Vibrate outside for forms, hammering at location of

pouring. All other concrete shall be compacted by high speed internal vibrators.



f. Grout: Provide grout conforming to Section 51-1.03E(2) of Caltrans Standard Specifications.

4. Concrete Finishes a. Slab Finish:

1) General: Uniformly spread, screed and float concrete. Tolerance for flatness shall be 1/8 inch in 10’-0”.

2) Broom: Apply at exterior walks, perpendicular to direction of traffic flow.

b. Joints: Expansion joints and score lines shall comply with civil plans. 5. Curing: a. General: Protect concrete from premature drying.

b. Exterior Slabs: Cover and cure with membrane curing or moist sand; upon completion wash clean.

c. Concrete in Forms: Keep wet until forms are stripped. 6. Removal of Forms:

a. General: Sequence and time to insure safety of concrete structure; remove without damage to concrete surfaces.

b. Stripping: 1) General: Maintain forms in place for not less than the following

number of days when air temperature in contact with concrete is 60 degrees F or above. Add an additional day for each day that temperature falls bellows 60 degrees F, unless otherwise directed.

2) Slab Edge Screeds: Five (5) days. 3) Forms: Five (5) days. 7. Defective Concrete:

a. General: Remove or cut out defective concrete and repair before concrete is dry, as directed by Owner’s Representative.

b. Defective Concrete: 1) General: Concrete not meeting specified 28-day strength.

2) Durability and Appearance: Concrete containing rock pockets, voids, spalls, cracks, exposed reinforcing, or other defects.

3) Alignment: Incorrectly formed concrete, out of plumb or level. 4) Deleterious Materials: Concrete containing embedded wood or

debris. 5) Unauthorized Patching: Concrete with patched voids that were

not filled under Owner’s Representative’s direction. 6) Embedded Items: Concrete not containing required embedded

items. c. Patching:

1) General: Repair minor defective work with cement mortar. Serious defects, defects affecting the strength of the structure, or unsatisfactory patching may be cause for complete removal. All repairs to defective concrete involving structural strength are subject to approval of Owner’s Representative.



2) Preparation: Chip or minor defective areas to a depth of 1 inch, with edges perpendicular to surface. Wet area at least 6 inches around surface to be patched to prevent absorption of water from patching mortar.

3) Repair: Coat with cement wash mix consisting of neat cement and solution of 1 part specified bonding agent to 6 parts of water. Immediately apply patching mortar consisting of 1 part cement and 3 parts fine aggregate mixed with solution of 1 part specified bonding agent to 6 parts of water.

4) Finishing: Thoroughly compact mortar by ramming into place and screed off to leave patch slightly higher than surrounding surface. Allow to set for 1 to 2 hours to permit initial shrinkage before finishing; match adjoining surfaces. Provide protective covering, keep wet for at least 7 days.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Per CBC, Section 2605(g) and 2628; agency selected and paid for by Owner. B. Field Testing: Take two (2) cylinders and test, for each 50 cubic yards of concrete mix being

placed each day. Test first cylinder at the age of 7 days and the other at 28 days, cylinder for 28-day test will not be broken if cylinder for 7-day test meets 28 day strength.

C. Retesting: Cost of retest or coring because of understrength, questionable or defective concrete will be paid for by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


32 3113 - 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES ANDGATES

SECTION 32 3113CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES


A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts.C. Manual gates and related hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2011a.D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.E. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.F. ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2014a.G. ASTM F1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Welded, for Fence Structures; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for requirements.B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,

hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts

relative to property lines and easements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Posts, Rails, and Frames: ASTM F1083 Schedule 40 hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe, weldedconstruction, minimum yield strength of 30 ksi (205 MPa).

B. Wire Fabric: ASTM A392 zinc coated steel chain link fabric.C. Concrete: Ready-mixed, complying with ASTM C94/C94M; normal Portland cement; 2,500 psi

(17 MPa) strength at 28 days, 3 inch (75 mm) slump; ____ inch (____ mm) nominal sizeaggregate.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Line Posts: 1.9 inch (48 mm) diameter.B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2.38 inch (60 mm).C. Gate Posts: 3.5 inch (89 mm) diameter.


32 3113 - 2 CHAIN LINK FENCES ANDGATES

D. Top and Brace Rail: 1.66 inch (42 mm) diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled.E. Gate Frame: 1.66 inch (42 mm) diameter for welded fabrication.F. Fabric: 2 inch (51 mm) diamond mesh interwoven wire, 6 gage, 0.1620 inch (4.12 mm) thick,

top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage twisted tight.G. Tension Wire: 6 gage, 0.1620 inch (4.12 mm) thick steel, single strand.H. Tie Wire: Aluminum alloy steel wire.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.C. Hardware for Single Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1525

mm) high, 3 for taller gates; fork latch with gravity drop and padlock hasp; keeper to hold gate infully open position.

D. Hardware for Double Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1525mm) high, 3 for taller gates; drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket stop set in concrete,active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to holdgate in fully open position.


A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567.B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.C. Set intermediate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish

grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff.D. Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F567.E. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F567.F. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and

diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.G. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches (50 mm) above finished grade.H. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15

inches (380 mm) on centers.I. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.J. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.K. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install hardware.

3.02 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch (25 mm).

END OF SECTION


33 1000 - 1 WATER UTILITIES

SECTION 33 1000 WATER UTILITIES


A. Work under this section includes all materials and installation necessary for relocation and realignment of existing water main and placement of a backflow prevention device and valves to isolate the domestic service.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 32 13 13 – Site Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES A. University of Southern California List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies. B. City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. C. City of Sacramento Cross Connection Policy

1.04 PROTECTION A. Protect existing private water system from damage. B. Prevent backflow of water into private system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s data sheet submittal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. PVC Piping AWWA C900 Class 150 B. Water service connection materials 1. The City of Sacramento water division maintains a listing of approved water service

connection fittings which establish a standard of material quality. Fittings used shall be limited to those on the list. Alternate material may be added to this list upon review, test and accepted by the CSUS representative.

2. Threads for underground water service connection fittings shall conform to AWWA Standard C800 Threads for underground service line fittings.

C. Backflow Prevention Devices – the backflow prevention devices for connection to a private system shall be listed on the “List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies” prepared by the University of Southern of California VITERBI

1. __” AMES 4000B for Domestic Service of New Building connected to private water system. D. Water pipe fittings shall comply in conformance with City of Sacramento Standard

Specifications for Public Works Construction. E. Thrust blocks shall comply in conformance with City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for

Public Construction, dated June 2007 for private mains. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. All water pipe and other appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.02 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL FOR WATER PIPE A. All trenching, backfill and cover for water pipe shall comply in conformance with section 27-3

and 27-8 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Constructions, dated June 2007.


33 1000 - 2 WATER UTILITIES

3.03 LAYING WATER PIPES A. All water pipes shall be laid in conformance with section 27-4 of City of Sacramento Standard

Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. 3.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES

A. Where plans indicate backflow prevention assemblies are required for connection to a private water main, devices shall be installed in accordance with City of Sacramento Standard drawing W505.

B. City of Sacramento Water Division's "Cross Connection Control Policy" sets forth requirements for design, construction, installation, and maintenance of backflow prevention assemblies. Copies of the "Cross Connection Control Policy" are available from Administration office of Water Division.

3.05 DISINFECTION OF WATER MAINS AND SERVICES A. Disinfection of water mains and services shall be in conformance with section 27-12 of City of

Sacramento Standard Specifications for public construction, dated June 2007. 3.05 PRESSURE TESTING WATER MAINS INSTALLATIONS A. Pressure testing shall be in conformance with section 27-13 of City of Sacramento Standard

Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. END OF SECTION


33 3000 - 1 SANITARY SEWER UTILITIES

SECTION 33 3000 SANITARY SEWER UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work under this section shall include all material and installation for placing a new sewer service and cleanouts to within 5 feet of proposed building.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage Utilities.

1.03 REFERENCES A. City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s data sheet submittal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING

A. Sanitary Sewer Piping shall comply with ASTM D2661. 2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and fittings shall comply in conformance to the following sections of standard specifications for public construction of the City of Sacramento, dated June 2007.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

A. All trenching and backfill shall comply in conformance with Section 26 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Constructions, dated June 2007.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. Cleanouts shall be placed at a maximum distance of 100 feet, unless otherwise noted on the

plan. B. All installation shall comply in conformance with Section 26-5 of City of Sacramento Standard

Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. 3.04 TESTING OF PIPE

A. All testing of pipe shall comply in conformance with Section 26-10 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

END OF SECTION


33 4000 - 1 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

SECTION 33 4000 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work under this section shall include materials and installation necessary to provide new storm drains, drainage inlets and manhole, all as detailed on the plans or specified herein. This section also covers testing of the completed facilities. Pipe sizes shown are nominal inside diameter, unless otherwise indicated. Drainage inlets and manhole shall be as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 33 30 00 – Sanitary Sewer Utilities D. Section 32 13 13 – Site Concrete

1.03 REFERENCES A. City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s data sheet submittal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT, MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Cement mortar shall comply with Division 3 – Concrete. Cement mortar or grout which has been mixed for over one (1) hour shall not be used.

B. Concrete for use in manhole shall comply with City of Sacramento “Class A” concrete as specified in City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

C. Control Density fill (CDF) shall comply in conformance with Section 10-16 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

2.02 TRENCH DRAIN A. Zurn 806 trench drain B.

2.03 STORM DRAIN PIPING A. Ductile iron pipe storm drain piping shall comply per City of Sacramento Standard

Specifications for Public Constructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

A. Trench for all utilities shall be in open cut trenches to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. Trenches shall not be left open farther than 300’ in advance of pipe laying operations or 200’ to the rear thereof, unless otherwise permitted by the Owner’s Representative.

B. All trenching and backfill shall comply in conformance with Section 26 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Constructions, dated June 2007.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STORM DRAINAGE FACILITIES A. A. Drainage Inlets shall be as shown or specified on the drawings and as required for the

alignment and profile shown.


33 4000 - 2 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

B. All installation shall comply in conformance with Section 25 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

3.03 LAYING PIPE A. Pipe shall be laid in conformance with Section 26-5 of City of Sacramento Standard

Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007. B. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according

to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 TESTING OF PIPE

A. A. All testing of pipe shall comply in conformance with Section 26-10 of City of Sacramento Standard Specifications for Public Construction, dated June 2007.

END OF SECTION